Manual Esa Polymath

User
UserManual
Manual
Rev.
Rev.2.0
2.2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction ........................................................................................1
What is Polymath? .........................................................................1
What does Polymath do? ................................................................1
Which POLYMATH version? .......................................................1
Main POLYMATH functions ........................................................ 2
The Manual 5
Conventions used in the Manual ....................................................5
ESA Elettronicas Customer Care service ..................................... 6
Installation ..........................................................................................7
Minimum requirements ..................................................................7
Recommended requirements .......................................................... 8
Installing POLYMATH ..................................................................9
Layout of menus ...............................................................................15
Main menu ....................................................................................16
The Toolbar .................................................................................. 83
Anchorable windows.................................................................... 84
Managing the project ......................................................................89
Choice of interface .......................................................................89
Double Click Interface .................................................................90
Extended Interface ........................................................................91
Changing the type of interface ......................................................92
Creating a project in Wizard mode ..............................................93
Changing elements within a project .............................................97
Opening a project ....................................................................... 103
Saving a project ..........................................................................104
Network project ..........................................................................104
Creation of a network project .....................................................104
ServerIT107 Project ...................................................................107
PC Client Project ........................................................................108
Network Project ..........................................................................108
ESAPOLYMATH - User manual - rev. 2.2
Compilation of the network project ...........................................109

Download the network project ...................................................111
Multi-devices.............................................................................. 112
Multi-Panels ...............................................................................117
Project Explorer ............................................................................121
Operating on elements within the Project Explorer window .....123
Setting the panel .........................................................................127
Software Configuration ..............................................................133
Variables..................................................................................... 136
Languages and Fonts ..................................................................166
Pages ...........................................................................................168
Layer ...........................................................................................169
Popup pages ................................................................................176
Frames ........................................................................................178
Alarms ........................................................................................182
Recipes Types ............................................................................203
Users and Passwords ..................................................................213
User log Export ..........................................................................218
Data Archive ..............................................................................220
TrendBuffersXY......................................................................... 226
DataLog ......................................................................................228
Scripts......................................................................................... 228
GlobalScripts .............................................................................. 230
Text list .......................................................................................230
Image list .................................................................................... 232
Images ........................................................................................232
Advanced ....................................................................................237
Pipelines ..................................................................................... 237
Reports ....................................................................................... 240
Remote Notifications.................................................................. 246
System Keyboards...................................................................... 250
Keyboards ...................................................................................253
Weekly Tasks .............................................................................256
Schedulers ..................................................................................259
Holiday Group ............................................................................267
Audio Files ................................................................................. 270
Timers .........................................................................................274
Configuring the device ...............................................................278
Properties Editor ............................................................................281
Properties Editor .........................................................................281
Events Editor ..............................................................................288
Managing a page ........................................................................ 295
Predefined graphic elements ......................................................299
Simple Figures............................................................................ 300
Value fields ................................................................................ 325
Invert Function Option ...............................................................325
Invert Function option operation ................................................326
Thresholds option functioning ...................................................327
Objects to which the Thresholds functionality can be applied ...332
Simple Controls ..........................................................................373
Complex Controls ......................................................................400
Movement properties of the objects ...........................................462
Operations on graphic elements .................................................464
Other anchorable windows ........................................................... 479
POLYMATH Libraries ..............................................................479
Errors Viewer .............................................................................499
Warning Viewer .........................................................................500
Compiler Output .........................................................................500
Compiling, Downloading and Runtime ........................................503
Project simulation....................................................................... 505
Downloading a project ............................................................... 508
Change Password ....................................................................... 519
Download the IT OPERATING SYSTEM image ..................... 521
Set up an Ethernet connection ....................................................521
Downloading the image of the Operating System for VT CE ...523
Establishing an Ethernet connection ..........................................523
Online tools ................................................................................528
Backup / Restore ........................................................................536
Restore (Remote panel update) ..................................................539
Panel Reset .................................................................................549
Scripts 553
The object ESAUSERMGR .......................................................563
The object ESAALARMMGR ...................................................563
The object ESARECIPEMGR ................................................... 566
The object ESARECIPETYP .....................................................567
The object ESARECIPEARC ....................................................568
The object ESARECIPETRF .....................................................570
The object ESAPIPEMGR .........................................................572
The object ESATIMER ..............................................................574
The object ESATRENDMGR ....................................................575
The object ESAPAGEMGR....................................................... 580
The object ESAPAGE ................................................................584
The object ESACNTRL .............................................................585
The object ESAPRN ...................................................................639
Examples of Script use ............................................................... 642
Tutorial 651
Phase 1 - The Project and Hardware Configuration ...................651
Phase 2 - Software configuration ............................................... 653
Phase 3 - Configuration of variables and Memory areas ...........656
Phase 4 - General configuration of the VT ................................663
Phase 5 - Defining the alarms .................................................... 666
Phase 6 - Defining recipe types ..................................................668
Phase 7 - Loading Images .......................................................... 669
Phase 8 - Defining text and image lists ......................................671
Phase 9 - Setting Pipelines ......................................................... 673
Phase 10 - Defining a Trend Buffer ...........................................674
Phase 11 - Graphic setting, drawing a Frame............................. 675
Phase 12 - Creating pop-up pages .............................................. 685
Phase 13 - Drawing Full Screen pages....................................... 689
Phase 14 - Using complex controls ............................................ 699
Phase 15 - Defining the Trend graph .........................................704
Phase 16 - Compilation and Download...................................... 709
Available functions for Remote connection from the PC........... 713
Remote Desktop .........................................................................713
Installation and registration ........................................................713
Use of Remote Desktop ..............................................................714

Enable and disable FTP ..............................................................721
Passthrough ................................................................................ 724
Panels network ...............................................................................731
Example creation of panels network .........................................731
Download the network project ................................................... 734
Appendix A - System Variables ....................................................737
Appendix B - Predefined functions ..............................................745
Appendix C - Status area ..............................................................761
VT Status area ............................................................................761
Keyboard status area .................................................................. 763
Status area of recipes - new style (non-compatible mode) .........763
Status area of recipes - old style (compatible mode) .................764
Appendix D - Command area .......................................................765
Command area for New Style (non compatible) recipes ...........771
Command area for Old style (compatible) recipes .....................771
Appendix E - VTxxxW Panels Management ..............................773
Esplora Progetto ......................................................................... 775
Appendix F - Update Operating System ......................................777
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.
Introduction
What is
Polymath?
Polymath is the programming software of ESA elettronica, developed in .NET technology with latest generation features.
Equipped with a modern and complete interface, it offers a
wide functionality range in step with the new requirements on
the HMI market.
What does
Polymath do?
The architecture of Polymath is extremely flexible as it allows

to program all operator panels in the ESA range, as well as develop supervision solutions for small and medium plants. In
this way, the user can pass easily from an application developed on HMI platform to one developed on PC platform and vice
versa.
The concept behind Polymath is to be the switching-point between the customer and the terminal; in fact, it is the tool that
allows the user to transfer his or her own ideas onto the panel
creating projects at different levels of development. It is a universal software, that is, it can be used to program the behavior of ESA Windows CE terminals, independent of their
particular features and technical characteristics.
The work performed by Polymath produces a compiled project
containing all the operative details of the package created.
Once the project has been compiled without errors, it can be
uploaded and installed on the panel, which is now ready to
use. Polymath guides the user at every step of the development of the project: from its creation to editing, from compilation to its passage to the terminal.
Thanks to a very high number of communication protocols
supported, with Polymath there are no longer limits to connectivity both in industrial environments and towards the world of
PCs. All of the most important communication buses in the industrial world are also available: Profibus, DeviceNet, Can and
Profinet.
In Polymath, the user may also use tools to import and export
recipes, alarms, translations and variables in standard Excel
format, other than a dictionary for automatic term translation
Which
POLYMATH
version?
POLYMATH HMI
POLYMATH HMI is the configuration software studied especially for the development of applications for ESA terminals in the
IT, SC and VT range.
ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2
Chapter 1
Introduction
POLYMATH Advanced
Polymath Advanced offers a system of integrated programming that allows development of applications for the entire
range of ESA products: from the VT textual terminals, on to
the high performance products of the IT family, to the advanced supervision projects on PC.
POLYMATH Premium
Polymath Premium is the Polymath license which allows Polymath HMI license holders to switch to the Advanced version.
The installation of the POLYMATH Premium package allows for
use of all the functions offered by the POLYMATH Advanced
platform.
Note: For a better knowledge of the functions offered by a particular

product, please consult the products technical characteristics on
www.esahmi.com
Main
POLYMATH
functions
The main Polymath functions include :
Data and Trend storage : Polymath allows to monitor

the value in time of any variable through the Data Logging function, allowing to view on screen, in table format, the trend of a variable in time, as well as to export
the value history through Excel or CSV file. Polymath allows the configuration of two types of different Trends:
Classic Buffer Trend, through which one can monitor the
trend of one variable in time, and Trend XY which allows
to view a graph in which the value trend of two different
variables is related (see chap. 5, Data Archive
page 220).
Multi-structure recipes : It is possible to configure recipe structures each containing a different number of variables. In this way it is possible to prepare different
sets of data for different production methods (see chap.
5, Recipes Types page 203).
Rich library of objects : Polymath has available a rich library of objects, highly treated both in appearance of
the graphics and in their function. The objects are subdivided by category and can easily be positioned in the
pages with a simple drag&drop. The library can also be
customised according to requirements by adding
objects created directly by the user and can be shared
Chapter 1
Introduction
in the network to be automatically used within different

Polymath installations (see chap. 7, POLYMATH Libraries page 479 e see chap. 7, Libraries management
page 490).
VBscript with Intellisense : Polymath offers a further level of customization of the applications thanks to VBScript. VBScript is a standard programming language
which allows to create own routines. Thanks also to
Polymath's "Intellisense" function, the user can access
a library of specific and powerful functions developed by
ESA for its own operator terminals (see chap. 9, Scripts page 553).
Project data importing/exporting: Polymath makes
practical utilities available for importing and exporting
all data that is used to create a project, such as for
example recipes (see chap. 5, Recipe list page 204)
alarms, (see chap. 5, Alarms Import / Export
page 193) lists of variables and text (see chap. 5, Variables Export /Import page 157). Polymath also allows
to import the variables directly from the PLC database
(as is the case for Siemens, Allen-Bradley, Omron and
Codesys, see chap. 4, Creating a project in Wizard mode page 93).
Transfer of archived data : Thanks to Polymath you'll
have the possibility to export any kind of archived data
on the panel (alarms, recipes, trend history, variable
values, etc.) directly on extractable USB drives or on
boards such as Secure Digital, MMC and Compact Flash
(using the CSV format). It is also possible to use functions able to transfer, also automatically, the archived
data directly in a remote PC folder through a LAN or FTP
connection (see chap. 11, FTP Server page 721).
OFF-LINE and ON-LINE simulator : It is possible to simulate a Polymath project OFF-LINE directly on the PC
without needing to transfer it into the terminal. The functionality of ON-LINE Simulator also allows to test the
developed project by connecting the devices to test directly to one's own PC, such as for example PLC, thus
allowing to verify perfect operation of the application
without the need to have a panel available (see chap. 8,
Project simulation page 505).
Indirect addressing : The indirect addressing function
allows to greatly reduce a project's development times,
especially if there is need to manage complex projects,
in which however many pages appear similar to each
other. Thanks to this function, the variables value is determined in a dynamic way at runtime, allowing to de-
Chapter 1
Introduction
sign certain pages just once (see chap. 5, Indirect

Addresses page 154).
Project back-up and restoring : Polymath allows to create a single compressed file containing all the information for transferring or updating a project developed for
IT terminals or of a SCADA PC application. The file created can be sent, for example by E-mail, to the final
user who will then be able to copy it on the device
through a simple guided procedure (see chap. 8,
Backup / Restore page 536).
Passthrough : Polymath allows to check, thanks to PASSTHROUGH mode, a third party PLC such as Omron
(Host-link, CJ1, CP1 and CS1) and Panasonic (FP Series
and FP Sigma) and to carry out any operation allowed
by the relative software, remaining with one's own PC
comfortably connected to the panel; in fact, the panel
will be the means for connection between different devices and the corresponding software (see chap. 11,
Passthrough page 724).
Email and text message alerts : Polymath allows management of event or alarm notification through text messages and E-mail. It is possible to match a personalised
text message and/or E-mail, for every single event or
verification of a specific alarm condition. Through Polymath it is also possible to restrict sending of such communications to user groups based on specific time slots
or days of the week (see chap. 5, Remote Notifications
page 246).
Dictionary : In Polymath, a practical utility is also available for the automatic translation of text in 36 languages, with a database of 400.000 words, short phrases
and technical terms. It will therefore also be possible to
make one's project international with minimum effort,
being able to start from any of the 36 supported languages to automatically translate the text in all the languages necessary (see chap. 5, Languages and Fonts
page 166). The created dictionaries may also be shared
on the network with other Polymath installations (see
chap. 3, Shared Dictionary page 36).
Additional Polymath functions include :
Horizontal or vertical terminal direction

Project documentation
Advanced user management
Scheduler
Network projects between panels
Chapter 1
Introduction
Remote project download

Advanced handling of objects
The Manual
This manual is designed to be a constant guide for ESAs customers, describing and explaining the different features that
the software offers. It is aimed at the average user of ESA
products, guiding both first-time users of ESA products and
those already familiar with previous versions of the configurator.
The principal concepts and the method of use related to each
topic and operative feature will be illustrated using appropriate examples and screenshots.
The information contained in this document is subject to
change without prior notice and do not represent any obligation on the part of ESA elettronica S.P.A.
All products are trade names registered by their respective
owners.
Conventions
used in the
Manual
To make it easier to consult the manual and make the topics

dealt with simpler to understand, we will use symbols that it
would be useful to learn from the outset.
The table below lists all the symbols that are used in the following chapters of this manual:
Tabella 1: List of conventions used
Symbol
File->New
Meaning
Indicates a navigational path; in this
case it means the user should click
consecutively on the File and then New
buttons
Indicates that there is a note; notes
are often inserted to provide suggestions or clarify common doubt
Indicates particularly important points
to be read with care to avoid falling into difficult situations
Indicates that there is a guide dedicated to explaining in detail how a particular operation should be carried out
Indicates that within the description
there are key ideas - ideal for rapid
consultation of the guide in that they
accompany the essential notions
Chapter 1
Introduction
ESA
Elettronicas
Customer Care
service
In the event of any doubts about the use of POLYMATH or other ESA products, contact ESA Elettronicas Customer Care service (open Monday to Friday from 8.30 to 12.30 and 14.00 to
18.00).
Customer Care telephone number: 0039/031/757400
Fax: 0039/031/751777
E-mail: [email protected]
Important: it is always a good idea to annotate the currently installed version of POLYMATH and keep it to hand every time you
contact ESAs Customer Care service. The version of the software is
shown in the main menu by clicking on Help->Information
Chapter 2
Installation
2.
Installation
This chapter supplies information needed to be able to undertake the first steps towards using POLYMATH: installation.
We set out the requirements a machine must have for the application to function correctly as well as the crucial steps that
make up the installation phase.
Note: POLYMATH is a programming utility for ESA panels ESA that

use the Windows CE operating system, but this configuration software can be installed on PCs using the Windows 2000, WindowsXP, Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating system.
Minimum
requirements
Below are set out the minimum requirements necessary for

using POLYMATH on ones machine:
Tabella 1: Minimum requirements
Type
Requirement
Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4
Operating
system
Windows XP with Service Pack 3

Windows Vista
Windows 7
RAM
1 GB RAM
Processor
Pentium IV or equivalent
Screen
resolution
1024*768
Space on
Hard Disk
3 GB
Chapter 2
Installation
Recommended
requirements
Below are set out the recommended requirements for being

able to run POLYMATH better on ones machine:
Tabella 2: Recommended Requirements
Type
Requirement
Windows 2000 with Service Pack
4 or better
Operating
system
Windows XP with Service Pack 3

or better
Windows Vista
Windows 7
RAM
2 GB RAM or more
Processor
Pentium IV or better
Screen
resolution
1024*768 or better
Space on
Hard Disk
3 GB or more
Chapter 2
Installation
Installing
POLYMATH
Once the presence of the minimum requisites have been checked on your mac-hine, it is possible to start the installation
of POLYMATH.
Close or end any application active on the computer.
Introduce the POLYMATH program DVD-ROM.
The following window is presented automatically :
Select your language of choice. This window appears offering

several options:
10
Chapter 2
Installation
Select "Install Polymath". This window appears. Select your

language of choice and click "Next":
Select "Next :
Chapter 2
11
Installation
Read and accept the license terms and select "Next :
Read and accept the license terms and select "Next :
12
Chapter 2
Installation
Select one of the options and click "Next":
Select "Next in order not to modify the default folder of the

POLYMATH program (C:\Program Files\ESA elettronica\ESAPOLYMATH x.xx) or "Change to modify the pathway :
Note: as POLYMATH is a software in continuous development, with

frequent issues of new versions, it is useful specify directories different to the default ones (e.g. ESAPOLYMATH_X.XX) in order to allow different versions to coexist on the same machine, if this
necessity should arise.
Chapter 2
13
Installation
Introduce the following information regarding the user :
Note: When Polymath is installed in Demo mode without license, a

temporary "TRIAL" license, lasting thirty days, is activated. At the
end of the thirty days the user is warned through a pop up window
where the field for inserting the actual license appears; if the user
inserts the correct license, it is possible to continue using Polymath,
otherwise, the program will close and it will no longer be possible
to use Polymath.
Select "Install" :
14
Chapter 2
Installation
Select "End, the POLYMATH installation procedure has ended.
Chapter 3
15
Layout of menus
3.
Layout of menus
Before we can confidently operate the numerous features

offered by POLYMATH we need to familiarise ourselves with
the work environment and its various menus.
The layout of the application can be divided into the following
areas:
main menu
toolbars
work area
a series of anchorable windows
This chapter offers guidelines for making general software
settings and will pay particular attention to the main menu
and the toolbar which are the basic instruments for carrying
out any operations within POLYMATH. We will also refer to the
various anchorable windows which will be dealt with in greater
detail in the course of the following chapters.
16
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
The functions offered by the toolbar can all be accessed via

the main menu.
Main menu
The main menu is the tool that permits POLYMATHs main

project and settings operations to be performed.
It is located in the top part of the program window and is a

fixed element that cannot be repositioned within the
framework of the page. There are also various scrollable
submenus each offering different functions as set out in the
paragraphs that follow.
File menu
Table 1: Functions in the File menu

Icon
NA1
NA1
Path Menu
Description of function
File -> New
Creates a new Wizard project

(see chap. 4, Managing the
project page 89)
File -> Open
Opens an existing project
File -> Close
Closes the project
File -> Save
Saves the project
File -> Save as...
Saves the project with a

different name/path
File -> Print
Prints the project
Chapter 3
17
Layout of menus
Table 1: Functions in the File menu

Icon
NA1
Path Menu
File -> Validate

project
Validates all the project (see

chap. 8, Validation page 503)
File -> Validate

current
Validates the element currently

selected
File -> Compile
Compiles the project (see chap.

8, Compiling, Downloading and
Runtime page 503)
File -> Run project
Opens the project simulator

(see chap. 8, Compiling,
Downloading and Runtime
page 503)
File -> Perform

online simulator
Open the project online simulator (see chap. 8, Compiling,

page 503)
File -> Download
Downloads the project onto the

panel (see chap. 8, Compiling,
page 503)
File -> Exit
Exits from POLYMATH
1.Icon Not Available

Edit menu
Table 2: Functions of the Edit menu

Icon
Path Menu
Modify -> Annul
Annuls the previous operation
18
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Table 2: Functions of the Edit menu

Icon
Path Menu
Modify -> Repeat
Repeats the following operation
Edit -> Cut
Cuts the object selected
Edit -> Copy
Copies the object selected
Edit -> Paste
Pastes the object that has been

cut or copied
Edit -> Cancel
Deletes the object selected
Script Menu
Table 3: Script menu functions

Icon
Path Menu
Script -> Find
Finds a specific string in the

script
Script -> Go to line
Directs to a specific page in the

script
Script -> Comment
Allows to insert a comment in

the script
Script ->
Uncomment
Eliminates a comment from the

script
Script -> Increase

re-entry
Increases the re-entry of the

text in the script
Script -> Reduce

re-entry
Reduces the re-entry of the text

in the script
Chapter 3
19
Layout of menus
Fields menu
Table 4: Functions of the Fields menu

Icon
Path Menu
Fields -> Select
Selects the object clicked on

after pressing
Fields -> Move

Editing area
Moves the Editing area selected

(e.g. Popup Page)
Fields -> Connect
Enables connection of devices

and terminals (see chap. 4,
Managing the project
page 89)
Fields -> Move

Port
Fields -> Create
Moves a connection port

Adds a device or a terminal to
the project
The Create submenu can be reached via the Fields menu and
this submenu can be used to add a large number of elements
to the page (Fields -> Create).
The elements that can be added are grouped under the

following headings:
Simple figures
Value fields
Simple Controls
Complex controls
20
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
The tables below give a description of the commands that can

be launched from this submenu. Refer to the appropriate
chapter for the characteristics peculiar to the elements that
have been added.
Submenu: Simple figures
Table 5: Functions of the submenu: Fields -> Create -> Simple figures
Icon
Path Menu
Simple figures ->

Rectangle
Adds a rectangle to the page

(see chap. 6, Simple Figures
page 300)
Simple figures ->

Ellipse
Adds an ellipse to the page
Simple figures ->

Arc
Adds an arc to the page
Simple figures ->

Circular sector
Adds a circular sector to the

page
Simple figures ->

Line
Adds a line to the page
Simple figures ->

Polygon
Adds a polygon to the page
Simple figures ->

Broken line
Adds a broken line to the page
Simple figures ->

Regular polygon
Adds a regular polygon to the

page
Chapter 3
21
Layout of menus
Table 5: Functions of the submenu: Fields -> Create -> Simple figures
Icon
Path Menu
Simple figures ->

Label
Adds a label to the page
Simple figures ->

Complex label
Adds a complex label to the

page
Simple figures ->

Trend pen
Adds a trend pen to the page

indicating the current value of
the buffer
Simple figures ->

image
Adds an image to the page
Submenu: Value fields
Table 6: Functions of the submenu: Fields -> Create -> Value fields
Icon
Path Menu
Value fields ->

Numerical
Adds a numerical field to the

page (see chap. 6, Value
fields page 325)
Value fields ->

Dynamic
Adds a dynamic text to the page
Value fields ->

ASCII
Adds an ASCII field to the page
Value fields ->

Symbolic
Adds a symbolic field to the

page
22
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Table 6: Functions of the submenu: Fields -> Create -> Value fields
Icon
Path Menu
Value fields ->

Date Time
Adds a field relating to the date

and time to the page
Value fields -> Bar
Adds a bar to the page
Value fields ->

Indicator
Adds an indicator to the page
Submenu: Simple Controls
Table 7: Functions of the submenu: Fields -> Create -> Simple Controls
Icon
Path Menu
Simple Controls ->

Touch Button
Adds a touch button to the page

(see chap. 6, Simple Controls
page 373)
Simple Controls ->

Touch Area
Adds a touch area to the page
Simple controls ->

Touch Keyboard
Button
Determines the keys and is

used only during the
configuration of the run time
keyboard
Simple Controls ->

Slide
Potentiometer
Adds a slide potentiometer

(with no predefined values) to
the page
Simple Controls ->

Slide Selector
Adds a slide selector (with

predefined values) to the page
Simple Controls ->

Potentiometer
Knob
Adds a knob potentiometer

(without predefined values) to
the page
Chapter 3
23
Layout of menus
Table 7: Functions of the submenu: Fields -> Create -> Simple Controls
Icon
Path Menu
Simple Controls ->

Selector Knob
Adds a selector knob (with

predefined values) to the page
Submenu: Complex controls
Table 8: Functions of the submenu: Fields -> Create -> Complex controls
Icon
Path Menu
Complex controls > One-touch

button
Adds a one-touch push-button

to the page (see chap. 6,
Complex Controls page 400)
Complex controls > Double-touch

button
Adds a double-touch button to

the page (see chap. 6,
Complex controls > Frame
Adds a frame to the page (see

chap. 6, Complex Controls
page 400)
Complex controls > Trend
Adds a trend to the page (see

chap. 6, Complex Controls
page 400)
24
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Table 8: Functions of the submenu: Fields -> Create -> Complex controls
Icon
Path Menu
Complex controls > TrendXY
Inserts a trendXY in the page

(see chap. 6, Complex
Controls page 400)
Complex controls > Logged on users

displayed
Displays the users logged on

and allows the password to be
changed (see chap. 6,
Complex controls > Active alarm

table
Adds a table of active alarms to

Complex controls > Alarm history

table
Adds an alarm history table to

Complex controls > User list
Adds a table with a list of users

Complex controls > Recipe list
Adds a table with a list of

recipes to the page (see chap.
6, Complex Controls
page 400)
Complex controls > Recipe editor
Adds a table with a recipe editor

Complex
controls ->
Chronothermostat
Inserts a chronothermostat
view in the page (see chap. 6,
Complex
controls ->
Schedulers
Inserts a scheduler view in

Complex
controls ->
Holiday Groups
Inserts a holiday group view

in the page (see chap. 6,
Chapter 3
25
Layout of menus
Menu: Layout
Table 9: Functions of the menu: Layout

Icon
Path Menu
Layout -> Show

grid
Shows the grid in a page or in a

Hardware configuration (see
chap. 6, Page properties
page 297)
Layout -> Align

grid
Aligns the selected element to

the grid
Layout -> Show/

Hide Touch Grid
Displays / hides the cells to b

selected by the Grill on the
Touch screen
Layout -> Show/

Hide touchsensitive areas
Displays / hides the pixels of

the Area on the Touch screen
Layout -> Enlarge
Enlarges the page display
Layout -> Reduce
Reduces the page display
Layout -> Zoom
Makes it possible to indicate the

display percentage for the page
26
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Table 9: Functions of the menu: Layout

Icon
Path Menu
Layout -> Group
Group two or more elements in

the current selection (see chap.
6, Grouping of two or more
graphic elements page 465)
Layout ->
Separate
Separates the elements of a

group
Layout -> Block
Blocks the objects / pages
Layout -> Un block
Un blocks the objects / pages
Layout -> Redimension with the

control
Re-dimensions the elements

collected, maintaining the aspect.
Using the Layout menu you can also access all the functions
for aligning and positioning the elements within the pages.
This is done using the submenus: Align, Arrange and Level
that are illustrated below.
Submenu: Align
Table 10: Functions of the submenu: Layout -> Align

Icon
Path Menu
Align -> Top
Aligns the object in the

selection with the top (see
chap. 6, Alignment of objects
page 469)
Chapter 3
27
Layout of menus
Table 10: Functions of the submenu: Layout -> Align

Icon
Path Menu
Align -> Bottom

selection with the bottom
Align -> Middle

selection with the middle
Align -> Left

selection with the left
Align -> Centre

selection with the centre
Align -> Right

selection with the right
Submenu: Arrange
Table 11: Functions of the submenu: Layout -> Arrange

Icon
Path Menu
Arrange ->
Horizontally
Arranges the object in the

selection horizontally (see
chap. 6, Arrangement of
objects page 472)
Arrange -> Right

selection to the right
Arrange -> Centre

selection to the centre
28
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Table 11: Functions of the submenu: Layout -> Arrange

Icon
Path Menu
Arrange -> Left

selection to the left
Arrange ->
Vertically

selection vertically
Arrange -> Top

selection to the top
Arrange -> Middle

selection to the middle
Arrange -> Bottom

selection to the bottom
Submenu: Level
Table 12: Functions of the submenu: Layout -> Level

Icon
Path Menu
Level ->
Foreground
Places the object selected into

the foreground (see chap. 6,
Depth order of objects
page 467)
Level ->
Background
Places the object selected onto

the background
Level -> Up
Raises the object selected by a

level
Level -> Down
Lowers the object selected by a

level
Chapter 3
29
Layout of menus
Menu: Image
Table 13: Functions of the menu: Image

Icon
Path Menu
Image -> Load
Load the current image (see

chap. 5, Operations
performable on an image
page 235)
Image -> Edit
Allows the image to be edited
Image -> Remove
Remove the image loaded
Image -> Colour
Makes it possible to choose the

type of colouring between:
Automatic, Tones of grey, White
and Black
Image -> Increase

contrast
Increases the contrast of the

image selected
Image ->
Decrease contrast
Decreases the contrast of the

image selected
Image -> Increase

brightness
Increases the brightness of the

image selected
Image ->
Decrease
brightness
Decreases the brightness of the

image selected
30
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Table 13: Functions of the menu: Image

Icon
Path Menu
Image -> Cut area
Cuts the area selected
Image -> Rotate
Rotates the image selected
Image -> Adapt to

screen
Adapts the selection to the

display
Image -> Maintain

proportions
Maintains the proportions while

the image size is changed
Menu: Display
Table 14: Functions of the menu: Display

Icon
Path Menu
Display -> First

page
Moves to POLYMATH Home

Page
Display -> Last
Moves to last work page

displayed
Display ->
Forward
Moves to next work page

displayed
Display -> Project

language
Display -> Show
all
Makes it possible to change the

current project language
Shows all the anchorable
windows (see chap. 3,
Anchorable windows page 84)
Chapter 3
31
Layout of menus
Table 14: Functions of the menu: Display

Icon
NA1
NA1
NA1
Path Menu
Display -> Hide all
Hides all the anchorable

windows
Display -> Show
Allows to access the anchorable

windows sub-menu
Display -> Tools

bar
Allows to access the tools bar

submenu
Display ->
Restores windows
and bars position
Allows to restore the POLYMATH

windows and bars with the default position
Display -> Full

screen
Allows to display the work window in "Schermo Intero" (Full

Screen) mode
1.Icona Non Disponibile.

Submenu: Show
Table 15: Functions of the submenu: Display -> Show

Icon
Path Menu
Show -> Explore

project
Shows the Explore Project

window (see chap. 3,
Anchorable windows page 84)
Show -> Explore

Library
Shows the Explore Library

window
Show -> Log List
Shows the Log List window
Show ->
Properties Editor
Shows the Properties Editor

window
Show -> Events

Editor
Shows the Events Editor window
32
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Submenu: Toolbar
This submenu lists the twelve groups of icons making up the
toolbar. Using this menu the user can proceed to reintroduce
into the application groups of icons that have been closed and
that no longer appear in the POLYMATH screen. For further
information about the way the toolbar works, please consult
the next paragraph.
Menu: Tools
Options Sub-menu
Table 16: Functions of the menu: Tools
Icon
Path Menu
Tools -> Options
Makes it possible to configure

the Options of POLYMATH
NA1
Tools -> Utility
Accesses POLYMATH utilities
NA1
Tools ->
Translations
Manages the Translation of the

project
NA1
Tools -> Tags/

Variables
Manages the Tags/Variables of

the project
NA1
Tools -> Recipes
Manages the project recipes
NA1
Tools -> Alarms
Manages the project alarms
NA1
Tools ->
Downloader Utility
Accesses the Downloader functions
NA1
Tools ->
Dictionary
To access the Dictionary functions
NA1
Chapter 3
33
Layout of menus
Click on the option Tools -> Options to access the mask for
configuring the Options of POLYMATH.
Use the Language menu to choose the language of the

POLYMATH application. Once the language has been selected
the application will need to be restarted to apply the changes.
34
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
From the "Skin" menu, it is possible to select the skin to use

with the POLYMATH interface.
Use the Various menu to proceed to configure the general Options of the application. The user may decide to view all the
objects during the move or only their outline, to automatically
provide a new name if using the cut/paste function , whether
to validate the project manually (File -> Validate project) or
in real time automatically (see chap. 8, Validation
page 503), to visualise the edit password screen, view or hide
information on the various fields of the page, whether or not
to view the ESA terminal frame on the page editor, whether to
activate the "Invert" option or not, view or hide the images of
structures, graphically decide if wanting to inherit the Hardware configuration, decide whether it should show the message regarding conversation for old programs or not, display or
not display the panel image in the simulator, enable or disable
pop-up window viewing for importing tags, activating the
Trial mode or not, to set the maximum number of windows
open at the same time in the POLYMATH Work area, select between the "ADVANCED" and "DOUBLE-CLICK" modes and decide whether to offer this choice to the user when the
POLYMATH starts up.
Note: The options Manual validation and viewing only the outline
while the objects are being dragged are advised for configuring
particularly slow performing machines.
Chapter 3
35
Layout of menus
It is also possible, by enabling the corresponding check boxes,

to carry out the following operations :
Update control
Automatic project storage
Update control
By enabling the "Update control" option it will be possible to
automatically verify whether there are available POLYMATH
updates in the network; by default, the verification is carried
out automatically each week, but it is possible to vary the control frequency by selecting the available options from the drop
menu :
At the next opening of POLYMATH, the verification of available

updates will be automatically carried out; if there are any, the
following image will appear :
Automatic project storage

By enabling the "Automatic project storage" option, it will be
possible to have an automatic saving mode of the project one
is editing; saving of the project is carried out automatically
every 30 seconds.
36
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Use the "Directories" menu to select a directory in which to save the project. Several folders are available by default according to the type of panel used :
Shared Dictionary
From the "Shared dictionary" menu it is possible to save the
dictionary for term translation by choosing a certain path, this
way it will be possible to access the same translation file from
more PCs on which POLYMATH is installed :
Chapter 3
37
Layout of menus
By clicking on "Source Update", the previously saved dictionary will be kept in continuous updated compare to the local
one :
By clicking on the "Local Update" key, the dictionary used in

the project will be updated with the one in the network :
38
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
By clicking on "Control", POLYMATH will verify eventual differences between source dictionary and local dictionary :
Utility Sub-menu
Table 17: Utility functions menu

Icon
Menu path
Function description
NA1
Utility -> Updates

control
Allows to check the presence of

new software issues of the
POLYMATH program
NA1
Utility -> Project

documents
Allows a document to be
created with the specifics of the
project
Chapter 3
39
Layout of menus
Table 17: Utility functions menu

Icon
Menu path
NA1
Utility -> Panel

converts
Allows the conversion of a panel
NA1
Utility -> Device

converts
Allows the conversion of a device
Utility -> Remove

Tags/Variables
not used
Checks if Tags/Variables not

used are present in the project
NA1
NA1
Utility -> Crossed

reference
NA1
Utility -> Shared

tags
Finds all components used

inside the project.
Configured only components ,
are not included in the research
Displays Tags shared on the
network
NA1
Utility ->Show
Memory
Displays the Tags occupied in

the device memory
NA1
Utility -> Update

operator terminal
This function allows you to restore a backup file and execute

additional backup before restore.
Utility -> Edit/

Find/Replace
scripts
This function allows you to handle (fine, edit and replace)

scripts in a project.
NA1
40
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Update control
The Update control option allows verifying if online there are
more updated Polymath versions compared to the one installed:
By clicking on Next a more recent version of Polymath will

be searched online (on the ESA site) compared to the one installed on the PC, if a more updated version is not found, the
following image is displayed:
If there is an updated version, the following mask will appear,

from here, by clicking "Next", a new Polymath version is installed:
Chapter 3
41
Layout of menus
Project documentation
The Project documentation option allows creating a simple
or complete print report, choosing from .pdf .rtf and .html formats.
In the first screen it is possible to choose the Simple or
Complete option, the first only contains default options:
42
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
while the second one contains all options:
Pressing the next button opens a window from which it is possible to choose the desired page layout:
Chapter 3
43
Layout of menus
By enabling the "include title page" check-box, a preview is

automatically opened with all default parameters enabled:
Pressing next will open a window from which, by clicking on

"Browse", it is possible to select the name and path where the
file is to be saved:
By clicking on Create the project is saved with the desired

file path.
44
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Convert panel
The Convert panel option allows converting the panel used
in the project into an HMI with different characteristics, after
choosing the product family, Building (the Building group
contains panels used for home ), or Industrial (the industrial
group contains panels used for applications that are typically
industrial) systems, open the folders to select the panel type:
Once the panel type and the rotation is chosen (vertical or horizontal), clicking on Next :
Chapter 3
45
Layout of menus
The following image, summarising the operation to be carried

out, will appear :
At this point, click on "Next" and wait for the end of the conversion :
46
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Convert device
The Convert device option allows converting a Device into a
second, during this conversion, only variables with the same
structure are maintained:
The first screen allows choosing the Device group:
Open the folders to choose the Device type:

Once the Device type is chosen, click "Next":
Chapter 3
47
Layout of menus
The following image, summarising the operation to be carried

out, will appear:
At the end of the conversion a Report is displayed listing the

"non converted tags" and a message is present warring the
user that certain panel/device connections may have been removed, next it recommends recreating new connections:
48
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Unused Tags Removal

The "unused Tags Removal" option allows verifying if unused
variables are present in the project, and to eliminate them.
The first screen allows selection, by clicking on the corresponding Unused tags to be removed.
Note: All variables are selected by default.
Pressing the Remove will remove unused Tags:
At the end, click on OK:
Chapter 3
49
Layout of menus
Cross reference
The Cross reference option allows searching for unused
components within all projects, from the following window it
is possible to select search criteria:
The search criteria are the following:
Free search
Find/Replace
Page Elements
Project Tags (with Check enabled by default)
Project Scripts/Functions
Free search
Within Free search it is possible to carry out a search by fields by editing the Name Mask and inserting, for example, the
letter F. In the initial page it is also possible to decide if the
search is to be completed for the entire project or only in a
part of it.
Using two keys, it is also possible to save/load filter conditions
in .XML format.
Then click Search:
50
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
The following mask will display all objects whose name begins
with the letter F:
In the same page, by using the keys, it is also possible to:
Export all: Export all objects in the list to an Excel or

CSV file.
Export selected: Export selected objects in the list to an
Excel or CSV file.
Chapter 3
51
Layout of menus
Modify: After selecting an element from the list, it allows modifying it within the project.
Tree view: Allows modifying how elements are viewed,
from "table" to "tree" type.
Find element: Allows a more detailed search among elements that have already been searched.
New search: Allows carrying out a new search from the
beginning.
Find/Replace
With the Find/Replace option it is possible to find, within the
project, certain elements (for example a Font type) and replace it with another (for example a different Font type):
52
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Let us now select the font to be used:
Clicking Forward, the following screen is appears:
Click "End"
Chapter 3
53
Layout of menus
Page Elements
In the Page Elements option it is possible to complete a
search for elements within the project, with three different
criteria that can be used both individually and at the same
time:
Search by Name : allows carrying out an alphabetic
search among elements, the "Search by Name" option
is divided into three subgroups:
1) Search from : to": the filter is set by the user who can define a search field starting form one letter and finishing with
another one, the following mask will display all objects whose
name is included between M and N, of the " Numerical
Field" category and belonging to the entire project
2) Element name begins with: The filter is set by the user

who defines a search field by selecting the letter at the beginning of the name for the element to be searched
3) Mask : The search filter is the same one of the option
Element name begins with
Element category : Allows searching within each individual category of elements present in the project
Search in: Allows deciding where, within the project,
the search is to be carried out, in the entire project or
only in a portion of it.
54
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Once the filters for carrying out the search are selected, the
following mask is obtained:
From the previously described mask, using the appropriate

keys, it is possible to complete the following operations:

CSV file.
Excel or CSV file.
beginning.
Projects Tags
In the Projects Tags option it is possible to complete a search for elements within the project, with two different criteria
that can be used both individually and at the same time:
Search by Name : allows carrying out an alphabetic
search among elements, the "Search by Name" option
is divided into three subgroups:
Chapter 3
55
Layout of menus
1) Cerca da : a : Il filtro impostato dallutente il quale pu

definire un campo di ricerca iniziando da una lettera e finendo
con unaltra.
Cerca per Tipo: Il filtro impostato dallutente il quale pu
definire un campo di ricerca selezionando il tipo di Tag che si
vuole ricercare, verranno evedenziate tutte le Tag appartenenti allo stesso tipo.
2) Nome dellelemento inizia con : Il filtro impostato
dallutente il quale pu definire un campo di ricerca selezionando la lettera di inizio del nome dellelemento da cercare
3) Maschera : Il filtro di ricerca il medesimo dellopzione
Nome dellelemento inizia con
56
Chapter 3
Layout of menus


CSV file.
Excel or CSV file.
beginning.
Note: The Project Tags option exclusively searches Tags used in

the project. If a Tag is present within the Project Explorer but it
is not associated with any project element, it will NOT be included
in the search.
Chapter 3
57
Layout of menus
Project Scripts/Functions
In the Projects Scripts/Functions option it is possible to complete a search for elements within the project, with two different criteria that can only be used individually:
Search by Name : allows carrying out an alphabetic search among elements, the "Search by Name" option is
divided into three subgroups:
1) Search from : to": The filter is set by the user who can define a search field starting form one letter and finishing with
another one.
2) Element name begins with: The filter is set by the user
who defines a search field by selecting the letter at the beginning of the name for the element to be searched
3) Mask : The search filter is the same one of the option
Element name begins with
Search by Type: allows searching within each individual category of the "Function" or "Script" present in
the panel project. It is possible to choose between IT
and VT based on the panel type used in the project.
IT :
By selecting the "Function" option and choosing an item from
the list (e.g. Exit Runtime) the SW will search all Exit Runtime functions in the project:
58
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
By selecting the "Script" option and choosing an item from the

list (e.g. ESAStartup) the SW will search all ESAStartup
Script in the project:
Chapter 3
59
Layout of menus


CSV file.
Excel or CSV file.
beginning.
VT :
By selecting the "Function" option it is possible to locate all
functions in the project and choosing an item from the
list (e.g. Direct Command to Value) all Direct Command to
Value functions will be displayed:
60
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
By selecting the "Internal Command" and choosing an item of

the list (e.g. Previous Page) the SW will search all "Previous
Page" Internal Commands in the project:
Chapter 3
61
Layout of menus
By selecting the Macro option and choosing an item of the

list ( e.g. High-level ) the SW will search all the High-level
macro used in the project :
62
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Shared Tags
The shared Tags option allows viewing all Tags present in
the project, and allows the user to choose one or more variables to be shared on the network with a simple step; in practice it makes it possible to quickly modify the Allow tag value
Chapter 3
63
Layout of menus
to be shared via ETH Check used for network project management:
All checkboxes are not selected by default,

they are selected by pressing the "Select all" key. This makes
all project variables shared throughout the network:
64
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
or it is possible to choose the variables to be shared by clicking

on the check-box of each individual item :
The selected Tags will be shared on the network by pressing

the "End" key.
Memory status
With the Memory status option, Polymath makes it possible
to have Device memory occupation state in real time.
Using a graphical interface , the user can immediately identify
the areas that have been allocated or that are free.
If more devices are used, it is possible to choose the one where "Memory Status" control is to be completed on:
Chapter 3
65
Layout of menus
The "DataArea" is the list of memory Areas that can be configured, it is different for each Device and it allows selecting
between Database Area "Types" used to display "Memory Status". After selecting the desired field (e.g. Dbw) press "Next" :
66
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Setting a value of "10" in the DB field, a screen opens in the

page showing DBW 10 Memory occupation state.
It is also possible to view the BIT memory occupation,

by selecting InputBit in the Data Area item:
Chapter 3
67
Layout of menus
Clicking Next, the following screen appears:
Operator terminal update

The "Operator terminal update" option can be used only with
the "VT" family terminals (regarding the "IT" family terminals,
see chap. 8, Backup / Restore page 556) and allows creating
a "backup file containing the entire project and the VT terminal firmware.
From the Tools menu, select the "Operator terminal update"
sub-menu:
68
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
On the first Screen it is possible to choose between opening

an existing procedure (previously saved), or creating a new
one, the default image is the following :
New procedure
To create a "New procedure", select the corresponding option
then click "Next" :
Chapter 3
69
Layout of menus
Select the operator panel being used in the project and that
needs to be backed up, then click "Next":
From the following screen, choose the COM port to be used,

set communication speed, then click "Next":
From the following screen, choose the operation to be performed; either carrying out backup of firmware, the project or
recipes present on the terminal, or downloading the firmware,
the project and one of the previously saved recipes present on
70
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
the PC hard disk or on an external support (USB pen drive) to

the terminal:
For example, choose to back-up the firmware and the project

present on the terminal, select the corresponding check-boxes, then click "Next":
Chapter 3
71
Layout of menus
From the obtained screen, it is possible to select an existing

folder or to manually insert the path, after the folder is chosen, click "Next" :
A report of the situation of the previous wizards is viewed on

the next page, by pressing "Save Procedure" it is possible to
save the selected folder in the structure :
72
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Pressing "Save" will save in ".xml" format:
Pressing the "End" key will create a folder with the files necessary for project Backup.
At this point, open the folder where the procedure has been
saved, or, more precisely, open the path: ESA Elettronica\Batch Executor\xx-xx-2011 0859\BatchExecutor.bat
Clicking twice on the BatchExecutor.bat command a "Dos"
window will open, follow the instructions on video, the backup
file will be saved at the end of the sequence :
Chapter 3
73
Layout of menus
Note: The panel needs to be set on the transfer page. Open an existing procedure
To open an existing procedure, select the corresponding option then click "Browse" :
Select the previously saved procedure, then click "Open" :
74
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Subsequently it is possible to choose the terminal type, the

default option is the one previously saved:
From the following screen, choose the COM port to be used,

set communication speed, then click "Next":
Chapter 3
75
Layout of menus
For example, choose to Download the firmware and the

project previously saved with the back-up, select the corresponding check-boxes, then click "Browse":
Pressing Browse" will open a window where Backup files are

associated in the folder.
76
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
From the obtained screen, click "Next" :
A report of the situation of the previous wizards is viewed on

the next page, by pressing "Save Procedure" it is possible to
save the selected folder in the structure :
Pressing the "End" key will copy the necessary files to

Download the project.
At this point, open the folder where the procedure has been
saved, or, more precisely, open the path: ESA Elettronica\Batch Executor\xx-xx-2011 0859\BatchExecutor.bat.
Chapter 3
77
Layout of menus
Clicking twice on the BatchExecutor.bat command

will open a "Dos" window, follow the instructions on video, the
previously saved file will be transferred at the end of the sequence:
Modify/Find/Replace scripts
This function allows to manage (find, modify, replace) the
scripts present in the project.
On the left main window it is possible to modify the search page between default Scripts and GlobalScripts set on "ESAStartup".
78
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
On the right main window there are five keys that have the
following functions :
Find next: allows carrying out an alphabetic single search on the Script name.
Replace: allows carrying out a single replacement of
a script or of part of it.
Replace all: allows carrying out a complete alphabetic replacement on the name of the Script (the replacement result is indicated by inserting a "*" next to the
page name).
"Search all" allows carrying out a complete alphabetic
search (the search result is indicated by inserting a "*"
next to the page name).
"Show the compiled file" shows the compilation of all
the scripts in the project; in this window, the compiled
file is for viewing only and may not be changed.
Close : Closes the current screen
On the centre main window there are two fields the mandatory
one is "Find" and the optional one is "Replace with" :
Chapter 3
79
Layout of menus
Upper case\lower case: by enabling the check, words

containing upper-case or lower-case characters will be
searched.
"Whole words only" : by enabling the check only whole
words will be searched.
"Use Regular Expressions" or "Wildcard characters" :
"Regular Expressions" are syntaxes used to represent
groups of strings. In computing, a "Wildcard character"
or "jolly" or "wild" character is a character that doesn't
represent itself inside a string, but a group of other characters or character strings (with the only exception of
special meaning characters like "." and "/").
"Search in the hidden text" : Enabled by default, it searches the commented row.
"Search in the selected text" : Searches inside a selected text and highlights the found part.
Search up: allows reversing search direction.
In the main window at the bottom right there are two keys
which allow to adjust the zoom of the compiled file :
If one chooses the "Show the compiled file" option, the first
part of the mask will be transformed as follows :
By going to the "Go to line" field and entering the line number
to view, the user will be directed in the chosen point of the
compiled file after having pressed the "Go" button.
80
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Translations Sub-menu
Table 18: Translations menu functions

Icon
Menu path
NA1
Translations ->
Export
Exports Translations
NA1
Translations ->
Import
Imports Translations

Translations are converted in CSV. format easily transferable
and convertible from each software.
Tags Sub-menu
Table 19: Tags/Variables menu functions

Icon
Menu path
Tags/Variables ->
Export
Exports Tags/Variables
NA1
Tags/Variables ->
Import
Imports Tags/Variables
NA
Chapter 3
81
Layout of menus
Recipes Sub-menu
Table 20: Recipe menu functions

Icon
Menu path
NA1
Recipes -> Export
Exports Recipes
NA1
Recipes -> Import
Imports Recipes
NA1
Recipes ->
Recipe Editor
Allows to manage the recipes

Alarms Sub-menu
Table 21: Alarms menu functions

Icon
Menu path
NA1
Alarms -> Export
Exports Alarms
Alarms -> Import
Imports Alarms
NA
82
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Downloader Utility Sub-menu
Table 22: Utility downloader functions menu

Icon
Menu path
NA1
Utility downloader
->Online Tools
After having connected to the

ESA panel, it allows to carry out
the following operations: To
transfer the project, to explore
the panel, to compare the memory used with that which can
be used, to compare the files
which make up the project to be
transferred with those already
present on the ESA terminal, to
fill in the project.
NA1
Utility downloader
->Backup/Restore
NA1
Utility downloader
->Backup/Restore
VTxxx
Perform backup or restore the

project for VTxxx products
Utility downloader
->Backup/Restore
VTxxxW with
modem

project for VTxxx products by
means of the modem
Sends O/S image

for the Windows IT
panels
Updates the image of the

operating system for IT
panels only
Utility downloader
->Update Boot
Windows CE for IT
and XT
Updates the boot Windows CE

for IT and XT panels
NA1
NA1
NA1

project for CE / IT products
Chapter 3
83
Layout of menus
Table 22: Utility downloader functions menu

Icon
NA1
NA1
Menu path
Utility downloader
->Boot loader
directly for WTxxx
Updates the boot of the VTxxx

terminal without the help of
help messages
Utility downloader
->Boot loader for
WTxxx in assisted
mode
Updates the boot of the VTxxx

terminal with the help of help
messages
? Menu
Table 23: ? menu functions

Icon
NA1
NA1
NA1
Menu path
? -> Register
Allows the user to register the

installed polymath product
? -> Information
Allows the information

regarding the version of the
program to be seen
? -> Help
Allows to access the POLYMATH guide
1. Icon Not Available

The Toolbar
The Toolbar consists of buttons allowing the user to access all

POLYMATH operations.
When the mouse is placed on one of the icons, its meaning is

displayed, see below:
84
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Note: The Toolbar offers a shortcut to the same Functions that you
can access from the main menu. To find out what a given icon
means, consult the Table of Functions in the main menu (see chap.
3, Main menu page 16).
Editing the Toolbar

The Toolbar is organized into groups of icons, each of which
can be managed individually.
To move or delete a group of objects, just drag up from the
bar towards any area of the application. To start the drag,
click on the left edge of the group.
Once you have clicked, the mouse pointer will change into the
dragging cursor typical of Windows. It is now possible to
insert the group wherever you want.
Release the mouse key to apply the move. The group can be
left in any position on the screen or closed by clicking on the
related
. Closed groups can be reinserted into the toolbar
by clicking on the corresponding name in the main menu
(Display->toolbar). The changes to the layout of the toolbar
are saved for the next time POLYMATH is used.
Anchorable
windows
Besides the menu and the icons, the other fundamental

component of POLYMATH is the Anchorable window.
Anchorable windows are:
Project explorer (see chap. 5, Project Explorer
page 121)
Properties editor (see chap. 6, Properties Editor
page 281)
Chapter 3
85
Layout of menus
Events editor (see chap. 6, Properties Editor

page 281)
Library explorer (see chap. 7, POLYMATH Libraries
page 479)
Errors Viewer (see chap. 7, Errors Viewer page 499)
Compiler Output (see chap. 7, Compiler Output
page 500)
The Anchorable windows are described in detail in the
following chapters together with their respective function. In
this section we will simply explain how Anchorable windows
are positioned and managed.
Displaying Anchorable windows
When the program is started up, all the Anchorable windows
are displayed in the layout of the application, though the
software layout can be changed to suit the user.
Each of these windows can be closed at any moment using the
button and hidden using the
button. Hidden windows
remain on the sides of the screen in the form of clickable
folders. To make a window appear again in its fixed position,
click on the icon
.
Note: The Hide function is recommended where the resolution of the

screen is poor and space needs to be reserved for the Work area.
Once Anchorable windows have been closed, they can be reintroduced by clicking on the respective icon in the Tools menu
or using the submenu: Display -> Show. Alternatively they
can be re-introduced using the menu that appears after
clicking with the right-hand key inside the toolbar (first
activate the corresponding check).
By clicking on the icon
(Display -> Show All) all the
Anchorable windows are re-introduced, while the icon
(Display -> Hide all) deletes them all without distinction.
Moving Anchorable windows
Anchorable windows can be moved within the POLYMATH as
the user thinks fit. To move an Anchorable window, select it
by clicking on the title bar of the window in question. See
below:
86
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
POLYMATH is organized into four virtual areas inside of which

a window can be anchored. These virtual areas are situated
respectively to the left, to the right, below and above the Work
area.
To select which of the four areas to move the window to, use
the mouse to place the grab (see picture) on one of the four
arrows of the directional pointer (see picture) in the middle
of the screen. When the mouse key is released, the window
assumes its new position immediately, keeping it until the
next operation. Each time the mouse reaches an area of the
directional pointer, the corresponding destination area is
highlighted.
If the window is dragged within another Anchorable window,

a new directional pointer containing a fifth, central button
appears. When the grab is dragged onto one of the arrows of
the directional pointer and the mouse key is released, the
window is simply set next to the existing one in the
appropriate direction. While if it is dragged onto the fifth
button of the pointer, the window is incorporated as a
clickable folder as indicated in the figure below :
Chapter 3
87
Layout of menus
The windows that are in the form of a clickable folder can be

moved by merely dragging the folder to a new position.
The changes made to the program layout are saved for all
future use of the software.
88
Chapter 3
Layout of menus
Chapter 4
89
4.
The user can completely program the behavior of the terminal

by using POLYMATH which will produce at the end a project
file.
The user can create a project file, edit it as he or she pleases
(using the functions we will describe later on), save it and later reopen it for any further editing.
The aim of this chapter is precisely to furnish the information
needed to create and manage the POLYMATH project files correctly.
Choice of
interface
When the Polymath starts up, in the case of version 2.0 or

above, you are offered a choice of graphical interface: "DOUBLE CLICK" or "EXTENDED". The initial page is shown below :
Click one of the two options to activate the required interface.
90
Chapter 4
Double Click
Interface
The main feature of the "DOUBLE CLICK" interface is that with

a few and simple steps it is possible to edit any object properties.
In this mode in the right part of the development environment
the graphical libraries are in the foreground.
To use a library object simply select one of the present objects
and drag it on the page to then edit it and configure it at will.
Using this type of interface is recommended to those users
who are familiar with the use of Popup pages for the configuration or the editing of objects :
When you have inserted an object you can double-click it to

edit its properties straight away :
Chapter 4
91
Extended
Interface
The main feature of the "EXTENDED" interface is its net division between the graphical characteristics of the object that is
being edited and the object events.
In this mode, on the right part of the development environment the Property Editor object is in the foreground, it is possible to select the Events assigned to the object being edited
at that time in the bottom section.
To use a library object simply select one of the present objects
and drag it on the page to then edit it and configure it at will.
Using this type of interface is recommended for all those users
who prefer a structured interface :
92
Chapter 4
Changing the
type of
interface
You can swap between the "DOUBLE CLICK" or "EXTENDED"

interfaces at any time :
To change interface, click Tools and select Options :
Select VARIOUS then select the interface from the drop-down

menu :
Chapter 4
93
Check the "Choose style at start-up" box if you wish to have

the choice of interfaces when the Polymath starts up.
Leave the checkbox void if you prefer to set your current choice of interface for next time.
Creating a
project in
Wizard mode
The first step using POLYMATH is to create a brand-new

project. The user is offered two ways of creating a new
project: one guided (the Wizard) and one completely manual.
Opening the Wizard
Wizard mode will guide you in creating your projects and in organizing the various hardware components.
There are three ways of activating the Wizard :
Click on
File->New from the main menu
Click on
to enter the Home Page of the program and
Click on Open Wizard to create a project to start up the
guided project creation.
Using the Wizard

To create a project in Wizard mode 5 operations need to be
carried out : choosing the Type of project, choosing the
94
Chapter 4
Panel, choosing the Device, Project information and

Confirmation of the choices. While in any given window of
the Wizard it will be possible to review the preceding step simply by clicking on the Preceding key.
The first choice to make relates to the type of project to be
created; the options available are Simple Project, Network of
Devices or Network of Panels, Multi-devices or Multi-panels.
For example, let's select the "Simple Project" option, once the
choice has been made, click on Continue to proceed :
Now state which ESA panel is to be used; once this choice has
been made, click on Continue to proceed.
Chapter 4
95
If a panel in the "IT" family is selected (excluding panels in the

"IT105K" family), it is possible to have both the horizontal
(0) or vertical (90) display options.
The device to be connected must be selected; different categories are supplied for the selection.
96
Chapter 4
For each category, the devices are divided by Manufacturer's.

Once the selection has been made, click on "Avanti" (Next) to
continue :
Note: the categories proposed in the window differ according to the

type of panel previously selected.
Note: When a user chooses a device that allows the variables import
from database to owner, the mask described below will appear and
it will be possible to decide whether to import the variables at this
stage of the project or to postpone the operation : :
Chapter 4
97
All the data required for the project has now been inserted.
POLYMATH will configure the hardware for the project. You will
then be able to edit the project accordingly.
Changing
elements
within a project
At any given moment it is possible to add, change or cancel

elements and connections which are part of projects Hardware configuration; all you need to do is double-click on the
option Hardware Configuration in the Explore project window (see chap. 5, Project Explorer page 121); the Hardware
Configuration window will now appear :
In the left part of the windown, all the project hardware elements are present, while the right part lists all the possible devices which may be used with the terminal chosen previously.
Terminal or device addition
There are different options to add new devices to the project :
Right-click the mouse inside the white page then choose

"Add New Item" :
Click on the
key present in the tools bar
Select Fields ->
Create...from the main menu
98
Chapter 4
A dialogue window will open from where it is possible to select

ESA devices and panels :
Now the introduction procedure of the object selected, results

identical to that described previously in the "Wizard".
It is possible to enter a device also simply by selecting

it from the list in the right part of the window and dragging it inside the left part of the window itself :
Chapter 4
99
Automatically, a window will open from which it will be possible to set device connection parameters :
By pressing the "Close" button, POLYMATH will automatically

create the connection of the device to the terminal.
100
Chapter 4
Modification and connection of the project components

Once all of the useful elements for the realisation of the
project have been introduced, they must be connected and
the connection modes must be specified.
The "ConfigurazioneHW" (HW Configuration) window displays
the VTs and previously-inserted devices. The ports available
are indicated for every element (MSP,ASP,COM, etc..).
Moving a VT or device
To move a VT or a device to the inside of the Configuration
Window just click on
and then on the element to be
moved. At this point the element has been selected and you
need only drag it (keeping the left mouse key pressed down)
till it reaches the desired position; when the left mouse key is
released the element will remain in the new position unless it
is again moved. If elements containing connections are
moved, POLYMATH will automatically update the position and
the connections showing in the window.
Moving a port
To move a port, click on
; at this point the icons representing the ports can be selected, as in the following example.
After clicking on the port to be moved just drag it (keeping the

left mouse key pressed down) till it reaches the desired position; when the left mouse key is released the port will remain
in the new position unless it is again moved.
Chapter 4
101
If ports that are references to existing connections are moved,

POLYMATH will automatically update the position and the connections showing in the window without altering their nature.
Connecting two elements
If the page contains at least one ESA panel and one device you
will be able to specify the mode of the connection between
them. If you want to add a connection you have first to click
on
and then go on to click inside a free port (one that is
not already a reference to another connection). When the
pointer nears an available port, a small rectangle will appear
next to the pointer containing a connection thread as shown
in the figure.
Without releasing the left mouse key, you can proceed to

specify the connection path (a horizontal line appears).
102
Chapter 4
To establish the second terminal of the connection release the

mouse as soon as the black line reaches the port you wish to
include in the connection. When the pointer nears an available
port, a small rectangle will appear next to the pointer containing a connection thread.
The connection will appear as a broken blue line between the

two reference ports.
Important note: In Simple Project mode it is not possible to create

connections between two panels or between two devices; were such
a need to arise, it would be necessary to create a network project.
Operations on VTs and devices

To change a VT or a device in the Hardware Configuration window you need first to select it: click on
and then on the element itself.
Once the object has been selected, just click with the righthand key on the same to be able to access the following editing menu :
Chapter 4
103
Using the Edit option you can make changes to the properties
of the object; Duplicate creates within the Configuration Window an identical copy of the object that has been selected (all
the properties of the first are copied into the second). The
Cancel option eliminates the element from the project, while
the Cut, Copy and Paste keys have their usual functions,
typical when operating in Windows. Besides these there are
the Zoom options which allow you to edit the dimensions of
the display of the objects, Show memory displays the Tags
occupied in the device memory.
Eliminating a VT or device
To eliminate a VT or a device from the Hardware Configuration
window just click on
and then on the element to be eliminated. To eliminate it, once the object has been selected,
press the Canc key of the keyboard or alternatively click with
the right-hand key of the mouse on the element, then, using
the drop-down menu that appears click on Cancel.
Eliminating a connection
To eliminate a connection from the Hardware Configuration
window just click on
and then on the connection (line) to
be eliminated. To eliminate it, once the connection has been
selected, press the Canc key of the keyboard or alternatively
click with the right-hand key of the mouse on the element,
then, using the drop-down menu that appears click on Cancel.
Opening a
project
When the application is launched or in the course of the work

on POLYMATH you can proceed to work on a project previously
saved onto Hard Disk or onto a removable support.
There are three options for opening a new file:
- click on
- File -> Open from the main menu
- click on
to go to the Home Page of the program. Then
click on Open existing project
104
Chapter 4
In all these cases an exploration window opens that allows you

to select project files (*.vtprj) from within your resources.
Note: When you enter the Home page of the program by means of a
click on
a list of recently opened files ordered chronologically
according to their last editing date. This procedure is simplest and
quickest if you often work with the same files.
Saving a
project
At any point throughout the process of editing the project the

user can save his or her work onto hard disk or a removable
support.
There are three options for saving the project into a file:
- File -> Save from the main menu
- Press CTRL+S on the keyboard together
- Click on
Note: The project is automatically saved by POLYMATH every 30

seconds (see chap. 3, Automatic project storage page 35).
When the project file is overwritten, POLYMATH automatically

creates a backup file with the extension *.vtprj.bak saving it
into the folder the user is working in. In this way there is always a reserve copy of the original project; to use and edit the
backup copy just rename the extension, changing it from *.vtprj.bak to *.vtprj and reopen the project in POLYMATH.
Important note: When the Save command described above is used

the currently open file is overwritten (or written onto a new file in
the case of a new project); to maintain the original file you must
choose File->Save as... from the main menu and supply a name or
a different path.
Network
project
The network project makes it possible for several terminals to

communicate, share and manage data simultaneously.
One's own project is present on each terminal, where Tags are
shared and can be monitored by all of the network participants.
Creation of a
network
project
The sequence of operations to be carried out to create a

"Network Project" will be shown in the following images.
Chapter 4
105
To create a new project, having opened the "Wizard" mode,

select the option "Panel network" and then press "Forward".
Click "Add" to download the projects that make up the

network, one at a time :
106
Chapter 4
Once the projects have been downloaded click "Forward" (in

this example we will put two projects on the network,
"Server_IT107.vtprj" and "PC Client.vtprj") then click "End" :
We will now examine the individual projects which make up

the network project, in particular the part of the project referring to the shared variables.
Chapter 4
107
ServerIT107
Project
From "Explore project" double-click the voice "Tag" from the

"Tags" option :
From the editing area, the features of the tag to be shared can
be observed on the "General" mask. In our example, the tag
will be "Internal" :
Select the ("Share Tag") option and assign a name (in this case "Server_Tag") so that it can be seen by the other participants.
108
Chapter 4
PC Client
Project
From "Explore project" double-click the voice "Tag" from the

"Tags" option :
From the editing area, the features of the tag to be monitored

can be observed on the "General" mask. The tag must be the
"Network" type :
Network
Project
We will now examine the previously created network project

which contains the two sub-projects just shown :
Chapter 4
109
From '"Explore project", double-clicking the voice "Tag" from

the "Network Tags" option, the editing area is accessed.
On the "Link" mask, the features of the tag to be monitored
can be determined :
The tag must have the following features :
Compilation of
the network
project
It must be the "Network" type.

The node must be indicated. The node is the point where the tag is shared (in our example the shared tag is in
the IT107T terminal).
The name of the tag to be monitored must be determined (in our example the name of the tag to be monitored is Server_Tag).
The compilation and the download of the projects that make

up the network project must be carried out inside of the
network project.
110
Chapter 4
Click on the icon
to fill out the project :
The following mask will appear from which one can choose to
fill out all the projects that make up the network or, if only one
project has been varied, to fill out only the modified one :
Click "forward".
At the end of the compilation, the following mask will appear :
At this point, by clicking "end", the projects that make up the

network are ready to be transferred to their respective terminals.
Chapter 4
111
Download the
network
project
Click on the icon

tive terminals :
to transmit the projects to their respec-
The following mask will appear from which one can choose to
transfer all the projects that make up the network or, if only
one project has been varied, to transfer only the modified
one :
112
Chapter 4
Click "End" when the transfer is complete :
Multi-devices
With the function "Multi-devices" POLYMATH allows the user to

quickly create a project with more devices by using the quick
entering method Drag and Drop.
After having opened the "Wizard" mode (see chap. 4, Using
the Wizard page 93) to create a new
project, select the "Multi devices" option then click on
"Forward" :
After having chosen the type of ESA terminal, enter the desired devices with the "Drag and Drop" mode :
Chapter 4
113
Each time a user drags a device on the panel, it will be connected by following a predefined logic : the first driver will be
assigned to the first available door by excluding whether it is
serial or Ethernet.
The second serial driver is assigned to the second serial door
(if present); in case in which the second serial door is not
available, POLYMATH will not allow use of a serial driver, but
only Ethernet.
It is possible to enter up to 2 different protocols for each
ethernet door on the terminal the following is an example of
entry of 4 PLC ethernet belonging to 2 distinct families :
114
Chapter 4
Note: The number of PLC which may be entered on each door can
also be greater than the 4 reported in the previous example, as long
as they do not belong to more than 2 different families.
It is also useful to point out that, in case the user wants to

connect a particular device on the second serial door instead
of the first (like POLYMATH would do by default), simply carry
out the "Drag and Drop" operation by moving the mouse in
correspondence to the chosen door :
Chapter 4
115
What was just said clearly also goes for the ethernet ports.
Note : In case the user drags the device outside the panel, the device
is connected anyway by following the logic described previously.
For each connected device a page will appear from which it will
be possible to set the connection parameters both of the device door and of the panel.
116
Chapter 4
Device :
By clicking on "Communication ports" it will be possible to set

(in case of an ethernet device, as in the example) the connection parameters, device IP address and CPU expansion Slot
number :
Chapter 4
117
Panel :
From the previous screenshot, by clicking on the ESA panel
name, one will enter the main edit window of the same (see
chap. 5, Setting the panel page 127) :
Multi-Panels
By using the entry "Multi-Panels" the user will be able to simply create a project made up of more panels.
After opening the "Wizard" mode to create a new
project, select the "Multi-Panel" option then click on
"Forward":
118
Chapter 4
A window will appear from which it will be possible, first by clicking on "Add" then on the drop menu, to choose the type of
panel to add :
Una volta scelto il tipo di pannello, modificando i campi Rotazione e Quantit sar possibile stabilire il numero di pannelli da inserire e la rotazione (0 / 90) di ognuno di questi :
Chapter 4
119
At the end of the selections, by pressing "End" in the creation

Wizard, the user will access the HW Configuration page in
POLYMATH directly. Once inside the HW Configuration the
user will have the list of available devices on the right and with
a simple "Drag and Drop" they will be connected to the chosen
panels (like we have seen previously).
120
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
121
Project Explorer
5.
Project Explorer
The principal anchorable window in POLYMATH is the Project

Explorer window from which the structure and operations of
the project can be controlled. In this chapter we describe in
detail all the characteristics that can be configured using
Project Explorer.
The Project Explorer window contains all the editable objects

arranged as a tree diagram in which the parent element is
always the project to which the Hardware configuration is
anchored, the ESA terminals (with their attributable
properties) and the connected devices (with their related
settings).
Note: A single click on an element in the tree selected it, while a

double click allows you to edit.
122
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
If Project Explorer should fail to appear on the screen because

it has previously been closed, it can be brought back to the
screen by clicking on the icon
of the toolbar or using the
main menu by clicking on Display->Show->Project Explorer.
Like all anchorable windows, Project Explorer, too, can be
moved, reduced to an icon or closed (see chap. 3, Moving
Anchorable windows page 85).
There are six buttons present in the upper part of the window :
The
button is used to add one element to the
category selected in the tree chart. If the entire project
is selected, this key can be used to insert new VTs or
devices.
The
button is used to enter editing mode for the
element selected in the tree chart.
The
button is used to shift an element upwards.
The
button is used to shift an element downwards.
The
button is used to put the objects in order.
The
button is used to put the page numbers in order.
There is also a drop-down menu from which any of the

categories making up the menu can be selected.
Information relating to the element selected is displayed in

the lower section of the window. Here you will find the name,
the comment and the path of those objects chosen when
creating the project.
Chapter 5
123
Project Explorer
Operating on
elements
within the
Project
Explorer
window
There is a series of cumulative functions applicable to all the

categories or elements of the Project Explorer window
irrespective of their nature. These functions are contained in
a menu called up by clicking with the right-hand key on the
object in question as illustrated in the figure
The functions that can be selected are:

Edit, to enter editing mode
Add new, to add an element to a category
Add new and Edit, to add an element to a category and
directly access the editing page (in the Work area)
Rename, to change the name of the object selected
Duplicate, to create an exact copy of the element
selected; the properties that must remain unique within
the project (e.g. Name, Identifying Number,
Description) are not copied but are automatically
assigned a valid value
Delete, to delete the element selected
Create folder, for organization reasons, it is possible to
split all the components of a project in different folders;
You can :
- Create new folders.
- Rename the folders.
- Cut/Copy/Paste the objects in the folder
124
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
- Delete the objects and the folders.

- Move the objects among the folders
"Hide component",
By selecting a field of the explore project tree and then rightclicking with the mouse, choosing the "hide" option, the field
will be disabled :
"Hide content",
By selecting a field of the explore project tree and then rightclicking with the mouse, choosing the "hide content" option,
the field content will be disabled :
Chapter 5
125
Project Explorer
"Manage visible components"
By selecting a field of the explore project tree and then rightclicking with the mouse, the user may customize the component view; by default the user will see everything that is available for that type of product :
126
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Cut, to eliminate the element selected and copy it into

the clipboard
Copy, to copy the element selected into the clipboard
Paste, to paste in the element contained in the clipboard
Paste as Child, to paste in the element contained in the
clipboard as Child of the element selected
"Import", to import variables, recipes, alarms etc. inside the project.
Export", exports project elements (variables, recipes,
alarms, etc.) on Hard Disk, specific network path or USB
storage device
Note: For the functions : Alarms, Recipes, Users & Password, it is

also possible to customize the Log files
Elements of Project Explorer

The tree-type structure of Project Explorer allows the user to
access the configurator of all the components of a POLYMATH
project (with the exception of the graphic elements that are
configured by the Editor property); the Project (see chap. 4,
Chapter 5
127
Project Explorer
Creating a project in Wizard mode page 93) and Hardware

configuration editor (see chap. 4, Managing the project
page 89) have already been described in the previous chapter
while the other objects will be described in this chapter.
To access the editor of an element just double-click on it in
Project Explorer; the corresponding editing window will
appear in the work area.
We will start by describing the elements that can be
associated with ESA terminals and then we will illustrate the
settings of devices connected to these terminals.
Setting the
panel
When the Project Explorer icon corresponding to the panel

added to the project is double-clicked, the user is able to edit
its characteristics.
Editing the panel is organized via 6 work windows: General,

Communication ports, Main window, Configuration Boot,
Exchange areas and Components. The user can move from
one window to another at any time without losing any of the
changes made.
General
The work window General is used to change the name of the

panel in question and add comments within it to make it
distinguishable in the programming phase with POLYMATH.
The bottom of the window shows information on the date of
creation, editing and compilation of the project.
128
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Communication ports
In this window it is possible to configure the communication

method between the panel and the device; the parameters
can be configured in function of the connected panel and
device.
The bottom of the window shows the range allowed by the
protocol for each value inserted
MSP/ASP/SP1/SP2
The first four parameters are always available in the

configuration whilst the others vary according to the protocol
used on the gate.
CAN
Chapter 5
129
Project Explorer
DP
ETH1/ETH2
COM 0
For this communication gate, no parameters are foreseen
because it can be set via script.
Main window
The Work window of the main window shows the dimensions

in pixels of the page displayed on the panel; in general these
dimensions are unchangeable and depend on the features of the
panel hardware. On a PC, for example this one, character can
be configured because it is not possible to determine the
resolution of the screen. Nevertheless, it is possible to change
the grid for arranging objects in the page (see chap. 6,
Managing a page page 295); the default values for these
dimensions are set at 10 pixels for the width and 10 pixels for
the length. By reducing these values you have more freedom
to add and reposition elements within the page (the grids in
the work area will be denser); similarly, by increasing these
130
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
values, the lines will become less dense and there will be less
freedom to introduce objects.
Then, providing the operating system of the panel allows this
(if not, they will appear disabled), a series of configurable
options are available regarding the display of pages on the
terminal; the "Show focus" option can be selected (100%
zoom), the user can decider whether to display the title bar,
the Reduce to icon button, the window focus (practically
speaking, the focus highlights the currently selected object or
button), the on-screen keyboard for entering data and
whether to hide the applications bar, whether the confirmation
message is to be shown, whether to show the confirmation
message, whether to use the default size of the dialogues.
The last three options allow the user to set the time-out in the
edit phase, the font for the Help pages and the password level
for accessing the system pages (see chap. 5, Password
configuration page 213).
Dialog Box
From the main window (previous image) it is possible to change

the "Dialog Boxes" size disabling the check-box Use default dialogs size.
Chapter 5
131
Project Explorer
Once disabling such option, the user will be able to configure the
new sizes :
This value is unique for all the dialog-boxes and can not be changed at Runtime level.
The events which use the new "Dialog Box" are the "User login"
and all the related to "Recipes" functions (see chap. 6, Events related to Recipes page 292).
Configuring the Boot
This mask allows the user to set the page to be displayed

when the project is opened. By clicking on the
icon a new
page can be added, while the
icon opens the editor of the
page selected.
In addition, the Runtime refresh frequency of the
DateAndTime system Tag (see Appendix A - System
Variables page 737) can be defined; a refresh of once a
second or once a minute can be set.
132
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Exchange areas
ESA panels communicate with the field devices to which they

are connected; to make this information exchange possible
the panel and the device in question share memory areas from
which data can be taken and into which it can be written. In
reality, an exchange area is a tag-area (of one or more words)
located in the field device.
The two main categories of exchange areas are the status
areas and the command areas. The former are for the panel
to write information regarding the working of the device
connected while the second are read by the VT which then
answers by running particular operations in relation the value
read (in practice the device uses the command areas to send
automatic commands to the VT). From this mask it is possible
to proceed to add (using the Add key), delete (using the
Delete key) or duplicate (using the Duplicate key) both
exchange areas and command areas. Once an exchange area
is added, an area-type variable must be assigned to it (see
chap. 5, Value page 140) for reference. In the case of
command areas it is also necessary to introduce a response
tag (variable) to which the data relating to the outcome of the
operation indicated is written.
This variable can also be newly created and edited by clicking
on the adjacent icon; this can then naturally also be used
inside the project or accessed using Scripts.
To be able to see in detail the list of activities that can be run
using the status area and the command area, the reader is
advised to consult the appropriate appendices (see Appendix
C - Status area page 761 e see Appendix D - Command
area page 765).
Chapter 5
133
Project Explorer
Components
This page offers only a summary of the components that can

be assigned to ESA panels; by clicking on each of these the
appropriate main editing page can be accessed.
Software
Configuration
The first option you find on the menu of the panel in Project
Explorer is the one relating to the configuration Software. To
this area there belong the setting windows for the following
elements:
SystemAlarms
SystemMessages
F Keys
To access the general editor of each option just double-click
on the appropriate name in Project Explorer. The following
paragraphs will carry detailed information on the features that
can be configured for each element.
SystemAlarms
The system alarms are alarms that are displayed to the
operator whenever certain conditions of anomaly occur.
In this section it is possible to access a table containing all the
system alarms that are displayed by the panel in particular
situations. Alarm messages are displayed for each project
language entered. Some messages are unchangeable by the
programmer while others are contained in editable fields. In
any event, it is always possible to delete the changes made to
the translation by clicking on the appropriate button (Clear
Translation). Use the Project language button to access the
editable list of languages already described in this paragraph
(see chap. 5, Languages page 166).
134
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Warning: when editing the texts of the systemalarms (and

messages), be careful not to introduce special characters reserved
for the system (e.g. %).
SystemMessages
System messages are messages displayed to the operator at
various points when the panel is in use.
In this section it is possible to access a table containing all the
system messages that are displayed. Messages are displayed
for each project language entered. Some messages are
unchangeable by the programmer while others are contained
in editable fields. When editing these strings, be careful not to
introduce special characters reserved for the system
(e.g.%). In any event, it is always possible to delete the
changes made to the translation by clicking on the appropriate
button (Clear Translation).
Use the Project language button to access the editable list of
languages already described in this paragraph (see chap. 5,
Languages page 166).
Note: In ESA terminology, system messages differ from alarms in as

much as the former are simple messages set into Dialog Boxes or
masks for entering information, while the latter are connected to
events correlated to system variables (e.g. flat battery, insufficient
space on disk, etc...).
Chapter 5
135
Project Explorer
F Keys (Global)
This mask allows the user to define a global mode of
behaviour for all F keys (of a virtual or physical keyboard) :
Note: By global mode of behaviour we mean that the key will make
it possible to effect the configured function independently of the
page being displayed on the panel, while by local mode of behaviour
we mean the execution of the function only in the context of the
current page (see chap. 5, F keys (Local) page 174).
A predefined function or a user Script can be associated with

any key simply by double-clicking on the table in the
corresponding row or by selecting and clicking on Put; should
you wish to delete an already existing association, click on
Remove after having made the selection.
136
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
If you choose to introduce an association with a key, the

following dialog window opens :
To add a function just click on Add Function and choose the

function required from the list which appears, by clicking on
the line just created three times or on the
key, similarly by
clicking on Add Script the Script to be associated can be
chosen. Up to 2 functions/Scripts can be introduced for each
key and these will be executed in the order indicated; to
change the order of the functions just move them with the
Move Up and Move Down keys. To delete a function just
select it and click on the Delete button
Should a predefined function be chosen to associate with the
global key, the lower part of the window can be used to
indicate the data related to a correct execution of this (e.g. file
name, name of objects, etc..).
Should a Script be chosen to associate with the global key, it
will be possible to choose to save the value returned by this
Script (if the Script is set to return a value) in a variable.
For details regarding the functions that can be associated and
regarding Scripts the reader is advised to consult the sections
of the manual devoted to these topics (see Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 e see chap. 9, Scripts
page 553).
Variables
Variables are fundamental elements for creating a POLYMATH

project ; they allow the programmer to store and arrange data
to permit dialog between panel and device. An indefinite
number of variables can be created, the limits depending on
the memory available on the device.
Chapter 5
137
Project Explorer
List
After double-clicking on Project Explorer, you access a table

of variables, whose list and classes of update (described in the
next subsection) can be managed. Using the list, you can not
only introduce new variables, delete them and duplicate them
but also edit certain properties (name, memory and Type; the
meaning of these properties will be described in the next
section). The "Tools" key allows modifying at will the columns
structure, importing or exporting Tags (see chap. 5,
Variables Export /Import page 157).
One alternative method of creating a variable is to click Add in
the menu arising from right clicking on Tags in Project
Explorer or clicking on
in all those properties to which a
variable can be associated. Once a variable is created, it (with
its valid name assigned by POLYMATH) will appear under the
Tags option of the tree-form diagram; to enter edit mode for
this just double-click on it.
If you wish to get to know the list and the meaning of the
events that can be associated to a variable, you are advised
to consult the next chapter (see chap. 6, Events related to
variables page 290).
Note: By dragging a variable from Project Explorer onto a page in

the work area, POLYMATH automatically creates a data field
(numerical or ASCII) associated to the variable within that page.
Note: The duplication of a variable provokes the creation of a new

variable with a new Memory Address with the same value (address)
as the Memory Address of the original variable.
138
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
RefreshGroups
The second window in the "Tags" menu allows to specify the

"Gruppi di Rinfresco" (Refresh Groups) present in the project.
These classes allow to distinguish the updating frequency of
the values of the relative tags. This function is useful when
different degrees of mutability are envisioned for field tags.
It is possible to introduce, eliminate and duplicate update
classes. An identification name and a refresh value indicated
in seconds can be inserted for each of these. The "Tools" key
allows to modify the structure of the columns at will.
Tags in the groups
This window shows the list of project tags and it is possible to

modify the relative class associated. It is possible to filter the
display of the elements, limiting it just to the tags of the class
selected. The distinctive features are supplied for every tag in
the list.
Under "Tags" in the tree chart, find the tags just created.
Double click on these to enter the editing window of the
individual tag.
Chapter 5
139
Project Explorer
General
The editable elements in the General mask are the identifying

properties of the variable like name and comment; the name
of a variable must be unique, that is other variables cannot
exist bearing the same name, again, the maximum number of
chars you can give to the tags name is 60.
The comment is a string that is displayed only within
POLYMATH and it identifies the variable.
It is necessary to specify the type of variable you are editing;
the variables are divided into: device, internal system,
indexed and networks variables.
The device variables are shared with the connected equipment
and constitute the two-way data exchange medium; the
internal variables, by contrast, are used as a deposit for local
data or results of operations or Scripts and their value is not
read by the device; in this case, it is possible to specify
whether the value should be retentive by activating the option
appearing in the page when the variable is internal (Save the
value in a persistent memory. Tags are retentive). If the
variable is retentive, the value is conserved when the terminal
is switched off.
The system variables (whose names begin obligatorily with
the prefix SYS_) are variables predefined by POLYMATH that
contain special information relating to the working of the
project and of the system. They are not editable by the
140
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
operator but can be displayed and used by the panel. The type
of system variable can be selected from the options on a dropdown menu; the characteristics of each variable appear in the
lower part of the mask and are also illustrated in the related
appendix of this manual (see Appendix A - System Variables
page 737).
"Indexed" tags allow you to view the data of each variable in
a single field; the "Index Variable" determines the choice of
Tag the value of which is displayed by the "Indexed Variable"
(see Indirect Addresses page 154).
The network tags are variables that can be used by all the
terminals that make up the network, in the case of a "panel
network" project.
Value
The mask relating to value can be used to configure the type

of data that the variable is supposed to contain. The types of
data possible are those represented in the following table:
Tabella 1: Types of variable
Type
Description
Range
Char
8-bit signed integer
-127 to 128
Byte
8-bit unsigned integer
0 to 255
Boolean
Single bit
True (1) or False(0)
Integer
-32.768 to 32.767
Unsigned
Integer
0 to 0xFFFF
-2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Long
Unsigned
Long
Chapter 5
141
Project Explorer
Tabella 1: Types of variable

Type
Description
Range
Floating point IEEE 32bit single precision
-3.402823E38 to 1.401298E-45 for

negative values;
1.401298E-45 to
3.402823E38 for
positive values
Floating point IEEE 64bit double precision
-1.7976931348623E308
to -4.9406564584124E324 for negative values;
4.9406564584124E-324
to
1.7976931348623E308
for positive values
ASCII string
ASCII String (maximum

length 0x7FFF
characters)
Array of
Unsigned
Integer
(WORD)
Whole value string

without sign
1 to 1024
Array of
Integer
(WORD)
Whole value string with

sign
1 to 1024
Array of
Real
Floating point 32 bit value string
1 to 1024
Real
Double
String
For each variable you can introduce an initialization value that

is assumed at the start of the project. In the case of a Stringtype of data, its maximum length can also be indicated.
If the variable is a device variable, Array-type data will also

be present; this in substance is a data area whose dimensions
can be set by POLYMATH; as indicated in the figure, a table
142
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
will also appear which enables you to introduce the

initialization values of each portion of the area.
Device
In the case of device variables it is necessary to proceed to

specify the destination memory areas for the values.
POLYMATH guides the user by furnishing indications regarding
the valid memory ranges calculating them automatically in
relation to the device chosen in the project.
First of all it is necessary to introduce the destination device,
the related memory addresses and the update class (see
chap. 5, RefreshGroups page 138). If these last two
components are lacking or incorrect, they can be introduced
again by clicking on the
icon or they can be edited by
clicking on
.
In addition, you can decide whether to enable the updated or
not.
Even when a tag is not being used by any field, the option
Keep updating, indicates, if it is activated, that the variable
will be updated even when its value is not shown in the page
currently being displayed on the panel; this option is
indispensable whenever, you want, for example, to access the
value of this variable via Script. In the event that the variable
is part of Alarms, Pipelines, Trends or Recipes this setting is
ignored and the variable is monitored all the same.
Chapter 5
143
Project Explorer
In conclusion, a one-shot read can be requested when the

variable is used in a data field.
It is also necessary to indicate the type of memory to reserve,
whether Bit, Byte, Word, DWord or String; if it is not String,
you can indicate whether the memory is to be considered as
Signed (for relative values) or BCD.
Note: Binary-coded decimal (BCD) is a commonly used format for

representing the decimal digits in binary code. In this format each
digit of a number is represented by a 4-bit binary code, whose value
is between 0 (0000) and 9 (1001). For example the number 127 is
represented in BCD as 0001, 0010, 0111.
If the type of area is String, you can define the length, the
type and the gap characters. The types of gap characters
available are left, right or none. It is also possible to define the
gap character by entering the appropriate ASCII code or
choosing an option from the drop-down menu. In both cases,
the right-hand side of the mask will display a preview of the
gaps.
You can use the lower part of the mask to introduce the
destination memory addresses; the values entered must be
coherent with the range displayed at the foot of the mask.
Limits
Validity ranges can be defined for the tag just created (if this
restriction has sense in relation to the type of data). It is
possible to assign these limits to the values of the tag and/or
to the device. If limits are assigned to the Tag (i.e. on the tags
of the terminal) the limit will have effect in the editing phase:
if, for example, a maximum limit is at 100 and the operator
inserts a higher value in an editing field, the field will
automatically be taken to 100 (maximum limit). However, this
limit does not prevent a greater value being written in the
device memory by a device side process.
If this is not the case, by assigning device limits a value will
be read on the terminal within the range set also when the tag
on the device assumes values outside of the interval.
Once the relative box has been enabled, it is possible to
manually insert the limit values or assign them dynamically by
144
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
combining them with those of tags. This last option can be

performed by clicking on
and selecting the tag from the
drop-down menu that will occur as a consequence. It will
always be possible to access the creation-modification of the
tags directly from this mask :
Another option that can be found in the "Limits option is the

possibility that the user is warned when an incorrect value is
attributed to the Tag. This option is activated
by selecting the Warn if the value introduced is incorrect
box. When the option is activated, a warning will appear under
the form of a "Popup" page every time that the value attributed to the Tag is greater or smaller than the previously-set limits.
After having enabled and set the minimum and maximum limit
and having selected the "Warn if the value introduced is incorrect option (see following image):
Chapter 5
145
Project Explorer
from (Project Explore) click twice on the main page and then
use the mouse to drag the Tag inside the page :
At this point click on the "Esegui Progetto" (Perform Project)

icon
; the following image will appear :
146
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
By clicking on the Tag the editing keyboard will appear, from

where a value can be assigned to the tag itself :
For example, by entering "150" on the editing keyboard and

confirming using "Enter" also on the editing keyboard, a warning will automatically appear under the form of a "Popup"
page, where the user is warned of the fact that the value being
introduced is a higher value that the maximum limit set
(which remember is 100) :
At this point the user can decide whether to continue (by clicking on the "OK" key, or to annul the introduction of the data,
which must be re-set.
If the user decides to continue by clicking "OK" as just seen,
Polymath will automatically attribute the maximum limit value
(100).
The same will occur when trying to insert a value below the
minimum set, e.g. if a value equal to "5" is set when the minimum limit is "10", a warning message will appear under the
form of a "Popup" page, as shown below :
Chapter 5
147
Project Explorer
Also in this case, the user can decide whether to continue (by
clicking on the "OK" key, or to annul the introduction of the
data, which must be re-set).
If the user decides to continue by clicking "OK" as just seen,
Polymath will automatically attribute the minimum limit value
(10).
Conversion
The value of the numerical external variable is always
calculated by the system based on the rough value.
Often, apart from the standard conversions, it is necessary to
carry out a calculation, because the units of measurement in
which the rough value is expressed are different from those
required for the value of the variable.
For example, it occurs very frequently that the rough value is
expressed as an integer value within the range of a digitalanalog converter, while the value of the variable is expressed
in engineering units.
Using this mask you can determine the type of conversion to
be adopted for the variable; the conversions that can be
selected are: none, linear, quadratic or defined by the user.
148
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Linear conversion implies the definition of two pairs of values,

each formed of the value of the variable and the
corresponding rough value:
P1 (x1, y1)
P2 (x2, y2)
where xn are rough values and yn the corresponding
engineering.
The rough value x and the corresponding value y of the
variable in the conversion are related by the following
equation :
Chapter 5
149
Project Explorer
The quadratic conversion needs the same values with the

exception of Y1; in the quadratic transformation the equation
that connects the rough value x and the y value of the variable
is as follows :
In both cases the window situated in the left part of the mask
furnishes a graphic representation of how the conversion of
the values will take place.
In addition you can carry out an immediate test of the
conversion after entering the necessary values; a value can be
entered in the appropriate fields and POLYMATH displays its
conversion instantly.
The conversion defined by the user envisages the association
of a Script with the events that can be associated to the
variable (see chap. 6, Events related to variables page 290).
Thresholds
The developer can enable the generation of various types of

event associated to a numerical variable. The events are
generated when the variable assumes particular values (or
when there is a rapid change in the value itself), called
threshold values or simply thresholds. The user can make use
of the defined thresholds by assigning a function or a Script to
the threshold events that can then be associated to a variable
(see chap. 6, Events related to variables page 290).
There are three types of thresholds: level thresholds,
deviation thresholds and variation speed thresholds.
In this mask, select the type of threshold required and decide
whether to value activating the event should be dynamic or
not (Boolean).
The type of threshold is represented graphically to the right of
the mask.
150
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
The first type of threshold is the Level type. Up to eight Level

thresholds can be defined, each of which can be enabled
independently of the others.
For each of the above mentioned thresholds the developer
wants to enable, he/she must specify whether the threshold is
a maximum or minimum, independently of which event is
generated: thus, if all eight of the possible Level events are
generated, eight different thresholds need to be specified. It
is also necessary to specify a dead zone value (indicated as a
percentage of the reference value), to be used exclusively to
check the re-entry of the event (hysteresis). The dead zone
indicates a time interval within which the event must not be
raised so as to be able to make the slight value oscillations
negligible.
Alternatively, the Dead zone and Value attributes can be
assigned to another tag simply by clicking on
inside the
field in question.
The functioning of the Level thresholds can be summed up as
follows:
minimum thresholds: if the value of the variable is
falling, the event is activated the moment the variable
falls below the reference value; if the value of the
variable is rising, the event is activated the moment the
variable rises above the reference value increased by
the value of the dead zone.
maximum thresholds: if the value of the variable is
falling, the event is activated the moment the variable
falls below the reference value diminished by the value
of the dead zone; if the value of the variable is rising,
Chapter 5
151
Project Explorer
the event is activated the moment the variable rises

above the reference value.
Let us consider the example in which we put a reference value
of 30 without a dead zone. In this case, if the threshold is
defined as a minimum threshold, the events will be activated
as soon as the value arrives at the value 30 (when the value
is rising) and as soon as it goes below (when the value is
falling). If the threshold is defined as a maximum threshold,
the events will be activated as soon as the value exceeds the
value 30 (when the value is rising) and as soon as it returns
to a value equal to or less than 30 (when falling).
If we add to our example a dead zone equal to 10% of the
reference value (10% of 30 = 3) the behaviour will be:
if the threshold is defined as a minimum threshold, the events
will be activated as soon as the value arrives at the value 30
(when the value is rising) and as soon as it goes below the
value 33 (when the value is falling). If the threshold is defined
as a maximum threshold, the events will be activated as soon
as the value exceeds the value 30 (when the value is rising)
and as soon as it returns to a value equal to or less than 27
(when falling).
The second type of threshold the Deviation threshold; there

are two types of this threshold and these can be enabled
separately:
DLO= lower deviation
DHI= higher deviation
Deviation thresholds are relative to a reference value and
indicate how much can be deviated from this value.
For each of the above mentioned thresholds the developer
wants to enable, he/she must specify the deviation value
(expressed as a percentage of the reference value),
independently of which event is generated: thus, if both
152
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
possible events are enabled, two thresholds different from one

another must be defined. The values can be fixed or can refer
to other tags. There must be a dead zone value for each
threshold, expressed as a percentage value of the level
referred to; the attributes dead zone and value can be
associated to another tag.
Let us now seek to clarify how deviation thresholds work by
using an example. To make it easier to understand we will
avoid using the dead zone the concept of which has already
been expressed in the course of the explanation of the Level
threshold concept.
Let us set 30 as a reference value. We shall activate (by
clicking on the appropriate box) the low Level threshold,
assigning 10% as the value. This means that the event
onThdDevLo (see chap. 6, Events related to variables
page 290) is launched each time there is a breach (whether
rising or falling) of the value given by:
reference value - % low threshold value
In our case, 30 - (10% of 30)= 30 - 3 = 27 thus the event will
be activated when the value 27 is crossed.
We operate in the same way to define a high deviation
threshold; by clicking on the appropriate box we activate the
high-level threshold, assigning 50% as the value. This means
that the event onThdDevHi (see chap. 6, Events related to
variables page 290) is launched each time there is a breach
(whether going up or down) of the value given by:
reference value + % high threshold value
In our case, 30 + (50% of 30)= 30 + 15 = 45 thus the event
will be activated when the value 45 is crossed.
The third group of thresholds is the Variation speed group; the

idea is to be able to carry out checks on variation times used
Chapter 5
153
Project Explorer
by a variable. It may, for example, be useful to manage a

situation in which a temperature plunges or soars too rapidly.
We can define two Variation speed thresholds that can be
enabled independently of each other:
RLO= low variation (decrease in the value)
RHI= high variation (increase in the value)
The Variation speed thresholds are relative to a reference
value. It is necessary to specify the time in seconds below
which the variation in value should take place such that the
event is launched relative to the threshold. Return from the
threshold occurs when there is an increase/decrease lower
than the value specified within the threshold period.
There must also be a dead zone value for each threshold,
expressed as a percentage value of the level referred to; the
attributes dead zone and value can be associated to another
variable.
Let us now seek to clarify how Variation speed thresholds work
by using an example. To make it easier to understand we will
avoid using the dead zone, the concept of which has already
been expressed in the course of the explanation of the Level
threshold concept.
Let us set 30 as a reference value and 5 seconds as the
checking time. Clicking on the appropriate box we shall
activate the low Level threshold, assigning 10% as the value.
This means that the event onThdDevLo (see chap. 6, Events
related to variables page 290) is launched each time there is
a decrease of at least 3 (10% of 30) in an interval of less than
5 seconds. In the same way, the event returns to rest when
there is a decrease of less than 3 seconds in a time interval of
less than 5 seconds.
Similarly if we set a high threshold: we will leave the reference
values unchanged (30) and the checking time remains 5
seconds.
Clicking on the appropriate box we shall activate the high
Level threshold, assigning 50% as the value. This means that
the event onThdDevHi (see chap. 6, Events related to
variables page 290) is launched each time the value of the
variable increases by at least 15 (50% of 30) in an interval of
less than 5 seconds. In the same way, the event returns to
rest when there is an increase of less than 15 seconds in an
interval of 5 seconds.
154
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Indirect Addresses
The "Indirect Addresses" option is enabled only when an "Indexed" Tag has been inserted. In the "General" window, select
the "Indexed" Tag option :
The "Indirect Addresses" option is now enabled. Select it with

the mouse :
This window appears :
The "Index_A" variable is called "Index Tag" and is an "Integer" type of "Device" Tag.
"a1" and "a2" are two "Integer" type "Device" variables (of the
same type as the "Index" variable").
"Indexed variables" are particularly useful when you have a
project involving a high number of Tags (a complex project
can involve literally thousands of variables).
In the interest of
simplicity, POLYMATH offers the user a new function called
"Indexed Variables" that allows you to associate ("map") any
Chapter 5
155
Project Explorer
number of tags to a single variable (the "Indexed variable"),

without having to create many "fields" containing as many variables, saving you time and facilitating your work in the bargain.
The indexed variable allows you to view the value of each variable in a single field; the "Index Variable" determines the
choice of Tag the value of which is displayed by the "Indexed
Variable".
Attention: the Tags must all be of the same type, while the "Index"
Tag must be the "Integer" type.
Below is an example illustrating this :
The above image shows the "Run-time" of a simple project

where we have created 7 "Uinteger" Tags called "a1, a2, a3,
a4, a5, a6 and a7" to which we assigned values (0, 10, 20, 30,
40, 50, 60 and 70); we then created an "Index" tag (an "Uinteger" tag called "Index_A", the values of which can be between 0 and 6 (in this example there are 7 tags, assigned the
values 0-6). By attributing value "0" or "3" to the "Index" tag,
156
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
the "Indexed" tag displays the value of Tag "a1" (in this case,
"0") and "a4" ("30") respectively :
Events
The "Events" option is visible in "DOUBLE CLICK" mode and
comes under "Editor Events" in "Extended" mode.
You can associate each Variable with an event (function or
script) by clicking the "Browse" button on the right :
The event is activated according to the condition of the

Variable. The conditions are listed in the table "Events
associated with variables" (see chap. 6, Events related to
variables page 290).
Chapter 5
157
Project Explorer
Variables Export /Import

It is possible to export or import a series of previously created
variables by clicking "Tools" then "Tags" from the main menu :
Export Tags
By clicking on the sub-menu Export the following screen is

obtained:
158
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
By clicking on the pull-down menu the "filter" options that can

be selected by the user are shown, select, for example "All Tags" option :
all Tags types present in the project will be shown and subsequently exported :
Chapter 5
159
Project Explorer
by clicking on "Forward" we will obtain the following window

from which the user will be able to choose the fields to export
in the Excel table :
Note: During the Export phase, the folders eventually created by

the user in project phase will also be exported.
Cliccando sul tasto Avanti si aprir la pagina successiva dalla

quale, lutente potr scegliere (cliccando sul tasto Sfoglia)
dove salvare il file da esportare :
160
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Note: The file to be exported can be saved with extension ".xls" or

".csv
By clicking on the "Separate addresses" check box, the variables list is shown, in the table created, in separate fields :
By clicking on the Export key the following screen is obtained :
Chapter 5
161
Project Explorer
Import Tags
By clicking on the sub-menu "Import the following screen is

obtained:
It is possible to select the format type with which to import variables :
Excel Format : standard Excel format

PLC Format : previously exported variables are imported automatically by using the PLC application in use.
162
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Excel Format :
After clicking "Next" and selecting the file to be imported, the

following screen is obtained:
Chapter 5
163
Project Explorer
From the previous screen, it is possible to choose between the

following options by acting on the keys and by selecting the
various present check-boxes :
From what row of the list the variables import should be

started
Select the individual variables to be imported
Select all variables to be imported by clicking the "Select all" key
Uncheck all variables to be imported by clicking the "Uncheck all" key
Overwrite the already present variables inside the
project or not
After how many errors the variables import is stopped
After having made the selection, the following screen is obtained by clicking on the "Import" key :
If everything is done correctly there are no error reports.
164
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
PLC Format :
After clicking "Next" and selecting the file to be imported, the

following screen is obtained:
Chapter 5
165
Project Explorer
From the previous screen, it is possible to choose between the

following options by acting on the keys and by selecting the
various present check-boxes :
Select the individual variables to be imported

Select all variables to be imported by clicking the "Select all" key
Uncheck all variables to be imported by clicking the "Uncheck all" key
Add as prefix to the individual variables name, the CPU
name from which they were previously exported
Overwrite the already present variables inside the
project or not
After having made the selection, the following screen is obtained by clicking on the "Import" key :
If everything is done correctly there are no error reports
166
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Languages and
Fonts
Languages
The configuration window for Languages allows the user to

manage the project languages that can be displayed on the
panel. Up to eight languages can be introduced at the
programming level and at least one language always needs to
be present. To introduce a new language to the project just
click on Add.
For each language added a decimal and group needs to be
indicated as well as a system language and a Font for the
related system messages. Naturally you can delete languages
present in the project (by pressing Delete), duplicate (by
clicking on Duplicate) or change the settings of the existing
ones (by clicking on the corresponding fields in the list table);
in this window you can also indicate the language to be used
when the project starts up on the terminal.
The "Tools" key allows to access two windows :
Translations; if a multilanguage project is created, every time a text is introduced, the possibility of translating it into all languages is given. In this way a Wizard
will start that will guide the user through the translation
process.
Columns configuration for modifying the structures of
the columns at will.
Chapter 5
167
Project Explorer
Select the desired languages and select Next.
Select the elements to be exported and click on the Create table.
Once the texts have been added just click on OK to save the
changes made or on Delete to delete them. There is no default
translation but POLYMATH furnishes the same text (the one
introduced for the main language) for all the languages.
Note: There is no particular limit for the translation of secondary

languages; their length may exceed that of the reference language.
Note: While programming with POLYMATH, the display language

for the project elements (e.g. labels and buttons) can be changed
simply by selecting the required language from the Display>project
language menu or the option from the tools menu (if the field has
been set to be present); in both cases the changes will be immediate
and all the objects will be displayed in the required language.
168
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Character fonts
The window related to the fonts allows the user to manage

(introduce, delete and edit the name or property) of all the
character fonts used in the project. There is a series of default
fonts present in the project (that cannot be cancelled), but
new ones can be added by choosing from those installed on
your PC. It is also possible to associate a comment to each
font added to be displayed only within POLYMATH; for each
font there is also the indication of the memory that to be
occupied by installing the font in question.
It is possible to use up to 32 "Fonts" during the programming
phase (6 are by default and the user can choose between the
other 26).
Pages
Pages are fundamental for the creation of a project; they are

the real interface between operator and terminal. The editing
of pages must be based on information accessible to the user
and the access policy (restrictions on users) and navigation
procedures (links between the pages).
For each project page, it is possible to enter up to 1024
objects which may be selected from a list supplied by
POLYMATH which will be described in detail in the next
chapter.
After double-clicking the Pages icon of Project Explorer, the
work area will display a list of the pages introduced into the
project. Using this list you can introduce new pages and
duplicate or delete existing ones. In addition, certain
attributes like Page number, Description and Comment can be
edited simply by clicking inside the appropriate fields of the
table and new texts can be introduced.
Once a page has been created (using Project Explorer or the
list), double-clicking on it in the tree-diagram makes it
Chapter 5
169
Project Explorer
possible to edit it in the work area. The page editor is

organized in the following sections: Fields, General, Help page
and F keys. The subsections below offer a description for each
mask.
The properties and the events that can be assigned to the
Page will be dealt with in the next chapter; we advise readers
to consult the relevant section for a list of them and their
meanings (see chap. 6, Page properties page 297 and see
chap. 6, Events related to Pages page 298).
Layer
In Polymath there is a layer subdivision of the single pages displayed. At the time of the compilation, all the objects are placed on layer 0; for each page, it will be possible to have a
maximum number of 13 layers (numbered from 0 to 12).
When a new project is created, layer 0 is the one present by
default, it will always be available and cannot be deleted.
To use the "Layer" function simply click on the icon in the main
bar :
The following page will open where, by using the present keys,
it will be possible to change the layers (add new ones, delete
as needed, change the order of the existing ones) :
170
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Add : by using the "Add" key, the user will be able to

add new layers (max 13), edit the name and determine
whether or not to make the selected layers visible.
Delete : using the "Delete" key the user will be able to
delete the selected layer.
Up : using "Up" the user will be able to move the selected layer up after going to the "Id" column.
Down : using "Down" the user will be able to move the
selected layer down after going to the "Id" column.
Project preview
All'interno di Polymath presente una funzionalit che permette di ottenere una preview della pagina attualmente visualizzata, questa preview permette all'utente di visualizzare gli
stati degli oggetti senza dover passare dal Simulatore.
La funzionalit, che accessibile dal menu a tendina presente
nella Toolbar, permette all'utente di visualizzare alternativamente lo stato Off e lo stato On dei controlli contenuti nella
pagina.
ON :
Chapter 5
171
Project Explorer
OFF :
Fields
The Fields mask shows graphically how the page will appear
once the project has been installed in the terminal. To
introduce an object simply click on the relevant icon and
immediately afterwards draw the outline of the area that will
contain it in the page in the desired position.
172
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
The next chapter will illustrate all the procedures for

introducing graphic objects and the relevant meanings and
tools (see chap. 6, Managing a page page 295).
General
Using this mask you can introduce the identifying attributes of

the Page like Name, Comment, Number and Description. The
Name, the Number and the Description of the page are unique
properties within the project that is there cannot be other
different pages that have one of these attributes in common.
For this reason, whenever a page is pasted in or duplicated
POLYMATH sees to it that these properties are edited so that
they satisfy the requirement of uniqueness.
The page number can be a whole number greater than 0, its
maximum value depending on the capacity of the terminals
memory; the Comment is a Unicode string and it is visible only
within POLYMATH.
Warning: when entering the Description string, be very careful not

to introduce control or punctuation characters. Control characters
are those between 0x0000 and 0x001F (inclusive) that can be
introduced using a keyboard by pressing the sequences ALT+000 up
to ALT+031. This rule applies in general for all the objects
containing the property Description.
This mask can also be used to furnish operational settings for

the page; you can decide have the cursor jump automatically
to the next input field in runtime. If this option is activated,
each time the operator enters a value into a numeric field and
Chapter 5
173
Project Explorer
presses the Enter key, the focus of the application (that is, the
selection) moves to the next field (the order of the selection
passage between fields is defined by the TabIndex attribute to
be assigned to the page objects, (see chap. 6, Properties of
the Numerical Field page 343, for example).
It is also possible to overwrite the default grid dimensions for
the current page by specifying the desired dimensions. This
option is useful when a different degree of precision is
required during the editing phase of the page. When low
values are entered the grid becomes denser and there is
greater freedom in positioning objects within the page; by
entering a high value, the grid becomes less dense and the
freedom in positioning objects in the page becomes more
limited.
Help pages
A each project page can have a Help page assigned to it,

giving information relating to the working of the mother page.
The Help page is essentially a window into which a text to
guide the operator can be introduced. Apart from the text
displayed, other properties like the position and the
dimensions of the page can be defined. At the bottom of the
mask you are offered a preview of how and where the Help
page will appear in runtime. It is also possible to define the
font and the dimension of the text of the Help pages during
the phase of defining the general properties of the panel (see
chap. 5, Main window page 129). This page only becomes
visible to the operator when it is expressly called (using the
174
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
button assigned to this function introduced into a mother

page, via the command area and function keys).
F keys (Local)
The last mask available for editing the page is the one relating
to the F keys; it is possible to edit the behaviour of a particular
function button within the page. Unlike the global keys, the
functions set in this page are only effective when they are in
the current page.
Warning: The table present in this mask already indicates the global
functions (see chap. 5, Keyboards page 253), so as to make any
overwriting evident. In fact, if they were assigned to the same global
and local key functions, only the local ones would carried out in
runtime in the context of the page in question.
The functions or Scripts that can be associated to the local

buttons are introduced in exactly the same way as already
seen for the global keys, thus the same procedure should be
followed (see chap. 5, Keyboards page 253).
Events
You can associate an event (function or script) to each Page
you have created.
Chapter 5
175
Project Explorer
The event is activated in the two different conditions of the Page :
OnPageClose : the event is activated when the page closes (for instance when moving from one page to the
next)
OnPageOpen : the event is activated when the page
opens (for instance when moving from one page to the
next)
To attribute an event to the page, simply select a condition by

clicking the browse button and, in the window that appears,
using the necessary buttons to associate a function or script
to the page :
Page Properties
The "Page Properties" option is visible in "DOUBLE CLICK mode" and comes under "Properties Editor" in "Extended" mode.
176
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
The "Page Properties" window is in two parts: "Appearance"

and "Advanced" :
The Appearance section allows you to edit the following options :
Background colour
Border visibility
Border size
Border colour
Border style
3D border
The Advanced section allows you to edit the following options :
Popup pages
Use background image

Background image
Image Representation
Horizontal Position of Image
Vertical Position of Image
Popup pages are pages that are only displayed following the
occurrence of particular situations (these can be called using
the command area and the button with an assigned function).
After double-clicking the Popup pages icon in Project Explorer,
a list of the pages introduced into the project will appear in the
work area. This list can be used to add new Popup pages,
duplicate them or delete existing ones. In addition, some
attributes like the Page number, Description and Comment
Chapter 5
177
Project Explorer
can be edited simply by clicking inside the fields relating to the

table and new texts can be introduced.
Once the Popup page has been created (using Project Explorer
or the list), you can double-click on it in the tree diagram to
begin editing it in the work area. The page editor is organized
in the following sections: Fields, General, Help page and F
keys as described in the paragraphs below.
For information regarding the properties and events that can
be assigned to the Popup pages the reader is advised to read
the relevant section in the next chapter (see chap. 6,
Properties of Popup pages page 298 and see chap. 6,
Events related to Popup pages page 298).
Fields
The Fields mask for the Popup pages is similar to that relating
to the traditional pages (see chap. 5, Fields page 171).
The sole difference between the two masks consists in the
dimensions of the Popup page. Naturally the Popup page is
meant to be smaller than a standard page; it may be
positioned in any part of the screen.
To change the dimensions of a Popup page, select it after
pressing the
key; at this point just take the cursor onto
the edges of the page (red outline) to enlarge or reduce its
dimensions.
To move a Popup page, select it after pressing the
key;
then simply drag it to the position you want it to appear in
runtime.
The next chapter illustrates all the procedures for introducing
graphic objects and their related meanings and tools (see
chap. 6, Managing a page page 295).
178
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
General
The General mask for the Popup pages is identical to that
relating to the traditional pages; thus, readers are advised to
consult the paragraph dealing with these (see chap. 5,
General page 172) for details of the properties.
The sole difference consists in the possibility of expressing a
preference in runtime: you can choose whether to display the
page title bar or whether the Popup page should always
appear in the foreground.
Help page
The Help page mask for the Popup pages is identical to that
consult the paragraph dealing with these (see chap. 5, Help
pages page 173) for details of the properties.
F keys
The F keys mask for the Popup pages is identical to that
consult the paragraph dealing with these (see chap. 5, F keys
(Local) page 174) for details of the properties.
Events
The "Events" option is visible in "DOUBLE CLICK mode" and
comes under "Events Editor" in "Extended" mode.
The "Events" window on popup pages is the same as the one
for traditional pages, so refer to the same section (see chap.
5, Events page 174).
Popup Page Properties
The Popup Page Properties option is visible in "DOUBLE CLICK mode" and comes under "Properties Editor" in "Extended"
mode.
The Popup Page Properties window is the same as the one
for traditional pages, so refer to the same section (see chap.
5, Page Properties page 175).
Frames
The purpose of the Frames is to edit synoptic diagrams parts

to be used in more than one page. For example, if the project
is supposed to contain twenty pages and ten of these have the
same group of element (e.g. two numeric fields with a
button), then simply define this portion once inside a frame
and fetch it onto each page. Once a frame has been defined it
can be introduced into a page simply by dragging it there
(from Project Explorer to the page in the work area).
Chapter 5
179
Project Explorer
To learn more about the List and the meaning of the

properties that can be assigned to the Frames, the reader is
advised to consult the relevant part of the next chapter (see
chap. 6, Properties of Frames page 298).
List
Double-clicking on the Frames option from within Project
Explorer gives access to the list of Frames present in the
project; this mask contains the name and the comment
relating to each Frame and it is possible to introduce new
Frames or delete or duplicate existing ones.
Cross references
The mask relating to cross references allows you to see how

the frames are used within the project; you can set the mask
for displaying the list of pages using at least one frame or, as
an alternative, the frames used by the pages. In both cases
the results are displayed in a tree-diagram.
When the Update key is pressed, POLYMATH recalculates the
references to the Frames in real time.
Creating and managing Frames
A Frame can be created either by using the appropriate list
(see chap. 5, List page 179) or directly by using Project
Explorer (press right key on Frames, then Add).
Once a Frame has been added by double-clicking on it in
Project Explorer Work area, in you access the editor
subdivided into three pages: Fields, General and Cross
References which will be dealt with in the following sections.
180
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Fields
Using this mask you can edit the way a Frame will actually
appear in the pages into which it is called; it is edited just like
that for normal pages with various objects being introduced
and properties being set (see chap. 6, Managing a page
page 295).
To introduce an object simply click on the respective icon and
immediately after draw where in the page you wish the outline
of the area to contain it to be placed.
The next chapter describes all the procedures for introducing
the graphic objects together with their related meanings and
tools.
Using this mask you can, however, set the dimensions of the
Frame: click on the
icon to select it and then move the
cursor to one of the red corners by dragging it in line with the
dimensions required. (This operation can also be performed
by the General mask as set out in the next section).
You cannot use this mask to move the Frame, in that its final
position is defined periodically in the destination page.
General
Chapter 5
181
Project Explorer
This mask can be used to introduce the identifying attributes

of the alarm like Name and Comment. The name is a unique
property within any given project that is other different
frames with the same name cannot exist.
The Comment is a Unicode string and is visible only within
POLYMATH.
As an alternative to the drawing of the dimensions as seen in
the previous section, you can also manually set the width and
height of the frame.
You can also overwrite the default dimensions of the grid by
introducing new measurements.
Cross references
The mask relating to cross references offers the possibility of

displaying the list of all the pages using the frame in question.
This function is very useful for cataloguing the pages that are
influenced by the changes made to the frame.
Properties
182
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
The Properties window allows you to determine the graphical properties of the frames.
The Properties window of the Frames option is visible in
"DOUBLE CLICK" mode and comes under "Events Editor" in
"Extended" mode.
The window is in two parts, "Appearance" and "Advanced" :
The Appearance section allows you to edit the following options :
Use transparent colour

Background colour
Border visibility
Border size
Border colour
Border style
3D border
The Use transparent colour and Background colour options

also allow you to attribute a variable and "threshold" management (see chap. 6, Thresholds option functioning
page 327).
In the "Advanced" you can choose whether to use a background image and attributes this to a variable
Alarms
Alarms are events that need immediate attention on the part

of the operator; they are connected to signal anomalous
conditions with respect to the plant or the terminal. The
alarms usually have associated to them particular events of
the following type :
raised: the alarm condition is signalled on the device

return to rest: refers to the end of the alarm state on
the device
acquisition: (often also identified as ack acknowledgement) an operator has recognized the
alarm condition.
Chapter 5
183
Project Explorer
Using Project Explorer, double-click on Alarms to access the

general setting windows of all the alarms. The masks available
in this area are :
List
Memory resources
Behaviour
Fields
Priority
Alarm groups
User signals
The next subsections will give a detailed account of the

features accessible via each mask.
For a more thorough knowledge of the list and the meaning of
the events that can be associated to an alarm the reader is
advised to consult the next chapter (see chap. 6, page 291)
where there are also illustrations of the complex fields for
displaying and managing alarms (see chap. 6, Complex
Controls page 400).
List
The Alarm list allows you to manage the table of alarms and
their related properties; a summary of all the standard
properties in editable fields is supplied. This mask is useful for
giving an overall vision of all the alarms present in the project.
New alarms can be added, or cancelled and those existing
edited by means of the relevant buttons at the bottom of the
mask.
By pressing "Tools" a sub menu will open with the following
functions :
184
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
import
export
customize Active Log Files
customize History Log Files
column configuration
Import / Export
It is possible to export or import a series of Alarms create previously by clicking on the "Import" or "Export" options (see
chap. 5, Alarms Import / Export page 193)
Customize Active Log Files
By pressing "Customize Active Log Files" a guided window will
open to create the customised file :
Up : using "Up" the user will be able to move the selected

layer up after going to the "Id" column.
Chapter 5
185
Project Explorer
Down : using "Down" the user will be able to move the selected layer down after going to the "Id" column.
Preview : with the "Preview" key the user will view a graphic
preview of the chosen customization.
OK : by pressing "OK" the user confirms the created settings.
The following is an example of how CSV exportation of the
alarms list occurs :
Customize History Log Files

By pressing "Customize History Log Files" a guided window
will open to create the customised file :

186
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
The following is an example of how CSV exportation of the
alarm history occurs :
Memory resources
Use the Memory resources mask to define how much memory

to reserve in the terminal for the management of the alarms;
it is necessary to specify how many alarms can be managed
by the history and how many active alarms to consider.
The "Dimension" field indicates the file dimension expressed
in bytes.
Chapter 5
187
Project Explorer
Behaviour
Use the Behaviour mask to indicate the filling and emptying

policy of the buffer when it has reached its maximum value.
You can choose to substitute the least recent element (FIFO
buffer) or ignore the new elements when the buffer is full.
(The buffer can be emptied in runtime using a Script, a button
or a command area.) You can also decide on the limit of
alarms present in the history above which the system variable
SYS_HistoryWarning will be activated (see Appendix A System Variables page 737).
The name of the file in which the Alarm History is to be saved
must be entered into the text field in the mask; the log file is
saved in the folder \log (see chap. 8, Transferring data
page 516).
Warning: When entering file names, care must be taken that they are
admissible names for a Windows environment. A file name, to be
admissible, cannot contain the following characters \ / : * ? < >
188
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Note: The log file is a file used by the system to permanently save the
data to be represented in the Alarm History. Being able to choose its
name using POLYMATH is useful in that it allows the user to
manage this file (e.g. copy or delete in the event that it is too big).
Should you want to re-arrange the data in an Alarm History,
however, it will have to be exported using a predefined function or
Script (see Appendix B - Predefined functions page 745 and see
chap. 9, Scripts page 553).
If you decide that a Page should change automatically when

an alarm is raised that is of higher priority than a threshold
(specified using a drop-down menu) (see chap. 5, Priorities
page 189), indicate which Page to display when the alarm is
raised.
Fields
Use the Fields mask to define the character and the colours of
the display tables of the alarms (see chap. 6, Active Alarm
View page 429 and see chap. 6, Alarm History View
page 434). You can specify the character of the rows, the
colours of the cells selected, the characters and colours of the
column headers. The way the editing fields relating to the
fonts and colours work is identical to what has already been
set out for the user table (see chap. 5, Fields grid page 220).
The programmer can also make a choice in relation to labels
to be assigned to the table headings. Each column can have
associated to it a multilingual label; to access mutilingual
editing just click on the
icon adjacent to the editable text
field (see chap. 5, Languages page 166).
Chapter 5
189
Project Explorer
There is also the option of selecting the images to be

associated to the state of the alarm; already at the project
creation stage POLYMATH furnishes a set of default images
that can be confirmed or substituted with an image added to
the project (see chap. 5, Add an image page 233).
The alarm states to which an image should be attributed are:
Active, Recognised, Returned, Simple and Diagnostic.
Priorities
The Priorities mask gives you the possibility of managing the

set of properties that can be assigned to an alarm. As default
POLYMATH offers three priority levels to each of which there
is a corresponding value: Advice (200), Error (100) and Fatal
Error (0). The Add and Delete keys respectively allow you
to add priority levels to and remove them from the list; the
three initial levels predefined by POLYMATH cannot be
removed. When a new priority is added, it has to be assigned
a priority value that permits it to be classified relative to the
other already existing levels. For example, if you wish to
introduce a priority of a level lower than the three predefined
ones, we will need to assign a value of 201 or above; if you
wish to introduce a high priority, give a value between 1 and
99 (the predefined Fatal Error level is always the one with the
highest priority).
You can distinguish the priority of the alarms in runtime by
assigning them different colours in the Table of active alarms
or in the history (see chap. 6, Active Alarm View page 429
and see chap. 6, Alarm History View page 434). Use this
190
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
mask to indicate the background colour (with the RGB code or

a palette) and text of the non-selected options in the table
(otherwise the colours are those in the Fields mask).
Alarmgroups
POLYMATH offers the possibility of organizing the alarms of a

given project into Alarm groups; this could be useful where a
considerable quantity of alarms is envisaged and the
programmer wants to have at his/her disposal a cataloguing
tool (for example, to speed up the acquisition of many a
alarms at the same time). Using this mask new groups can be
created by clicking on Add or existing ones deleted by
clicking on Delete); in addition, for each group a comment
with a purely identificatory purpose for the programmer can
be introduced that will be visible only within POLYMATH.
Usersignals
Use this mask to set the alarm signals that appear to the
operator. The types of alarm messages displayed are:
Raised alarms
Simple messages
Diagnostic alarms
Chapter 5
191
Project Explorer
Banners
Once the type of alarm message has been selected (by
clicking on the appropriate box), it is displayed in the preview
page in the right-hand section of the mask. After clicking on
the element introduced, it can be moved to the position you
want the message to appear in.
For the first three types of messages the following must be
defined for the appropriate icon to be displayed: a minimum
level of priority; a destination page when the icon itself is
pressed; and the image to be presented on screen (which can
be selected from among those in the project).
If, on the other hand, the type of message is Banner, a
background and text colour need to be defined as well as a
rotation time expressed in seconds in case there should be
more than one alarm/message.
The reproduction of a warning sound ("Enable buzzer /audio")
can be enabled at the back of the mask :
When this function is enabled, it is also necessary to indicate

a minimum priority alarm level so as to cause the sound reproduction: (see chap. 5, Priorities page 189) :
It is also possible to assign the alarm to the buzzer or to an

audio file: (see chap. 5, Audio Files page 270) :
192
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Note: Audio files can only be reproduced on the IT110Txxxx,

IT112Txxxx, IT115Txxxx terminals.
Events
It is possible to associate an event (script) to each alarm you
have created.
The event is activated in the two different conditions of the
Alarm :
OnHistoryFull : lthe event is activated when the alarm

log memory reaches 100% capacity (memory full)
OnHistoryWarning : the event is activated when the
alarm log memory reaches the set value; by default, the
warning is issued after 75 records (out of the 512 that
can be stored on the memory)
To attribute an event to the alarm, simply select a condition

by clicking the browse button and, in the window that appears, using the necessary buttons to associate a script to the
alarm :
Chapter 5
193
Project Explorer
Alarms Import / Export

It is possible to export or import a series of alarms previously
created by clicking on "Tools" then on "Alarms" from the main
menu :
Alarms Export
194
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Click on the "Export" submenu to obtain the following window:
Clicking on the drop menu the "filter" options which may be

selected by the user will be shown, let's choose for example
the option "All the Alarms" :

from which the user will be able to choose the languages to
export :
Chapter 5
195
Project Explorer

from which the user will be able to choose the fields to export
in the Excel table :
By clicking on "Forward" the following page will open from

which the user will be able to choose (clicking on the "Select"
button) where to save the file to export :
196
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Note: The file to export may be saved with ".xls" or ".csv" extension.
Click on the "Export" key to obtain the following window :
Chapter 5
197
Project Explorer
Alarms Import
By clicking on the "Import" submenu we will obtain the following window :
198
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
After having selected the file to import and clicking on

"Forward", we will obtain the following screenshot :
From the previous screenshot, by selecting the various checkboxes, it will be possible to choose among the following options :
Chapter 5
199
Project Explorer
From which row of the list to begin alarm import

"Create using a new name"
After having chosen, press on the "Import" key :

the alarms will be imported.
Creating and changing an alarm
Once the general characteristics of the alarms have been
defined within the project, you can begin to define the way the
individual alarms should work. An alarm can be created
directly from the alarm list (see chap. 5, List page 183) or
using Project Explorer (click with the right-hand key on Alarms
and then on Add).
In the editing phase, two masks, General and Property - that
we shall go on to describe in detail below - are presented for
each alarm in the project.
General
The General mask can be used to set the identifying properties

of the alarm like Name and Comment. The name is a unique
attribute within any given project that is other different alarms
with the same name cannot exist.
POLYMATH.
A variable must be assigned on which the checks relating to
the alarm will be carried out; depending on the type of
variable (see chap. 5, Value page 140) there will be different
modes of checking which may be orientated to the bit or value
of the variable. The text box asks you to enter the reference
value which when reached will generate the alarm (absolute
value or bit number).
200
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Properties
The specific characteristics of the individual alarm are defined

in the Property mask.
First of all the programmer is asked to enter a membership
group for the alarm (see chap. 5, You can distinguish the
priority of the alarms in runtime by assigning them different
colours in the Table of active alarms or in the history (see
chap. 6, Active Alarm View page 429 and see chap. 6,
Alarm History View page 434). Use this mask to indicate the
background colour (with the RGB code or a palette) and text
of the non-selected options in the table (otherwise the colours
are those in the Fields mask). page 190) and a description
representing the actual text that the operator will read on the
panel when the alarm is triggered. The description is a
multilingual Unicode string (see chap. 5, Languages
page 166) that cannot contain punctuation or control
characters (da Alt+000 a Alt+031) and which cannot exceed
255 characters in length.
The attributes Datiuser 1 and Datiuser 2 are optional
attributes indicating identifying multilingual strings of the
alarm. The user can choose whether to employ them for
personal purposes or to leave them unused. When they are
used they appear in runtime within the alarm views if the
appropriate column is present in the attribute Columns (see
chap. 6, Properties of the Active Alarm Grid page 432 and
see chap. 6, Properties of the Alarm History Grid page 436).
Note: For the current value of a variable (for example one assigned
to an alarm) to appear in the Description, Datiuser1 or Datiuser2
strings just put into the string the name of the variable in a sequence
having the form %{<name of the TAG>#<format>}%. the format
follows ANSI-C specifications. For example, a Description
containing the string excessive temperature:
Chapter 5
201
Project Explorer
%{TFORNO#%03d}%C; if the variable TFORNO has a value of

150, it will be displayed as: excessive temperature: 150C .
The Property mask also asks you to specify the type of alarm;
the following table explains the types of alarm available.
Tabella 2: Types of alarm
Event type
Description
Simple event
simple event; this is not an

alarm but an information
message
ISA alarm
alarm event (requires

acknowledgement on the part
of an operator triggers an ISA
sequence)
The lower part of the mask is used to set a series of

parameters relating to the behaviour of the alarm.
It is possible to decide:
to permit acknowledgement via global
(cumulative)acquisition
to include the alarm in the Alarm History
to attribute a lag (in seconds) before the alarm is
signalled to the user (in the tables or by means of
messages). If the alarm is terminated within this
interval it is not signalled.
that acknowledgement of an alarm instance should
provoke the acquisition of all the instances of this type
of alarm
to enable external acquisition via a project variable If
so, it will be necessary to define a reference variable
and the bit value to be checked. You can choose to have
the bit reset automatically after its remote acquisition
202
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
to assign to a page; if this preference is enabled, it will

be necessary to define a reference page be assigned. To
be able to exploit this function you will need to introduce
the Shows page button in the Alarm display tables (see
chap. 6, Active Alarm View page 429 and see chap. 6,
Alarm History View page 434).
Events
It is possible to associate an event (script) to each alarm you
have created.
The event is activated in the different conditions of the Alarm :
OnAlarmAck : the event is activated when the alarm is

stopped
OnAlarmOff : the event is activated when the alarm ends
OnAlarmOn : the event is activated when the alarm enters "Activated" mode
To attribute an event to the alarm, simply select a condition

by clicking the browse button and, in the window that appears, using the necessary buttons to associate a script to the
alarm :
Chapter 5
203
Project Explorer
Recipes Types
Recipes are a means of creating the setup of the plant or part

of it) to carry out a given process.
This result can be obtained by writing appropriate values into
a certain number of variables, typically set-points or
regulating parameters and PLC memory cells.
POLYMATH allows you to define a number of types of recipes,
that is, general data structures whose instances the operator
will proceed to furnish in line with his needs; there are no
limits to the number of types of recipes that the programmer
can define using POLYMATH. The only limits my depend on the
Hardware characteristics of the terminal.
Warning: POLYMATH makes it possible to define types of recipes,

that is, different structures identified by name and by the related
variables; the recipes are created and managed in runtime and
saved into the retentive memory of the panel. The types of recipes
describe only the structure which all the recipes belonging to that
type have.
For further information regarding the list and the meanings of

the events that can be associated to a Recipe type, the reader
is advised to consult the next chapter (see chap. 6, Events
204
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
related to Recipes page 292) where there is also a

description of the display modes of the recipes using complex
controls (see chap. 6, Complex Controls page 400) as well
as the meanings of the transfer operations between the VT
and the devices (see chap. 6, Operations for transferring
Recipes page 443).
Recipe list
After double-clicking on the Recipe element of Project
Explorer, you access the list of types of recipes present in the
project
Use this list to add new types (by clicking on the Add key),
duplicate (with the Duplicate key) or delete (with Delete)
existing ones.
For each recipe type the summary of the related
characteristics is shown in editable fields. This mask is useful
for gaining a complete view of all the recipes present in the
project.
By pressing "Tools" a sub menu will open with the following
functions :
Import
Export
Chapter 5
205
Project Explorer
Recipe editor
Customize Log File
Column configuration
Recipes Import / Export :

It is possible to export or import a series of Recipes previously
created by clicking on "Tools" then on "Recipes" from the main
menu :
or from the "Tools" menu :
Recipe editor :
Allows to edit the recipes of the selected structure directly
from POLYMATH :
206
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
The user will be able to choose whether to update the previously exported pre-existing file :
or create a new one :
After clicking on "Forward" the following window will be shown

from which it will be possible, by selecting the check box, to
Chapter 5
207
Project Explorer
change the viewing method of the columns (vertical / horizontal) :
also, clicking on "Add" or "Delete" new recipe columns will be

created/deleted :
Customize Log Files :

Allows to customize the recipe fields which will be saved in the
log files to export.
By clicking on "customize Log Files" a new window will open
where it is possible to enable the fields to export with "checkmarks".
208
Chapter 5
Project Explorer

Delete : with the "Delete" key the user will delete the selected
row.
preview of the chosen customization; the following is an
example of how default exportation of a Recipe in CSV occurs :
This is an example of how the exportation file is composed after customization by the user :
Chapter 5
209
Project Explorer
The "column configuration" allows to change the structure of

the displayed columns in POLYMATH as desired.
Modes of compatibility
Using the Recipe list mask you can specify for which type of
recipe present in the project the mode of compatibility should
be enabled (this option is applicable to one and only one
Recipe type). By compatibility we mean a use of the exchange
areas identical to the Mode of functioning of VTWINprogrammable ESA terminals . A compatible structure uses
the command area of the project (see chap. 5, Exchange
areas page 132) and accepts commands from the PLC only
with a Recipe name not over 4 characters. On the other hand,
a non compatible structure uses dedicated exchange areas (in
this case the recipe can have a longer name).
210
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Fields
The Fields mask is used to define the character and colours of

the Recipe display tables (see chap. 6, Recipe List Table
page 439 and see chap. 6, Recipe Editing Table page 441).
Here you can specify the character of the rows, the colours of
the selected cells, the characters and the colours of the
column headings. The way the editing fields relating to the
font and the colours is identical to what has already been
indicated for the User table (see chap. 5, Fields grid
page 220).
It is up to the programmer to choose which labels to assign to
the Table headings. Each column can have a multilingual label
assigned to it. To access Multilanguage editing just click on
the
icon adjacent to the editable text field (active only if
more than one language coexists in the project).
Creating and changing a Recipe type
Once the general characteristics of the recipes in the project
have been established, you can start defining the actual
characteristics of each Recipe type. A Recipe type can be
created directly from the list of Recipe types (see chap. 5,
Recipe list page 204) or using Project Explorer (click with
right key on Recipes types and then on Add).
For each Recipe in the project, there are two editing masks,
"General", "Fields", "Recipes" and "Events" (the "Events" option is visible in "DOUBLE CLICK mode" and comes under
"Events Editor" in Extended mode), which we shall describe in
detail below.
Chapter 5
211
Project Explorer
General
The General mask is used to define the identifying properties

of a Recipe Type. The Recipe Type ID is an identifying number
within the data structure of the project; it is a whole number
greater than zero.
The Recipe type name and ID are unique attributes within the
project that is other different Recipe types with the same
name cannot exist.
POLYMATH.
If the recipe being edited is not defined in a compatible mode,
you can use the bottom of the mask to choose whether to
enable the dedicated exchange areas for the recipe in
question. If this option is activated it will also be necessary to
indicate the command and status areas linked to the recipe
(see chap. 5, Exchange areas page 132).
If, on the other hand, the recipe has been defined in a
compatible mode, it will be possible to define the status area
used (see chap. 5, Exchange areas page 132).
Recipe type fields
212
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
The real structure of the Recipe type must be indicated in the

Fields mask. Each recipe in the terminal must have the fields
Name, ID and Comment while other fields can be introduced
by the programmer. It is precisely the fields introduced by the
operator that are the distinctive elements of each Recipe type.
By clicking on the Add key it is possible to introduce a new
field to the Recipe type. After having clicked on the
key,
variables already present in the project or new variables can
be assigned to the new field using the column relating to the
variable by clicking on the field introduced. It is also possible
to access the editor of the variable selected after clicking on
.
To remove a field in the Recipe type, simply select it and click
on Delete.
Recipes
The "Recipes" option allows you to view all the recipes in a

project. There are also buttons for adding new recipes and
cancelling and duplicating existing ones.
Events
comes under "Events Editor" in Extended mode.
It is possible to associate an event (script) to each Recipe you
have created by clicking the "Browse" button on the right :
Chapter 5
213
Project Explorer
The event is activated according to the condition of the recipe.

The conditions are listed in the table "Events associated with
recipes" (see chap. 6, Events related to Recipes page 292).
Users and
Passwords
Password configuration
Within a project you can define authentication levels to
maintain control of access to specific areas. The purpose of
this feature is to distinguish and control the level of
operational freedom for each user in the course of their work
session. Using POLYMATH the programmer can proceed to
establish access policies for particular features (e.g. access to
buttons, pages, recipe management, etc.) thereby stopping
operators without the proper credentials from accessing or
editing data in an improper manner. Each operator, when
using the panel, must be recognised by the system by
entering an identifying name and a password for the
appropriate level of access (logon operation). It is envisaged
that only one operator can be logged on and use the panel at
any given moment; each operator can logout at any time.
Up to ten access levels can be defined and the lowest level
(typically level 1) is the one with the highest degree of
operational freedom. Each user who has not gone through the
login procedure will be treated by the system as a level 10
user (the lowest degree of freedom) and can access only the
features available to that level. To run an operation of a level
214
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
lower than ten, you will be asked to login again using a special
Popup page predefined by the system.
Use POLYMATH to define the initial users levels, that is the
levels of those present at the start-up of the project. You can
also add or edit users directly in runtime. To do this you can
introduce into their pages a predefined check called User List
(see chap. 6, User List Table page 436).
For security reasons each operator with access to the pages
for changing User Passwords (using the User List check) can
display and change the access credentials (name-password)
only of users with the same or higher-numbered levels than
his/her own (e.g. an operator on level 5 can see and change
the password of levels 5,6,7,8,9 and 10); also, the operator will
be asked for the password of the necessary authentication level
to access that field :
Note: During project simulation (for example during Runtime), the

user may use, in data editing and entry phase, a customizable
keyboard for each language in the project (see Languages and
Fonts page 166).
The password configuration of the access levels is made up of

three edit masks: General, Users and Fields grid.
By means of the "Mask Password edit" it is possible to determine
if the password is to be displayed or hidden with asterixes during
configuration.
Chapter 5
215
Project Explorer
General
The General mask is used to configure the panel such that it

executes the logout automatically after a certain period of
inactivity; you can also define which page to go to see once a
user has completed the logout.
This window can also be used to set the procedures for
recording the user login/logout operations; this function is
particularly useful where it is important to be able to maintain
a history file of accesses. The files in which the data is saved
(a valid file name must be given when working in a Windows)
are editable, as is the format of the date-time and whether to
program the logs after a certain period of time. The log file is
saved in text format in the folder \log (see chap. 8,
Transferring data page 516).
By pressing "Customize" the user has the possibility to customize the Log file to export (in CSV format) :
216
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
UP : The "Up" key allows the user to move the selected entry
up after going to the desired option.
"Down" : The "Down" key allows the user to move the selected
entry down after going to the desired option.
"Preview" : With the "Preview" key the user will view a graphic
OK : By pressing "OK" the user confirms the created settings.
The following is an example of how the exportation file is composed after customization by the user (by default with all 4
options enabled) :
Chapter 5
217
Project Explorer
Users
The Users window is the one used to show the participating

users and the corresponding passwords. Up to 256
participating users can be introduced. To create a new
participant, just click the appropriate level and then Create
new; for each participant created it is essential to indicate a
user name and a password (minimum 1 maximum 14
alphanumeric characters).
In addition, each level can be supplied with a comment visible
only within POLYMATH in the programming phase. To
introduce a comment just click on the level (not the user) and
enter the text in the corresponding field.
Once a participation has been registered and selected using
the
and
icons it can be transferred to a lower or higher
218
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
level as required. If, however, Delete is pressed, the selected

participation is cancelled.
Events
comes under "Events Editor" in Extended mode.
It is possible to associate events (functions or scripts) to the
actions executed by each use (for instance, log-in) by clicking
the "Browse" button on the right :
The event is activated in the various conditions listed in the

table "Password Events" (see chap. 6, Events related to Pipelines page 292).
User log Export
Polymath 2.0 now also allows you to export with a new predefined function, the CSV user log.
Previous versions of the Polymath used Script.
The "User Log Export" function controls access to password
protected objects.
The new Export User Log function can be associated by the
Events / Functions Editor.
The event is activated in the various conditions listed in the
table "Password Events" (see chap. 6, Events related to Pipelines page 292):
Chapter 5
219
Project Explorer
The "FileName" field in the window below allows you to select

the directory and the name of the file in which to save the Log:
Opening the xxxxx.csv file with Excel displays the following

records and allows you to check who has accessed passwordprotected objects :
220
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Fields grid
The Fields grid window is used to set the graphic properties of

the cells of the user list table (see chap. 6, User List Table
page 436). The Font choice box allows you to decide to assign
a font to the user list table; by clicking on the
icon a
window appears for specifying the font and using this each
project language can have a font assigned to it. In addition,
this window can be used to define various properties of the
font for the table like dimensions and graphic effects.
In addition you can specify a background and text colour for
the cell selected currently. The colour can be selected using
RGB values or the colour palette obtainable by clicking on the
rectangle of the colour
or on the selection arrow ; the
classic Windows colour selection window appears and using
this even customized colours can be defined.
Data Archive
The "Data Archive" object comprises all the Polymath functions able to store data :
Time trend
XY trend
Data log
Chapter 5
221
Project Explorer
Trend Buffer
In runtime the system supplies the support for the acquisition
and accumulation of numerical values and for their graphic
presentation in the form of a trend curve.
The accumulated data can be presented in real time or saved
into the permanent memory and recalled to the screen at a
later point.
By double-clicking on the Trend Buffers element in Project
Explorer, the list of Trends held in the project can be accessed.
This list also offers a summary of the principal characteristics
of the Trends in editable fields :
Using this list you can create new Trend buffers and duplicate
or delete existing ones.
For more information on the table and the meaning of the
events that can be associated to a Trend buffer, readers are
advised to consult the next chapter (see chap. 6, The events
relating to the Timers can be edited by the Events editor by
keeping the reference Timer in the related list selected.
page 294).
Once a new Trend has been created double-click on it in
Project Explorer to be able to edit it. For this there are two
pages General and Buffer as indicated in the following
sections. Project Explorer is used only to define the operation
of each Trend Buffer, while the way it is drawn is dealt with in
the next chapter (see chap. 6, Trend View page 407).
General
222
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Using the General mask you can set the identifying properties
of the Trends. The ID of the Trend is an identifying number of
the data structure within the project; it is a whole number
greater than zero.
The name and ID of a Trend are unique attributes within the
project that is other different Trends with the same name and
number cannot exist.
POLYMATH.
Buffer
In this mask enter the operating characteristics of the Trend

and of the related memory buffer.
First of all, a source variable to the object of the monitoring of
the Trend must be specified.
You also need to indicate a sampling mode for the values. The
types of sampling available are summed up in the following
table:
Tabella 3: Types of Trend sampling
Sampling mode
Description
Time based
the sampling is done at regular intervals
Chapter 5
223
Project Explorer
Tabella 3: Types of Trend sampling

Sampling mode
Description
On Strobe Raise
the sampling is done when the reference

variable changes the value from FALSE to
TRUE
On Strobe Fall
the sampling is done when the reference

variable changes the value from TRUE to
FALSE
On Command
the sampling is done on receipt of a command

from a Script, function or command area
If the type of sampling is Time-based it will be necessary to

enter a reference to a Timer specially configured so as to
acquire sampling of the TrendBuffer (see chap. 5,
RefreshGroups page 138), while if the type of sampling is
On Strobe Raise or On Strobe Fall it will be necessary to
specify a Boolean variable (see chap. 5, Value page 140).
Setting the TrendBuffer also requires its dimension be
indicated: the maximum number of samples to be saved can
be defined, or, if the sampling frequency refers to a timer, the
maximum duration of the buffer (in tenths of a second).
The system can manage the buffer either on a FIFO (first in
first out: the least recent element is eliminated) or an ARRAY
basis (when the buffer is full the new values are disregarded).
You can also set a Warning value, expressed as a percentage,
beyond which the user must be advised that the Buffer is
nearly full (this triggers an OnWarningLevel event).
The option Save to File at the bottom of the mask indicates
whether the elements of the TrendBuffer must be saved to file
so as to be kept after the terminal is switched off (otherwise
they are retained in the volatile memory). If this option is
activated, a storage file name (containing characters
supported by a Windows environment) will also have to be
specified. The log file is memorized in the \log folder (see
chap. 8, Transferring data page 516).
224
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
It is possible to customize certain parameters during exportation of the file in CSV format by pressing the "Customize File"
key, this way the user will access a menu to change the file :
UP : The "Up" key allows the user to move the selected entry up after going to the desired option.
"Down" : The "Down" key allows the user to move the
selected entry down after going to the desired option.
"Preview" : With the "Preview" key the user will view a
graphic preview of the chosen customization.
OK : By pressing "OK" the user confirms the created
settings.
The following is an example of a preview by only using the

"value" checkmark (set by default).
Chapter 5
225
Project Explorer
The following is an example of how the exportation file is composed after customization by the user (with all 4 options enabled).
The last option relates to the possibility of enabling the Trend

at the start-up of the project; if the Buffer is associated to a
Timer, it will still be necessary to start the Timer (see chap. 6,
Properties of the Password Grid page 438) to begin the
acquisition.
226
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Note: The log file is a file the system uses to permanently save the
data to be represented in the TrendView. The fact that its name can
be chosen using POLYMATH is useful in that this allows the user to
manage the file (e.g. copy or delete if dimensions are too great). If,
however, you want to manipulate the data of a TrendBuffer it will
have to be exported using either a predefined function or Script (see
Appendix B - Predefined functions page 745 and see chap. 9,
Scripts page 553).
TrendBuffersXY
The display graphic of the "TrendBufferXY" property is the representation of two distinct variables, and not like in the
"TrendBuffer" of a variable depending on time. Therefore, as
shown in the following image, in the assignment phase, the
variables must both be determined (Source X and Source Y).
Clicking "Modify" the "General", "Buffer" and "Events" (only in

"DOUBLE CLICK" mode) masks can be accessed.
General
The identification properties of "TrendXY" can be set on the

"General" mask. The'"ID" of "TrendXY" is an identification
number of the data structure inside of the project; it is a whole
number greater than zero.
The "Name" and"ID" of a "TrendXY" are alone attributes inside
of the project. Distinct "TrendXY"'s having the same name or
ID number cannot exist.
Chapter 5
227
Project Explorer
The comment is a Unicode string visible only inside of POLYMATH.

Buffer
The functional features of the TrendXY and the relative memory buffer are indicated on this mask.
First of all, as can be seen, two distinct tag sources must be
indicated (and not only one, as in "Trend", since the second
variable was the time) which will be the object of "TrendXY"
monitoring.
As in the "Trend" function, a value sampling mode must be indicated. The available sampling types and their properties are
identical to those on "Table 4" and in the successive descriptions previously shown.
228
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Events
You can associate events (scripts) to the various conditions of
the trendbufferXY (for example when the trendbufferXY is full)
by clicking the "Browse" button on the right :
The event is activated in the various conditions of the trendbufferXY. The conditions are listed in the table "Trendbuffer
Events" (see chap. 6, The events relating to the Timers can
be edited by the Events editor by keeping the reference Timer
in the related list selected. page 294).
DataLog
The "DataLog" is a property similar to the "TrendBuffer". The

biggest difference is that while the "TrendBuffer" is data
displayed on a graphic, the "DataLog" is data displayed on a
table.
Scripts
Scripts are an element enabling writing of functions to be

customized, which is useful in that the predefined functions
are not always sufficient for the users needs. They can be
written with true programming languages and be executed
Chapter 5
229
Project Explorer
directly in runtime. For more information on writing Script

codes readers are advised to consult the chapter dealing with
these (see chap. 9, Scripts page 553).
In this section we shall limit ourselves to describing the how
the Scripts are managed at the project level .
By double-clicking on the Script option in Project Explorer, the
list of Scripts in the project (with their related comments) can
be accessed. Using this list mask you can add new Scripts to
the project (using the Add key) or duplicate them (using
Duplicate) and delete existing ones (using Delete) :
To be able to enter the actual edit mode for a Script, doubleclick on it in Project Explorer; there are two masks for editing
Scripts: General and Scripts. These are described in the next
subsections.
events that can be associated to a Script, readers are advised
to consult the next chapter (see chap. 6, Script Events key
page 292).
General
230
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
of the Script. The Name is a unique attribute within the project
that is, other different Scripts with the same name cannot
exist.
POLYMATH.
It is also necessary to define whether the Script must return
a value to the application and what type of value this must be
(Number, String or Variant).
Use the table at the bottom of the mask to specify the input
parameters to the function with their related Names, Types
(Number, String or Variant) and Comments (visible only in
POLYMATH).
Scripts
The Script mask contains only one text input window, inside
of which you enter the code relating to the functions the Script
will have. For more information regarding the uses of Scripts
we advise the reader to consult the relevant part of the
manual (see chap. 9, Scripts page 553).
GlobalScripts
GlobalScripts function in the same way as the Scripts

described in the preceding paragraph; the real difference is
that these types of Script cannot be associated to an event or
a key but are activated with the start up of the Runtime.
They work and are edited in the same way as standard Scripts,
the only difference consists in the non configurability of the
input parameters and the return values for these functions (as
they cannot be called up inside the project).
Text list
In POLYMATH there are objects whose purpose it is to be text

containers useful for creating value fields (see chap. 6, Value
fields page 325). Each text list can contain an indefinite
number of texts; the sole limits are those deriving from the
Hardware configuration of the panel.
Chapter 5
231
Project Explorer
When you double-click on the Text list icon in Project Explorer

the causes the table of text lists to appear in the work area;
this list can be used to introduce, duplicate and delete the text
lists or simply introduce or edit a related comment.
Once a Text list has been created, it can be double-clicked in
Project Explorer to access the corresponding editing mask
The upper part of the mask can be used to change the

identifying properties of the list. The Name of a list is a unique
attribute within any given project that is other different lists
POLYMATH.
The lower part of the mask can be used to edit the text list
itself; new texts can be added or existing ones deleted. To
move a text just select it and click on the Up or Down keys
according to the operation to be performed.
If there is more than one language in a project (see chap. 5,
Languages page 166), you can go on to define the
translation for each text in the list as shown in the following
figure :
The
key allows to insert symbols into the description.
232
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Image list
In POLYMATH there are objects whose purpose it is to be text

containers useful for creating value fields (see chap. 6, Value
fields page 325). Each Image list can contain an indefinite
number of texts; the sole limits are those deriving from the
Hardware configuration of the panel.
When you double-click on the Image list icon in Project
Explorer the causes the table of Image lists to appear in the
work area; this list can be used to introduce, duplicate and
delete the text lists or simply introduce or edit a related
comment.
Once an Image list has been created, it can be double-clicked
in Project Explorer to access the corresponding editing mask.
The upper part of the mask can be used to change the

identifying properties of the list. The Name is a unique
attribute within any given project that is other different lists
POLYMATH.
The lower part of the mask can be used to edit the Image list
itself; new images can be added or existing ones deleted. Add
an image already in the project (see chap. 5, Add an image
page 233) by using the relevant drop-down menu Image
column. A preview and a comment can be displayed for each
image belonging to the list.
To move an image just select it and click on the Up or Down
keys according to the operation to be performed.
Images
POLYMATH offers the possibility of importing into the project

images that are in the programmers PC; images in all the
more common graphic formats can be introduced.
By double-clicking on the Images icon in Project Explorer, the
list of images uploaded into the project can be accessed. Using
this list you can see a preview of the figures, add them,
duplicate and delete them.
Chapter 5
233
Project Explorer
In addition this window makes information available regarding

the dimensions (in pixels) of the image, its format and quality;
it is also possible to edit the Comment relating to each figure :
When a new project is created POLYMATH introduces some

images intended for specific uses as a default (display of
alarms, Trend Pen, etc.). These can also be used inside for
other purposes.
For the description of how to introduce and change images
within a page you are advised to read the following chapter
(see chap. 6, Image Field page 322). Below we describe the
procedure for adding an image to a project.
Add an image
To add an image in POLYMATH you can operate directly on the
image object (by clicking on Add) or using Project Explorer (by
right-clicking on Images, then Add).
In both cases the Image mask is accessed (described in the
next section); to browse the contents of your PC just click low
down on the mask (press here to upload a file). At this point
a window appears and this is used to add one of the personal
images that can be edited with the normal commands
contained in the Image and General masks that we are about
to describe in detail.
It is possible to insert images with extension type DWG or DXF
type even if they are not available in the files list.
To insert such images in the project, select the image, select
the type of file such as All files and open it.
Polymath will automatically convert the image in .png, ready
then to be used in the project.
234
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Image mask
This mask is used to edit the parameters of the image. Each

time one of the properties of the image is changed, the
changes made are immediately visible in the preview box at
the foot of the mask.
Firstly, you can set the dimensions in pixels (width and height)
of the image contained in the project. Should the original
dimensions of the imported image be varied it will also be
necessary to define how POLYMATH will have to effect the
change in size (calculating the addition or removal of pixels).
The options available are :
Normal
Resample (also called Bilinear), a faster and less precise
algorithm recommended for reducing images
Bicubic, a more precise algorithm recommended for
enlarging images
in addition you can define the type of filter for the images that
contain colours not supported by the panel thanks to the
dithering technique (substitution of pixels with colours not
available with the interpolation method); you can choose from
a list of the more common types of dithering algorithm the one
you wish to use :
None
FloydStenberg
Stucki
Burkes
Sierra
StevensonArce
Chapter 5
235
Project Explorer
Jarvis
Ordered
Clustered
Note: For more details regarding the special characteristics of each

dithering algorithm, the reader is advised to consult manuals
specializing in digital graphics.
Finally you have to specify the format in which the image is to

be saved within the project (Bitmap, Jpeg or Png); if the
Jpeg format is chosen, the level of quality-compression
desired will also have to be defined by choosing between the
levels offered:
Excellent quality
Good quality
Normal
String compression
High compression
Note: The images with ".png" extension can be 24 or 32 bit, if the

image will be imported in 32 bit, the transparency characteristics
will also be maintained, while in case of 24 bit, the eventual transparency of the image will be lost.
Operations performable on an image

When you are inside Image mask of an image, POLYMATH
activates a series of icons for graphic purposes that are
applicable to the image in question. These features are
accessible via the toolbar or the image submenu of the main
menu. To edit it is possible to use the image editor of the
window. Below we set out a list of POLYMATH utilities related
to images :
Load image: reached via icon

or main menu (Image>Load image). Allows a new image present in your PC
to be loaded (you can introduce images in the more
common formats)
Modify: can be reached via the icon or by main menu
(Image->Modify). Allows the image to be modified.
236
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Restore image: reached via icon

or main menu
(Image->Restore image). Undoes all changes made to
the base image.
Colour: reached via icon
or main menu (Image>Colour). Allows the type of image colour to be selected
from the following 3 types, namely Automatic, Grey
tones or Black and white.
Increase contrast: reached via icon
or main menu
(Image->Increase contrast). Increases the contrast of
the image being edited.
Decrease contrast: reached via icon
or main menu
(Image->Decrease contrast). Reduces the contrast of
the image being edited.
Increase brightness: reached via icon
or main menu
(Image->Increase brightness). Increases the
brightness of the image being edited.
Decrease brightness: reached via icon
or main
menu (Image->Decrease brightness). Reduces the
brightness of the image being edited.
Cut Area: reached via icon
or main menu (Image>Cut Area). If this icon is pressed it will be possible to
cut (and make visible) a portion of the imported image.
Rotate: reached via icon
or main menu (Image>Rotate). This function makes it possible to rotate the
image anticlockwise; with each rotation POLYMATH
automatically updates the Height and Width dimensions
inverting them.
Adapt to screen: reached via icon
or main menu
(Image->Adapt to screen). If this icon is pressed the
image is adapted so that it occupies the work screen
completely (in practice its dimensions coincide with the
maximum screen dimensions of the VT).
Maintain proportions: reached via icon
or main menu
(Image->Maintain proportions). If this icon is pressed
the proportions of the original image are maintained,
that is, to change the Height of the image, POLYMATH
updates the Width and vice versa.
Chapter 5
237
Project Explorer
General

of the image. The Name of an image is a unique attribute
within any given project that is other different images with the
same name cannot exist.
POLYMATH.
Advanced
The following objects come under the heading of "Advanced" :
Pipelines
Pipelines
Print
Remote messages
Keyboards
Weekly tasks
Schedulers
Groups
Audio files (only when panels IT11x are used in the
project)
Pipelines are the active objects that update the value of one
variable on the basis of the value of another variable. The
most common application of Pipelines is for copying the value
of one variable into another; this function is convenient for
having the panel work as a bridge between two devices. The
Pipelines created with POLYMATH are already activated at the
start of the Runtime together with their particular functioning.
By double-clicking on the object Pipelines in Project Explorer,
the list of Pipelines in the project can be accessed. The
principal characteristics of each Pipeline are entered in
editable fields. Using this mask you can add new Pipelines,
edit or delete existing ones. A new Pipeline can be edited after
238
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
double-clicking on its Name in Project Explorer, thereby

accessing the General mask described in the next section.
events that can be associated to a Pipeline, readers are
advised to consult the next chapter (see chap. 6,
page 292).
General
of the Pipeline. The ID of the Pipeline is an identifying number
of the data structure within the project; it is a whole number
greater than zero.
The Pipeline name and ID are unique attributes within the
project that is other different Pipelines with the same name
and the same ID cannot exist.
POLYMATH.
At the bottom of the mask you can enter the working
characteristics that describe the Pipeline. First of all, it is
necessary to indicate a source and destination variable.
Chapter 5
239
Project Explorer
The related sliding menu is used to select the Pipeline

operating mode and this is chosen from those listed in the
following table :
Tabella 4: Pipeline modes
Mode
Description
Polling
Each time a new value is read from the source

variable, this value is assigned to the
destination variable. The acquisition rhythm
is governed by the refresh parameters of the
source variable
Copy by Change
Similar to polling, only that the values

acquired from the source variable are
assigned to the destination variable only
when the value of the source variable is
changed
Copy by
Command
The value is copied by command, that is, in

line with the transition from FALSE to TRUE of
the value of the auxiliary variable that can be
entered into the next field (activation, must
be Boolean)
In the boxes for choosing variables you will also find the icons
for adding variables
and editing
them.
Events
You can associate an event (function or script) to each condition of the Pipeline by clicking the "Browse" button on the right:
The event is activated by associating it to one of the conditions

listed in the table "Events associated to the Pipeline" (see
chap. 6, page 292).
240
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Reports
Print reports are objects that make it possible to set out on

paper information relating to the Runtime procedures. In
POLYMATH different types of Report can be defined, each
having an undefined number of pages. Each Report page can
in turn contain all the objects found in a Page. The
arrangement of these objects is independent and fixed.
in runtime, printing can be launched by pressing buttons to
which predefined functions are associated or via User Script
(see Functions relating to printing page 757 and see chap.
9, ESAPAGEMGR methods accessible with Scripts
page 581). Naturally a compatible printer needs to be
connected to the panel.
Using the Report element of Project Explorer you can define
any number of Report types, Headers and Footers. Different
pages, even ones belonging to the same Report, can have
Different and customized Headers and Footers.
Report List
Double-clicking the Report element of Project Explorer

accesses the List of Reports in the project. Using this list you
can introduce Report Types by clicking on Add, duplicate
existing ones by clicking on Duplicate or delete them by
clicking on Delete. In addition, existing ones can be edited by
clicking on Edit.
For each type of Report the summary of its characteristics is
shown in editable fields (Name, ID and Comment). This mask
is useful for gaining a complete view of all the recipes present
in the project.
Definition of a Print Report
There are two ways of creating a Print Report :
click on Add in the Report list

click on Add or Add and change on the menu
appearing after clicking with the right key of the Reports
element in the Project Editor
Chapter 5
241
Project Explorer
In both cases, the Report is edited by means of three tabs:

General, Pages and Headers/Footers page.
General:
The upper part of the General mask can be used to introduce

the general properties of the Report.
The Report ID is an identifying number of the Report within
the project; it is a whole number greater than zero.
The name and ID are unique attributes within the project that
is other different Reports with the same name or the same ID
number cannot exist.
POLYMATH.
The lower part of the General mask can be used to define the
common layout of each page belonging to the Report currently
being edited. All the pages belonging to the same Report thus
have the same layout.
Using the left side of the mask you can define the page
settings while the right side shows you an updated preview of
how the printed page will look.
You can define a format for the page (options are A4, A3, B5,
Legal or Letter), an orientation (Portrait or Landscape) and a
default Colour for the pages belonging to the Report.
Finally, after specifying a unit of measurement as a reference
(options are: centimetres, pixel, inches or millimetres), you
can proceed to define the margins between which to print the
242
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Report pages. You can define the left, right, top and bottom
page margins. You can also define default values for the
editing grid of all the pages belonging to the Report (then, if
required, the grid can be edited for each individual page in the
related General table).
Report page list
The Report pages mask displays the list of the pages

belonging to the Report. Use this list to add new types (by
clicking on the Add key), or duplicate (use the Duplicate
key) or delete (by using the Delete key) the existent ones. In
addition, existing ones can be edited by clicking on Edit.
For each type of Report the summary of its characteristics is
shown in editable fields (Name and Comment). This mask is
useful for gaining a complete view of all the Report pages.
Headers and Footers page
This Headers and Footers mask allows you to associate a

Header or a Footer page (or both) to each Report page.
Just assign a Header/Footer object to the Report page ID and
specify whether this is to be placed in the upper part
(Headers) or the lower part (Footer).
In the following sections we will illustrate how personalized
Headers and Footers can be defined.
Definition of a Report page
There are two ways of creating a Report page:
Chapter 5
243
Project Explorer
click on Add in the Report list of pages related to

reports
click on Add or Add and change on the menu
appearing after clicking with the right key of the Reports
element in the Project Editor
In both cases, the Report pages are edited by means of two
tabs: Fields and General.
Fields
Using this mask you can define the way a Report page in
question will actually appear; it is edited just like that for
normal pages with various objects being introduced and
properties being set (see chap. 6, Managing a page
page 295).
The properties of the Report pages are the same as those of
the Project pages (see chap. 6, Page properties page 297).
To introduce an object simply click on the respective icon and,
immediately after, draw the outline of the area to contain it
wherever you wish in the page .
tools.
General

of the Report page. The name is a unique attribute within the
project that is other different Report pages with the same
name cannot exist.
244
Chapter 5
Project Explorer

POLYMATH.
In the "Parameters" sub mask it is possible to determine the
number of pages to be printed.
Programmers can use the bottom of the mask to define their
preferences regarding the editing of the page; by ticking the
option required you can define whether to overwrite the
default dimensions (established in the General mask of the
Report) of the grid .
Definition of Header and Footer
In POLYMATH you can use, the default Headers and Footers
after editing them or create an unlimited quantity of new
ones. Editing for Headers/Footers is the same both for the
default elements and for those introduced by the user.
After clicking on the Edit option of the Headers/Footers list or
on a Header or Footer in Project Explorer, you can proceed to
the actual editing the object which is subdivided into two
masks: Fields and General.
Note: In this phase the objects are defined without distinguishing

between Headers and Footers; thus these are created and edited in
the same way and only at the moment of their being used within a
Report is it specified whether they are to be placed at the top or the
bottom of the page.
Header/Footer list
By clicking twice on the object Headers/Footers you can

access the Headers/Footers list defined in the project for the
Reports. As a default POLYMATH already contains two objects:
Default Header and DefaultFooter; to edit these objects just
click on the Edit button. It is also possible to add new objects
by clicking on Add, duplicate by clicking on Duplicate, or
delete ones already present by clicking on Delete.
Chapter 5
245
Project Explorer
Fields
Using this mask you can edit the way the Header/Footer will
actually appear in the pages into which it is called; it is edited
just like in the case of normal pages with various objects being
introduced and properties being set (see chap. 6, Managing
a page page 295).
The properties of the Header/Footer are the same as for
Frames (see chap. 6, Properties of Frames page 298).
To introduce an object simply click on the respective icon and
immediately after draw where in the page you wish the outline
of the area to contain it to be placed.
tools.
Using this mask you can, however, set the dimensions of the
Frame. Click on the
icon to select it and then move the
cursor to one of the red corners by dragging it in line with the
desired dimensions (this operation can also be performed by
the General mask as set out in the next section).
You cannot use this mask to move the object, in that its
position could be at the top of the page (if used as a Header)
or at the bottom (if used as a Footer).
General
The General is used to set identifying properties of the

Header/Footer page. The name is a unique attribute within the
project, that is, other different Headers/Footers with the same
name cannot exist.
POLYMATH.
At the bottom of the mask, you can define your preferences
regarding editing the Headers/Footers. You can also specify a
246
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
unit of measurement as a reference (options are: centimetres,

pixel, inches or millimetres) and the height and breadth
values of the part of the page occupied and the depth value of
the grid for the edging phase.
Points relating to print formats: XML and Hardcopy
When the Print function is called using a predefined command
or a Script you can decide to print the Report onto paper or
onto file (or both). In the case of printing onto file, the Report
specified by POLYMATH is saved onto a physical support of the
panel in XML format so as to be able to be displayed on a
browser and be in any case kept in a reconstructable digital
format.
For more information on how to carry out this operation, the
reader is advised to read the chapters illustrating this function
(see Functions relating to printing page 757 and see chap.
9, ESAPAGEMGR methods accessible with Scripts
page 581).
Hardcopy printout is an alternative mode for printing the
Reports created in POLYMATH. With this you can print the
entire content of the page displayed by the panel at the
moment of the print command (adapting it to sheet format).
There are two types of Hardcopy printout:
Hardcopy page : print the current page excluding any
popup
Fullscreen hardcopy : print exactly what appears on the
screen
Note: There is also the possibility of managing the text print and
values on rows in runtime exploiting the Scripting functions
contained POLYMATH. Readers are advised to consult the section
in this manual dealing with the Scripts to discover the potential of
these functions (see chap. 9, object ESAPRN page 639).
Remote
Notifications
The "Remote Notifications" function allows to send notification

messages by e-mail to a previously created user list.
Associating the notification message to a given alarm present
in the project, a message can be sent to one or more users,
for example.
The message can be associated to one (or more than one) of
the three alarm states: "Raised", "Acknowledged", "Acquired".
From "Explore Project", double-clicking "Remote Notifications", the editing area is accessed.
Chapter 5
247
Project Explorer
General
The text which will make up the message in the desired language can be typed on the "General" mask.
Email
From the "Email" mask it is possible to determine the settings
required to send the "Notifiche Remote" (Remote Notifications) via E-mails.
SMS
From the "SMS" mask it is possible to determine the settings
required to send the "Notifiche Remote" (Remote Notifications) via SMS service.
248
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Proxy
From the "Proxy" mask it is possible to determine the settings
required to send the "Notifiche Remote" (Remote Notifications) via Proxy service.
Notification Users
From "Explore Project", double-clicking "Notification Users",
the user list is accessed.
Clicking "Add", an unlimited number of different users can be
added.
The name, e-mail address (needed to notify the message) and
the language can be specified for each user.
These parameters can be edited modifying the corresponding
fields :
Chapter 5
249
Project Explorer
Notification Groups
All users previously created can be put into one or more
groups.
From "Explore Project", double-clicking "NotificationGroups",
the group list is accessed.
Clicking "Add", one or more groups can be added :
Clicking "Modify", the "General" and "User" masks are accessed.

General
From the "General" mask, an e-mail can be sent to all the

users in the group, choosing from the options of the "Parameter" voice.
The notification can be sent when the alarm is "Raised" or
"Acknowledged" or when the alarm "Ends".
Users
250
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
From the "Users" mask, clicking "Add", the users created previously can be added one at a time.
Double-clicking "None", the users on the list can be chosen.
To add other users to the same group, repeat the operation,
clicking "Add" again, until the desired number of users is reached.
System
Keyboards
The system keyboards will be present by default in POLYMATH, they differ from regular keyboards because they may not
be customised, also their image is not visible in Explore
project and therefore may not be changed.
List
From Explore project, after double-clicking on "System keyboards" one will access the list of system keyboards in side of
which there is a default keyboard :
Chapter 5
251
Project Explorer
From the "List" menu it is possible to (by pressing "Add" or

"Delete") add or delete one or more system keyboards, once
the choice is made click "OK" :
Note: Among the available keyboards, POLYMATH makes 2 groups

of keyboards available which differ by use of fonts : Cyrillic and
Standard;also POLYMATH allows to associate the keyboard by
choosing it based on the dimensions of the panel used in the project.
The selected keyboard will appear in the list from which it will
also be possible to choose whether to associate a "Beep" to
the keys, the user may choose among 3 possibilities :
Only "Enter" key : The Beep will only be associated to

the "Enter" key
All keys : The Beep will be associated to all keys
None : The Beep will not be associated to any keys
252
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
At this point the system keyboards are available to be used in

the project, to do this it will be necessary to associate them to
an editable field (for example a number field) :
Chapter 5
253
Project Explorer
To see the result of what was described so far, let's click on

the "Execute project" key from the main icon bar :
The "Run Time Simulator" will appear, from which, by moving

the mouse on the field to edit, we will be able to change the
value by entering data using the keyboard that will appear :
Keyboards
Keyboards can be customized to enter data having the desired

form, colour and content, so that they can be used for projects
in any language (using Cyrillic, Greek, German, American and
Asian characters). Keyboards can be created and saved in the
library to be used in further projects.
You can associate a customized default keyboard to any
language.
List
Double-click on keyboard to access the list of keyboards
entered by default :
254
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
The "List" menu allows you, by pressing the respective buttons, to :
Add one or more keyboards

Edit one or more keyboards in the list
Cancel one or more keyboards in the list
Duplicate one or more keyboards in the list
Fields
Double-click one of the keyboards in "Explore Resources":
The "Fields" window opens :
In the "Fields" window you can double-click each button of the

keyboard and customize its settings and properties :
Chapter 5
255
Project Explorer
General
l
The "General" window allows you to do the following :
Attribute a name and insert any comments on the keyboard

Define the size of the keyboard
Edit the default size of the grid
256
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Properties
The "Properties" option is visible in "DOUBLE CLICK mode"

and comes under "Properties Editor" in "Extended" mode.
The "Properties" window allows you to do the following :
Weekly Tasks
Assign a position in the page to the keyboard

Define the appearance of the keyboard by selecting a
background and foreground picture
Choose whether to show or hide the content in the keyboard display
Choose whether to show the keyboard in "foreground"
mode
The Weekly Tasks allow to set all functions that are necessary
to create and edit a "Chronothermostat".
After double clicking on the "TaskSettimanali" (Weekly Tasks)
in the '"Project Explorer", a list of "WeeklyTasks" inserted
within the project will appear in the work area :
Chapter 5
257
Project Explorer
From this list it is possible to insert new, duplicate or eliminate

existing. The "Tools" key allows to modify the structure of the
columns at will.
Once a "WeeklyTask" has been created (from the "Project Explorer" or list, by double clicking on it in the tree chart, it can
be edited in the work area.
The properties and events that can be associated to the
"WeeklyTask" object will be treated in the next chapter. It is
therefore recommended to consult the relative section for the
list and meaning (see chap. 6, Chronothermostat
page 445).
Generall
The "General" mask shows the data relative to the "Chronothermostat" settings. It is possible to introduce the identification attributes of the page, such as "Name", "Comment" and
"Id".
The different editing fields listed below can be found in the
"Activation" section:
"State tag" : it can be associated to a Boolean variable

that indicates the switch-on state (1) or switch-off state
(0) of the "Chronothermostat" scheduling
"Tag task": indicates the current temperature value
"Manual tag" :is the variable that memorises the temperature value that can be set in "Manual" mode.
"Tag OFF": it can be associated to a Boolean variable
that indicates the switch-on state (1) or switch-off state
(0) of the "Chronothermostat"
"Start time" : indicates the minimum value relative to
the time scale in the "Chronothermostat" graphics
258
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
"End time" : indicates the maximum value relative to

the time scale in the "Chronothermostat" graphics
"Intervals" : allows to set the time intervals in the
graphics between "hour" and "half-hour"
"Default value" : indicates the desired temperature value that can be activated by pressing the "Default" key
in the "Chronothermostat". The system exits the "Automatic" mode and passes to "Manual" mode with the Default value.
Script
The "Scripts" that can be activated in this page, allow to define

the behaviour of the "Chronothermostat" in the "Riscaldamento" (Heating) or "Cooling" modes or both.
"Tag script" is a service variable that memorises the activation
state (1) or not (0) of the "Script" itself.
The "Type of Chronothermostat" indicates which mode to
make active in the system :
"Heating only" : the system questions the values set

and changes the values of the "Hot tag"
"Cooling only" : the system questions the values set and
changes the values of the "Tag freddo" (Cold tag)
"Riscaldamento e Raffreddamento" (Heating and Cooling): the system questions the values set and changes
the values of the "Tag caldo" (Hot tag) or "Tag freddo"
(Cold tag) according to the system active. The passage
of activation from one system to another is activated by
the "Estate" (Summer) or "Inverno" (Winter) control
present in the "Chronothermostat"
The "Tag di commutazione" (Switch-over tag) indicates the

active state (1) or off state (0) of the "Riscaldamento e Raffreddamento" (Heating and Cooling) system
Differently, the "Tag caldo" (Hot tag) and "Tag Freddo" (Cold
tag) indicate the temperature reference values for activation
of the system.
Chapter 5
259
Project Explorer
The "Tag offset" can be used to set the offset value referring
to the "Chronothermostat" working temperature in a variable.
The actual temperature value is memorised in the "Tag temperatura corrente" (Current temperature tag).
Values
The "Values" table contains the data relative to the temperature and corresponding tag values. It can be useful to assign
a different tag value with respect to the temperature when the
device, used in the realisation of the project, requires conversion of the data according to its programming features. The
"Tools" key allows to modify the structure of the columns at
will.
Schedulers
Through the "Schedulers" function, Polymath allows programming the execution of organised events in daily and weekly time periods, even combining them with customised calendars.
List
After having double clicked on the "Schedulers" icon in the
"Explore Project", inside the work area the "List" mask containing a list of the schedulers inserted inside the project will appear:
From this list it is possible to insert new ones (by clicking the
"Add" key), to duplicate or to eliminate the existing ones (by
clicking the "Duplicate" and the "Delete" keys), the "Tools"
260
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
key allows modifying the columns structure at will, while the

"Modify" key allows entering the "General" property editing
mask:
General
The "General" mask consists of the following sub masks:
Identification
Properties
Holiday
Fields
Identification
Chapter 5
261
Project Explorer
This sub mask makes it possible to assign a name and a comment to the scheduler.
Properties
The "Properties" sub mask shows data relating to the "Scheduler" settings. It is possible to insert page identification attributes:
Task Type
Start Tag
End Tag
The "Task Type" section makes it possible to choose among

the following options:
"Single": only the beginning time is shown (that is only

a start event will be associated, it will not have any
event or end time:
StartEnd: both start time and end time are shown

(that is there will be two events associated to start and
end):
By default the scheduler has two Tags associated to it:
262
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Start Tag
End Tag
It is possible to change Tags adding new ones that have to be

of the same type (Internal) and value (Unsigned Long) of the
default ones:
Clicking on the "Modify" key

just created Tag:
will edit parameters of the
Holiday
The "Holiday" sub mask allows regulating the just created

scheduler, based on a time period (Holiday) in which the user
needs to change the activity functions set on scheduler, for
example if user is away for the whole month of August, it is
possible to appropriately set Holiday option to disable scheduler for the necessary time period.
On the "Regulate" sub mask it is possible to choose among the
following options:
Chapter 5
263
Project Explorer
None
Do not perform during Holiday
Separate Scheduling
Choosing the "None" option, set by default, the scheduler is

repeated every day without interruptions
Choosing the "Do not Perform during Holiday" option the scheduler is disabled for a time period set by the user:
Choosing the "separate Scheduling" option it is possible to separately manage scheduler activities (main) and "Holiday" activities option:
In both last 2 cases it is necessary to create a "Holiday

Group":
On the "Group" sub mask it is possible to choose among the

following options:
Fields
The "Fields" option allows viewing buttons on "Scheduler
View" that make it possible to set scheduler activities customising them at will.
264
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
User can choose among following options:
"None"
"Days"
"Week"
Choosing the "None" option, only two fields indicating hours

and minutes for scheduling beginning and end will appear on
the configured page:
By using the specific decrease and increase keys it is possible

to indicate scheduled time hours and minutes.
By choosing the Days option, the configured page will show

seven keys for weekly programming along with the two hour
and minute fields:
Chapter 5
265
Project Explorer
By choosing the "Week" option, the configured page will show

two keys for choosing between week day programming or
week end only along with the two hour and minute fields :
266
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
By double-clicking on "Scheduler View" in both cases the page

opens configuration menu for editing all present objects (see
chap. 6, Editing Scheduler View page 454).
Events
The "Events" option is only present on "DOUBLE CLICK Mode",
while it is present in "Events Editor" on the "Extended" mode.
It is possible to match an event (function or script) to each
previously created Scheduler.
The event is activated on the two different Page conditions :
OnStart: The event is activated by the "start tag" assigned value present in the "properties" sub mask (see
chap. 5, Properties page 261).
OnStop: The event is activated by the "end tag" assigned value present in the "properties" sub mask. (see
chap. 5, Properties page 261).
To assign an event to the page, click on the selected condition

and on the browse key, the following screen is displayed which
allows user to match a function or a script to the page by using
the appropriate keys :
Chapter 5
267
Project Explorer
Holiday Group
The "Holiday Groups" function, already found in the "Chronothermostat" option (see chap. 6, Chronothermostat
page 445)allows activities planning, usually matched to the
"Scheduler" function, and managing them over a user-definable time period. (see chap. 5, Holiday page 262).
After having double clicked on the "Holiday Groups" icon in the
"Explore Project", inside the work area the "List" mask containing a list of Holiday Groups inserted inside the project will appear :
268
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
mask :
General
The "General" mask consists of the following sub masks :

Identification
Properties
Identification
This sub mask makes it possible to assign a name and a comment to the "Holiday Group".
Chapter 5
269
Project Explorer
Properties
The "Properties" sub mask shows data relating to the "Holiday

Group" settings. It is possible to insert page identification attributes :
Holiday Type
Month
Year
The "Holiday Type" section makes it possible to choose among

the following options :
"Specific Year": Determines month and year during which Group is active
"Every year": With this option, holiday group is active

during a specific month of every year :
Two Tags are assigned to Holiday Type by default :
Start Tag
End Tag
270
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
It is possible to change Tags adding new ones that have to be

of the same type (Internal) and value (Unsigned Long) of the
default ones :
Clicking on the "Modify" key

just created "Holiday group" :
Audio Files
will edit parameters of the
The "Audio Files" option is present only when a panel IT110,

IT112 o IT115 has been used :
Chapter 5
271
Project Explorer
User can use the "Audio Files" function to assign an audio file
(both.MP3 and .Wav) to an alarm report.
Note: Only MP3 files can be downloaded to panel during project

download; Polymath converts Wave files in MP3 format before
downloading.
After having double clicked on the "Audio Files" icon in the

"Explore Project", inside the work area the "List" mask containing a list of the "Audio Files" inserted inside the project will
appear :
272
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
mask, by clicking on the "Including Resources" editing area
the "Include as a resource inside project" check-box will also
appear, by setting "True" the file just downloaded will be available inside the project :
Chapter 5
273
Project Explorer
General
In the "General" sub mask the "Audio File" name and comment can be edited.
Properties
The "Properties" sub mask shows data relating to the "Audio

Files" settings.
Properties
Listen / Stop
In the "Properties" section the "Audio File" can be loaded.

can be associated to Alarm.
Select file to be loaded by clicking on the "Load" key and by
choosing desired file path.
274
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
The "Include as a resource inside project" check-box is also

present, by enabling it the file just loaded inside the project
will be available.
In the "Listen /Stop" section it is possible to listen on PC the
selected "Audio File"
Timers
Timers are tools put at the operators disposal for

programming the execution of certain activities in line with
temporal variables calculated directly by the terminal.
After double-clicking on the "Timer" icon in "Explore Project" :
Chapter 5
275
Project Explorer
he "List" window will appear containing a list of "Timers" entered in the project :
276
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
The Timers can be used in accordance with the needs of the

project, simply by entrusting functions or Scripts to their
start, suspend or end count events (see chap. 6, Events
related to Timers page 294).
Using the general table relating to the Timers you can
introduce, delete and duplicate Timers. In relation to each
element you can specify the operational mode, the duration
and the direction of the count.
There are different modes of operation:
One-run: the timer starts, allows a certain period of

time to elapse, then goes off and stops (one run)
Normal: the timer works periodically, that is, when it
goes off it resets itself and then another cycle starts,
indefinitely (continuous run)
Single alarm: the timer goes off at the date and time
specified and then stops
Alarm time: the timer goes off at the specified time then
resets and another cycle starts (continuous run)
Warning: Irrespective of the type of Timer used, it is always

necessary for the Timer to be activated in runtime by the related
Start function called up by the button or Script (see Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 and see chap. 9, The object
ESATIMER page 574), otherwise the related count or control will
not be initialised.
The duration attribute also takes on various meanings

depending on the operational mode specified:
If the Mode is One-run or Normal: it represents the trigger
time in tenths of a second (0 disables the Timer)
If the Mode is Single alarm: it represents the date-trigger time
in ANSI-C format: number of seconds from time 0:0:0 of the
1-January-1970 (the data can be selected in POLYMATH using
an convenient calendar window).
If the Mode is alarm time: it represents the trigger time in
seconds after midnight; assigning a inadmissible value
disables the Timer and is flagged to the operator by means of
an error dialog box.
The value of direction, indicates the counting mode of the
Timer; this may be arrived at by increasing the count variable
or decreasing it (this choice has no operative consequences on
the working of the Timer but merely on the internal count
value).
Chapter 5
277
Project Explorer
Warning: These types of Timer are software timers, so it is

preferable to avoid using them as clocks.
Timer Events
You can associate an event (function or script) to a particular
condition of any timer you have created. These conditions can
be :
OnSuspend: the event is activated when the timer is

temporarily suspended
OnTimerFired: the event is activated when the timer naturally stops counting
OnTimerStart: the event is activated when the timer
starts counting
OnTimerStop: the event is activated when the timer isstopped
278
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Configuring the
device
It is possible to define a set of properties and working characteristics for each device in the project;
Double-click "HW Configuration" in "Explore Project" to open
the editing page :
Select the device you wish to edit. Double-click it to edit its

settings in the "General" and "Communication Ports" windows.
General
This window allows you to insert the identification attributes

of the devices such as the "Name" and "Comment". Each name in the project must be different - no two devices should
have the same name, even if they are of the same type, brand
and model. The comment is a unicode string that can only be
viewed in the POLYMATH.
Chapter 5
279
Project Explorer
"Parameters" subwindow :
The "Parameters" subwindow allows you to configure the following options :
Use swap in the protocol: Check the box to invert the

order of the bytes in the complex data.
Type of addressing: Allows you to establish the format
of the register device address; the "Default" option associates the format of the chosen driver to the register.
Communication Ports
In this window you can configure communication between the

panel and device. You can configure all the ports on the device. In general, it is possible to configure on the terminal the
communication speed (baudrate) and general settings of the
communication protocol (including parity of the bits, data bits
and stop bits), while the address of the device is configured
on the device itself. At the bottom of the window are the ranges permitted by the protocol for each value inserted.
280
Chapter 5
Project Explorer
Chapter 6
281
Properties Editor
6.
Properties Editor
The purpose of this chapter is to describe all those functions

offered by POLYMATH for editing the graphics and the accessibility of the project applications. Our starting point is the
concept that each executable operation, each visible data
(modifiable or not), each link between the pages, each function button must appear to the operator inside a page displayed on the VT.
We shall start out giving some indications of the general organization of the pages and go on to give more detailed information on all the elements that can be introduced together with
their characteristics. For each graphic element that can be introduced in a page (and for the pages themselves) a series of
properties can be defined that determine the aspect that the
object will assume in Runtime.
Furthermore, in the case of many objects, functions or scripts
are applicable when particular events are triggered.
The reference windows for managing the properties and
events are the Properties Editor and the Events Editor respectively.
Properties
Editor
Please note the "Properties Editor" is only visible in "EXTENDED" mode (see chap. 4, Choice of interface page 89).
282
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Note: As of DOUBLE CLICK, all the objects properties are visible and editable in the popup-window which appears after double
click over any object. Following is an example using in the project
a Touch Button":
By using the DOUBLE CLICK interface (see chap. 4, Double

Click Interface page 90), let's insert a touch-button in a page
of the project (see chap. 6, Touch Button page 373), and
let's double click over it to edit its properties (by using the
EXTENDED interface such properties of the object are placed
in a table, (see chap. 6, Properties of the Touch button
page 374) will appear the following image :
Chapter 6
283
Properties Editor
Clicking on "Position" we will obtain the following screenshot,

from which it will be possible to edit the object position (High,
Left) and its dimensions (Height, Width) :
From the previous window, by clicking on the Aspect option

we get into the following window, from which it's possible to
edit the following properties :
284
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
By clicking on the Text Property option we can get into the

following window, from which it's possible to edit the following
properties :
By clicking on the Behaviour option we can get into the following window, from which it's possible to edit the following
properties :
Chapter 6
285
Properties Editor
By clicking on the option Text List we can get into the following window, from which it's possible to edit the following
properties :
By clicking on the Label option we can get into the following

window, from which it's possible to edit the following properties :
286
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
By clicking on the Image option we can get into the following window, from which it's possible to edit the following
properties :
By clicking on the Events option we can get into the following window, from which it's possible to associate an event
(function or script) to the object (see chap. 6, Properties of
the Touch button page 374) :
Chapter 6
287
Properties Editor
Let's go back to the explanation of Properties Editor which is

composed by a list of properties and related editable values.
If the value fields are not editable it means that the current
configuration of the element does not permit any change in its
value; in these cases, editing the fields in question is only possible when the correlated attributes allow it.
Changes in the graphic properties of an object cause an immediate redrawing of the object on the page which is noticeable to the programmer.
If the Properties Editor does not appear on the screen because
it has already been closed, it can be recalled to the screen by
clicking on the icon
in the toolbar or, using the Main menu,
by clicking on Display->Show->Properties Editor. Like all anchorable windows, the Properties Editor too can be moved, reduced to an icon or closed (see chap. 3, Moving Anchorable
windows page 85).
Over the next paragraphs we will show the editable properties
of each object and the meanings of these properties.
Dynamic assigning of values to the properties
Some properties can have a variable assigned to them rather
than having a constant value. The value of the properties can
change in Runtime in line with the changes of the variables assigned to them.
To pass from the assigning-a-constant mode to assigning-avariable mode, just click on the icon present on the left of the
editable field. If in assigning-a-constant mode, the icon will be
and pressing on it will take you to assigning-a-variable
mode. If in assigning-a-variable mode, the icon will be
and
pressing on it will take you to assigning-a-constant mode.
The type of variable assigned must, naturally, be compatible
with the values requested by the properties; for example:
for the properties True/False, the variable must assume
Boolean values
for the properties DateAndTime, the variable must assume Long values
for properties defining colors (e.g. BorderColor, AreaColor, etc.), the variable must assume admissible RGB
(Long) values as indicated in the following table:
Table 1:
Color
RGB
Hexadecimal value
Red
255,0,0
00 00 00 FF
Green
0,255,0
00 00 FF 00
288
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Table 1:
Events Editor
Color
RGB
Hexadecimal value
Blue
0,0,255
00 FF 00 00
The "Events Editor", like the "Properties Editor", is only visible

in "EXTENDED" mode. (see chap. 4, Choice of interface
page 89).
The Events Editor is composed of a list of events that can be
assigned to the element in question.
If the Events Editor does not appear on the screen because it

has already been closed, it can be recalled to the screen by
clicking on the icon
on the toolbar or, using the Main menu,
by clicking on Display->Show->Events Editor. Like all anchorable windows, the Events Editor too can be moved, reduced to
an icon or closed (see chap. 3, Moving Anchorable windows
page 85).
Over the next paragraphs we will show, in relation to each object, the events to which functions and scripts can be assigned.
For further details relating to the functions and scripts, the
reader is advised to consult the appropriate sections of this
manual (see chap.Appendix B - Predefined functions
page 745 and see chap. 9, Scripts page 553).
Note: When POLYMATH is first started (in EXTENDED mode), the

Events Editor is incorporated as a clickable icon for the Properties
Editor. To access it just click in the corresponding area at the bottom of the window:
Chapter 6
289
Properties Editor
Use this window to assign a predefined function or a user

script to each event simply by double-clicking on the corresponding row in the table and then on the
key.
The resulting mask will allow you to make all the settings necessary; to add a function just click on Add Function and
choose the function you want from the list that appears. Similarly, by clicking on Add Script you can choose the Script to
be assigned. For objects like touch buttons, Function keys and
Switchbuttons up to 2 functions/scripts per corresponding
event can be introduced; for the events of other objects generally only one function or script can be assigned. To change
the order in which the functions must be executed just move
them using the Move up and Move down keys. To eliminate
a function you just need to select it and click on the Delete
button.
Warning: Where two functions can be assigned to the same event

the user must take care to furnish an order which is logical for consecutive functions: there would be no sense, for example, in having
a function referring to an old page follow a function of Change page.
If you choose to assign a predefined function to an event, the

lower part of the window can be used to enter its parameters
(e.g. file name, name of objects, etc.).
If you choose to assign a script to an event, you can choose
to save the value returned by that script (if the script is set to
return a value) in a variable.
For further details relating to the assignable functions and the
scripts, the reader is advised to consult the appropriate chapters of this manual (see chap.Appendix B - Predefined functions page 745 e see chap. 9, Scripts page 553).
290
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Note: If you wish to assign more than one function to a key, it is better to use a user script containing those functions.
We set out below a description of the events that can be assigned to some of the elements already seen in Project Explorer. The list of events in the case of graphic elements will by
contrast be dealt with case by case.
Events related to variables
Table 2: Events assignable to variables
Event
Description
OnInizialization
Activated immediately after initialization of the variable, that is, at the startup of Runtime
OnOffLine
Activated when the variable goes Off

Line, that is, when it becomes unavailable following a break in communication
OnOffScan
Activated when the update of the variable field is disabled; this happens via
a script setting the attribute OffScan at
True (see chap. 5, Device page 142)
OnOnLine
Activated when the variable goes On

Line, that is, when it becomes available again after a break in communication
OnOnScan
Activated when the update of the variable field is enabled; this happens via
a script setting the attribute OffScan at
False (see chap. 5, Device page 142)
OnRawValueChange
Activated when the peripheral device

assigns a new rough value to the variable (therefore also at the startup of
the project and when the connection
with the device is re-established). The
event is always generated before the
value itself is transferred
OnValSent
Activated when the rough value has

been correctly sent to the field device
Chapter 6
291
Properties Editor
Table 2: Events assignable to variables

Event
Description
OnValueChange
Activated when a new value is assigned to the variable (thus also at the
startup of the project and when the
connection with the device is re-established). The event is always generated
before the value itself is transferred
Events related to alarms

Table 3: Events associated with the Alarms Log
Event
Description
OnHistoryFull
Activated when the alarm log is full
OnHistoryWarning
Activated when the alarm log memory

reaches the set value; by default, the
warning is issued after 75 records (out
of the 512 that can be stored on the
memory).
Table 4: Events assignable to Alarms

Event
Description
OnAlarmAck
Activated when the alarm has been acknowledged
OnAlarmOff
Activated when the alarm ends
OnAlarmOn
Launched when the alarm enters the

active stat; the script or the function
are run after the instance of the alarm
event in the table of active alarms
292
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Events related to Recipes

Table 5: Events assignable to Recipes
Event
Description
OnDownload
Complete
Activated when the download from the

VT to the device is completed
OnDownloadError
Activated when errors occur in the

download from the VT to the device
OnRecipeCreate
Activated when the Recipe is created
OnRecipeDelete
Activated when the Recipe is about to

be deleted from the archive. The event
is generated immediately before the
effective deletion of the Recipe
OnRecipeLoad
Activated when the recipe is about to

be loaded in the archive. The event is
generated just before the recipe is effectively loaded.
OnUploadComplete
Activated when the upload from the VT

to the device is completed
OnUploadError
Activated when errors occur in the upload from the VT to the device
Script Events key

Table 6: Events that can be associated to the Scripts
Evento
Descrizione
OnScriptError
Activated when errors appear during

execution of the Script
Events related to Pipelines

Table 7: Events assignable to Pipelines
Event
Description
OnDestDown
When anomalies in the destination

variable stop the Pipeline working correctly
Chapter 6
293
Properties Editor
Table 7: Events assignable to Pipelines

Event
Description
OnSourceDown
When anomalies in the source variable

stop the Pipeline working correctly
(break in the connection with the device, invalid value assignment etc.)
OnStart
The event is activated following the

startup of the Pipeline; that is, it occurs at the start of Runtime, or after a
break in the connection between the
variables is restored
OnStop
When a Pipeline stop is requested
Events related to Passwords

The events relating to the Passwords can be edited by the
Events editor by keeping the User table for Password configuration selected (see chap. 5, Users and Passwords
page 213).
Table 8: Events assignable to Passwords
Event
Description
OnLogin
Activated following a successful Login

operation
OnLogout
Activated following a successful Logout

operation
OnLoginError
Activated when wrong Login data is

emitted
OnPasswordChanged
Activated following a change in password for a user via the user grid (see
chap. 6, Properties of the Password
Grid page 438)
294
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Events related to Timers

The events relating to the Timers can be edited by the Events
editor by keeping the reference Timer in the related list selected.
Table 9: Events assignable to Timers
Event
Description
OnSuspend
Activated when the Timer is suspended

by means of a stop command
OnTimerFired
Activated following the completion of

the Timer count
OnTimerStart
Activated when the Timer count is

started
OnTimerStop
Activated following a stop command to

the Timer
Events related to Trend Buffers

Table 10: Events assignable to Trend buffers
Event
Description
OnBufferClear
Activated when the buffer has been

emptied
OnBufferFull
Activated following the admission of a

new sample if, after the reading, the
buffer becomes full
OnBufferOverflow
Activated when the buffer is full and a

new sample has arrived
OnSample
A new sample has been admitted. Not

generated for the trend buffers assigned to a tag array
OnWarningLevel
Activated following the admission of a

new sample and the filling of the buffer
has reached the warning level (see
chap. 5, Buffer page 222)
Chapter 6
295
Properties Editor
Scheduler Events
Events regarding Schedulers can be edited by "Events Editor"
(EXTENDED mode) or by the "Events" option in the DOUBLE
CLICK mode. (see chap. 5, Events page 156).
Table 11: Scheduler Events
Managing a
page
Event
Description
OnStart
Activated by "Start Tag" assigned value present in the "Properties" sub

mask (see chap. 5, Properties
page 200)
OnStop
Activated by "End Tag" assigned value

present in the "Properties" sub mask
(see chap. 5, Properties page 200)
To set graphic and visual characteristics of a project special

attention must be paid its the base element, the Page. Each
graphic element, navigation or function button, command and
Data viewing/editing field must be positioned in a Page for it
to be visible to the operator in Runtime.
To create and manage the pages in a project the reader is advised to consult the preceding chapter (see chap. 5, Pages
page 168).
When you enter a pages Fields mask, the work area will show
a preview of how the page will be displayed on the VT.
During the editing of a page a series of programming commands are made available. Use buttons
,
and
of the toolbar (accessible also via Layout menu ->Zoom) to
change the display dimensions of a page, defining these with
the Zoom (the same operation can be performed by clicking
296
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
the right-hand mouse key when the pointer is on the page and
choosing the required function from the menu that appears).
By clicking on the
icon of the toolbar (Layout -> Show
Grid) you can decide whether to show or hide the editing grid
in the page preview. The grid is very useful for bringing objects in alignment very quickly when they are being arranged
on the page. The grid dimensions can also be edited using
Project Explorer in the VT options (see chap. 5, Main window
page 129).
By clicking on the
icon of the toolbar (Layout -> Align Grid)
you can decide whether to align the objects to the grid once
they have been introduced or whether to have them introduced freely.
With alignment to the grid is activated, the element can only
be introduced within the limits delineated by the grid.
While if the alignment function is deactivated the elements

can be freely introduced into the page as shown in the figure
below
Chapter 6
297
Properties Editor
Note: You are recommended to activate the alignment to the grid

function to be sure to have a well-ordered and coherent arrangement of objects on the page.
Should you be creating a multilanguage project (see chap. 5,

Languages page 166), the elements in the page and the related texts can be displayed in a particular project language.
To do this just select the required language from the dropdown menu
containing all the languages added to
the project (this command can be accessed also via the Main
menu using the sequence Display->Project language). Each
time a language is chosen the display of the page changes instantly.
To introduce an object into the page click on the related icon
in the toolbar (or use the Main menu) and draw the outline in
the position desired on the page preview. Once an element is
added it will appear in the page and can be selected simply by
clicking on it. For each object selected there will appear in the
Properties and Events Editor all the options the user can set,
while by clicking with the right key on an object selected you
can access a menu with standard functions like Edit, Duplicate, Delete, Cut, Copy and Zoom.
Page properties
Table 12: Page properties
Properties
Description
PageBColor
Background page color; editable using

RGB code or a palette of colors
PageBorder3DEffect
Defines the effects of the Border: Flat,

Relief or Sunken
PageBorderColor
Color of the Border
PageBorderEnabled
Defining whether to display the Border

of the Page
PageBorderSize
Dimensions of the Border
PageBorderStyle
Style of the Border, Solid or Broken
BackgroundImage
Enabled
Defines whether the page must have a

background image
298
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Table 12: Page properties

Properties
Description
BackgroundImageId
Chooses the background image (from

the list of images introduced)
ImageHPosition
Horizontal positioning of the image

(Centered, Right or Left)
ImageReprMode
Mode of representation of the image:

can be Cut, Stretched, Stretched
maintaining the proportions and Position
ImageVPosition
Vertical positioning of the image (Centered, Top or Bottom)
Events related to Pages

Table 13: Events related to Page
Event
Description
OnPageOpen
Activated after a Page is shown
OnPageClose
Activated when a Page is about to be

closed
Properties of Popup pages

The properties of the Popup page editor are exactly the same
as those of the standard pages (see chap. 6, Page properties
page 297).
Events related to Popup pages
The Editor events that can be assigned to the Popup pages are
exactly the same as those of the standard pages (see chap. 6,
Events related to Pages page 298).
Properties of Frames
Table 14: Frame properties
Properties
Meaning
FrameBColor
Transparent
Defines whether the background of the

Frame must be transparent
Chapter 6
299
Properties Editor
Table 14: Frame properties
Predefined
graphic
elements
Properties
Meaning
FrameBColor
Background color of the frame; editable using RGB code or palette of colors
PageBorder3DEffect
Permits the 3-D effect that can be assigned to the Border
PageBorderColor
Indicates the color of the Border; editable using RGB code or palette of colors
PageBorderEnabled
Defines whether the page must have a

Border
PageBorderSize
Indicates the dimensions of the Border
PageBorderStyle
Permits the style of the Border to be

chosen
BackgrImageEnabled
Determines the use of a background

image
BackgroundImageID
Determines the background image in

the frame
POLYMATH has a set of predefined graphic elements that can

be added to a page. These elements can have simple graphic
functions, navigation functions and display and edit data functions. The icons relating to these objects can be found in the
toolbar and the Main menu using Fields->Create.
All the graphic elements have been grouped, depending on
their function, in four groups:
Simple Figures
Value Fields
Simple Controls
Complex Controls
The next paragraphs contain a list of all the graphic elements
predefined by POLYMATH which can be introduced into a page.
For each property we shall indicate in a schematic way the related editable properties and the events that can be assigned
to them.
300
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Warning: When planning your project you need to bear in mind that
when two buttons on the Touch Screen panel are pressed at the same
time this is interpreted as having pressed halfway between these buttons. So you are advised to avoid settings that involve this situation.
Simple Figures
The first group of graphic elements to be considered is that of

the Simple Figures; these can be useful for creating more or
less complex drawings or for assigning special effects to the
pages.
Rectangle
A rectangle can be introduced into a page by clicking on the
icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Simple figures->Rectangle) and drawing its dimensions directly in the
page. This procedure enables you also to introduce rectangles
with rounded outlines (see TypeOfBox properties).
The characteristics of the Rectangle must be set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section
.
Properties of the Rectangle

Table 15: Properties of the Rectangle
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Rectangle.

Must be unique among the graphic elements
Comment
Identifying comment within POLYMATH
Top
Vertical position coordinate
Left
Horizontal position coordinate
Chapter 6
301
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Area that

can be selected using the RGB code or
color palettes. The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be
managed with thresholds
AreaVisibility
Determines whether the Rectangle

should have a background or if it must
be transparent; a Boolean variable can
be assigned to this value or it can be
Border3D
Determines a 3D effect for the Border,

which can be Flat, Relief, Recessed,
Bump or Etched. The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be
BorderBlink
Determines the flashing of the Border,

which can be No blinking, Slow blinking
or Rapid blinking. The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be
BorderColor
Determines the color of the Border,

which can be selected using the RGB
code or color palette. The value can be
assigned to a whole variable or it can
be managed with thresholds
BorderVisibility
Determines whether there will be a

Border to the Rectangle or not; a Boolean variable can be assigned to this
value
BorderSize
Determines the size of the Border,

which must be a number to which a
whole variable could be assigned if desired or it can be managed with thresholds
BorderStyle
Determines the style of the Border,

which can be Solid or Broken. The value can be assigned to a whole variable
or it can be managed with thresholds
302
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TypeOfBox
Determines whether the Rectangle

must be normal or rounded
RoundX
Editable if the Rectangle is rounded;

corresponds to the horizontal distance
between the position of the corner and
the point at which the curve joins the
horizontal side of the Rectangle
RoundY
Editable if the Rectangle is rounded;

corresponds to the vertical distance
between the position of the corner and
the point at which the curve joins the
vertical side of the Rectangle
Hide
Determines whether the object is initially visible. It is also possible to assign a Boolean variable (for changes in
Runtime) or it can be managed with
thresholds
Lock
Determines if the object can move or

not
PartialFill
Determines whether to make a partial

color infill. The value can be assigned
to a whole variable
FillColor
Determines the color of the Border infill that can be selected using the RGB
assigned to a whole variable
FillDir
Determines the direction of the Border

infill. The infill can happen From Low to
High, From High to Low, From Right to
Left or From Left to Right. The value
can be assigned to a whole variable
FillPercent
Indicates the percentage of the infill.

The value can be assigned to a whole
variable
TypeOfMovement
Identifies the movement associated to

the object: None, Direct, Horizontal,
Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical
TagDirectMovement
Associates a Tag to the Direct movement
Chapter 6
303
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TagX
Horizontal movement tag
TagY
Vertical movement tag
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
Horizontal co-ordinate
FinalY
Vertical co-ordinate
Ellipse
An ellipse can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Simple figures>Ellipse) and drawing its dimensions directly in the page.
To define the characteristics of the Ellipse, they must be set in
the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section.
Properties of the Ellipse

Table 16: Properties of the Ellipse
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Ellipse. Must

be unique among the graphic elements
Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
304
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Area that

color palette. The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be
AreaVisibility
Determines whether the Sector has a

background area or should be transparent; a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value or it can be
LineColor
Determines the color of the Ellipse outline that can be selected using the RGB
Hide
Determines whether the object is initially visible; it is also possible to assign a Boolean variable (dynamic in
thresholds
Lock

not
Ellipse3D
Determines the 3D effect of the Ellipse,

which can be Flat, Bump or Etched.
The value can be associated with Tag
PartialFill

to a whole variable
FillColor
Determines the color of the Ellipse infill

FillDir
Determines the direction of the Ellipse

FillPercent

variable
Chapter 6
305
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Arc
An Arc can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Simple figures>Arc) and drawing its dimensions directly in the page.
To define the characteristics of the Arc they must be set in the
Properties Editor as indicated in the following section.
Properties of the Arc

Table 17: Properties of the Arc
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Arc. Must be

unique among the graphic elements
Comment
306
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Table 17: Properties of the Arc

Properties
Description
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
LineColor
Determines the color of the Arc outline

Hide
Determines whether the object is initial visible; it is also possible to assign

a Boolean variable (dynamic in Runtime) or it can be managed with thresholds
Lock

not
StartAngle
Determines the Arc starting position

(given as an angle)
SweepAngle
Determines the angle (in degrees) of

the opening of the Arc
Sector
A Sector can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Simple figures>Sector) and drawing its dimensions directly in the page.
To define the characteristics of the Sector they must be set in
Chapter 6
307
Properties Editor
Properties of the Sector

Table 18: Properties of the Sector
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Sector. Must

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Area,

AreaVisibility

LineColor
Determines the color of the Sector outline, which can be selected using the
RGB code or color palette. The value
can be assigned to a whole variable or
it can be managed with thresholds
Hide
thresholds
Lock

not
StartAngle
Determines the Sector starting position (given as an angle)
SweepAngle
Determines the angle (in degrees) internal to the Sector
308
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Table 18: Properties of the Sector

Properties
Description
CircularSectorType
Determines the type of Sector. If True,

the line closing the sector does not
pass through the center (forming a
convex figure); otherwise, if False, the
line passes through the center (concave figure)
PartialFill

to a whole variable
FillColor
Determines the color of the Sector infill, which can be selected using the
FillDir
Determines the direction of the Sector

FillPercent

variable
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Line
A Line can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Simple figures>Line) and drawing its dimensions directly in the page.
To define the characteristics of the Line they must be set in
Chapter 6
309
Properties Editor
Properties of the Line

Table 19: Properties of the Line
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Line. Must be

Comment
X1
Horizontal coordinate of starting point
X2
Horizontal coordinate of destination

point
Y1
Vertical coordinate of starting point
Y2
Vertical coordinate of destination point
Effect3D
Determines the 3D effect to be applied

to the image: Flat, Relief, Recessed,
Tube in Relief or Recessed Tube. Can
be assigned to a whole variable or it
can be managed with thresholds
LineColor
Determines the color of the infill, which

LineSize
Determines the thickness of the line.

variable or it can be managed with
thresholds
310
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Table 19: Properties of the Line

Properties
Description
Hide
Determines whether the object is initial visible; it is also possible to assign

a Boolean variable (dynamic in Runtime) or it can be managed with thresholds
Lock

not
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Polygon
A Polygon can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Simple figures>Polygon). After clicking on the icon, click on the page at the
points that you want the vertices of the Polygon to appear in.
POLYMATH will show the preview of the Polygon as soon as the
mouse is moved. Every click made will produce a new vertex.
The introduction of the Polygon is confirmed by just doubleclicking it (thereby ending its edit).
Once a Polygon has been introduced, its structure (that is, its
vertices) can be edited: after selecting the Polygon and then
moving one of its vertices the lines (sides) adjacent to this
vertex are automatically removed by POLYMATH.
Using this function, an irregular Polygon can be created, that
is one having angles and sides with dimensions chosen at will.
Regular polygons can also be introduced using the appropriate
POLYMATH tool (see chap. 6, Regular polygon page 315).
To define the characteristics of the Polygon they must be set
in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section.
Chapter 6
311
Properties Editor
Properties of the Polygon

Table 20:
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Polygon. Must

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Polygon,

which that can be selected using the
AreaVisibility

312
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Table 20:
Properties
Description
LineColor
Determines the color of the Polygon

outline, which can be selected using
the RGB code or color palette. The value can be assigned to a whole variable
LineSize
Determines the thickness of the outline of the Polygon. The value can be
Hide
thresholds
Lock

not
PartialFill

to a whole variable
FillColor
Determines the color of the Polygon infill using the RGB code or the color palette. The value can be assigned to a
whole variable
FillDir
Determines the direction of the Polygon infill. The infill can happen From
Low to High, From High to Low, From
Right to Left or From Left to Right. The
value can be assigned to a whole variable
FillPercent

variable
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Chapter 6
313
Properties Editor
Table 20:
Properties
Description
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Irregular line
A Irregular line can be introduced into a page by clicking on
the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Simple
figures->Irregular line). After clicking on the icon, click on the
page at the points that you want the vertices of the figure to
appear (in practice, the beginning and the end of the various
line sections). POLYMATH will show the preview of the line as
soon as the mouse is moved. Every click made will produce a
new line sections. The introduction of the Irregular line is confirmed by just double-clicking it (thereby ending its edit).
Once an Irregular line has been introduced, its structure (that
is, its vertices) can be edited: after selecting the Line and then
moving one of its lines, those adjacent to this vertex are automatically removed by POLYMATH.
Using this function, an open line can be created, that differs
from an irregular Polygon in that it is not necessarily closed to
form a closed geometric figure.
To define the characteristics of the Irregular line they must be
set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section.
314
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Properties of the Irregular line

Table 21: Properties of the Irregular line
properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Irregular line.

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
LineColor
Determines the color of the Line, which

LineSize
Determines the thickness of the outline of the Line. The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be
NPoints
Indicates the number of sides assigned

to the Irregular Line in the drawing
phase
Hide
thresholds
Lock

not
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Chapter 6
315
Properties Editor
Table 21: Properties of the Irregular line

properties
Description
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Regular polygon
A Regular polygon can be introduced into a page by clicking
on the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Simple figures->Regular polygon). After clicking on the icon, use
the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH
should draw the Polygon.
The default setting is that a pentagon (5 sides) is drawn; to
change the number of sides (vertices) just edit the properties
Number of Points using the Properties Editor (see the following section).
This function allows the creation only of regular polygons, that
is, one with all the angles and sides equal. Irregular Polygons
can also be introduced by using the appropriate POLYMATH
tool (see chap. 6, Polygon page 310).
To define the characteristics of the Regular Polygon they must
be set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following
section.
316
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Properties of the Regular Polygon

The properties of the Regular polygon are identical to those of
the Irregular polygon(see chap. 6, Properties of the Polygon
page 311).
Label
A Label can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Simple figures>Label). After clicking on the icon, use the mouse to indicate
the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the Polygon. A Label is a text field (may be multilanguage) into which
you can introduce text strings that will not change in Runtime.
To define the characteristics of the Label they must be set in
Properties of the Label

Table 22: Properties of the Label
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Label. Must be

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Label,

AreaVisibility

Chapter 6
317
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Border3D

BorderBlink

BorderColor
Determines the color of the Border using the RGB code or color palette. The
value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds
BorderVisibility

Border to the Label or not; a Boolean
variable can be assigned to this value
BorderSize
Determines the size of the Border

whole variable can be assigned, if
wished, or it can be managed with
thresholds
BorderStyle

FontField
Font related to the text shown in the

field; by clicking on
you can edit
multilanguage Fonts (see chap. 5,
Languages page 166)
Text
Text shown in the Label; by clicking on

you can edit multilanguage texts
and their related Fonts (see chap. 5,
Languages page 166)
TextBlink
Determines the flashing of the text;

the possibilities are No Blinking, Slow
blinking or Rapid Blinking. The value
318
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TextColor
Determines the color of the Label text,

TextHAlign
Allows you to specify the horizontal

centering of the text within the Label.
thresholds
TextVAlign
Allows you to specify the vertical centering of the text within the Label. The
Hide
thresholds
Lock

not
TextMaxLen
Determines the maximum value in relation to the length of the text string
TextMultiLine
Determines whether the Label text can

start a new line
TextTranslateDisable
Determines whether the translation of

the Label text must be disabled
TextAutoAdjust
Determines whether automatically to

distribute the text uniformly within the
Label; this causes a resizing of the Label in relation to the text contained in
Runtime
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
Chapter 6
319
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Complex label
A Complex label can be introduced into a page by clicking on
the icon
figures->Complex label). This icon (or Menu option) is active
only if it is within a Complex Control editor (see chap. 6,
Complex Controls page 400).
After clicking on the icon, use the mouse to indicate the area
in the page where POLYMATH should draw the Label. A Label
is a text field (may be multilanguage) into which you can introduce text strings that will not change in Runtime.
To define the other characteristics of the Label they must be
set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section.
Properties of the Complex Label

The properties of the Complex label are identical to those of
the Label. The reader is, therefore, advised to consult the appropriate part of the previous section (see chap. 6, Properties
of the Label page 316).
Trend Pen
A Trend Pen can be introduced into a page by clicking on the
icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Simple figures->Trend pen). This icon (or Menu option) is active only if
it is within a Trend editor (see chap. 6, Editing a TrendView
page 410). In practice, the Trend Pen makes it possible to
view the current value next to the Pen selected, in such a way
320
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
as to couple a numeric indication with the graphic display of

the Trend.
After clicking on the icon, use the mouse to indicate the area
in the page where POLYMATH should draw the Trend Pen.
For the characteristics of the Trend Pen to be defined, they
must be set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section.
Properties of the Trend Pen

Table 23: Properties of the Trend Pen
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Trend Pen.

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Trend Pen,

AreaVisibility

background area or should be transparent; a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value
Chapter 6
321
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Border3D

Bump or Etched. The value can be assigned to a whole variable
BorderBlink

or Rapid blinking. The value can be assigned to a whole variable
BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the Field or not; a Boolean
BorderSize

wished
BorderStyle

FontField

you can edit
Languages page 166)
TextBlink

can be associated with Tag or it can be
TextColor
Determines the color of the Field text,

TextHAlign
Determines the type of horizontal text

alignment, which can be Centered, Left
or Right
322
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TextVAlign
Determines the type of vertical text

alignment, which can be Centered, Top
or Bottom
Lock

not
PasswordLevel
Determines the authorization level required to access the field (see chap. 5,
Password configuration page 213)
TabIndex
Makes it possible to control the focus

movement when using movement keys
of the cursor within a page. It also controls the order in which data is introduced in several fields when the
automatic setting of the next field of
the page is enabled (see chap. 5,
General page 139)
AsciiLen
Determines the maximum length of

the string represented in the Field
PenValue
Allows you to select the type of Pen to

which to assign the field
Image Field
An Image field can be introduced into a page by clicking on the
icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Simple figures->Image). After clicking on the icon, use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the
Image. The area created in this way will contain one of the images added to the project (see chap. 5, Frames page 178).
To define the characteristics of the Image they must be set in
Note: An image can also be added to a page by simply dragging it

from Project Explorer into the work area to the page position required. With this procedure POLYMATH automatically creates an
Image field relating to the dragged image.
Chapter 6
323
Properties Editor
Properties of the Image field

Table 24: Properties of the Image Field
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Image field.

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Image

field, which can be selected using the
AreaVisibility

Border3D

BorderBlink

324
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the Image Field or not; a
Boolean variable can be assigned to
this value
BorderSize

thresholds
BorderStyle

Image
Reference to the image that must be

contained within the Field
Hide
thresholds
Lock

not
ImageAutoSize
Indicates whether the image should

automatically sized to fit the dimensions of the Field
ImageHAlign
Indicates the type of horizontal alignment of the image within the Field,
which can be Central, Leftward or
Rightward
ImageKeepAspect
Ratio

maintain the proportions of the source
image
Chapter 6
325
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
ImageTransColor
Indicates the color, selectable using

the RGB code or the color palette, for
which the transparency filter should be
applied
ImageTransparent
Indicates whether a transparency filter

should be applied to the image
ImageVAlign
Indicates the type of vertical alignment

of the image within the Field, which
can be Central, Top or Bottom
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Value fields
Value fields are objects (graphic) that can be inserted into a

page in order to show the operator the value of an item of data
(variable) or a representation of it. Some of these fields can
also have their value edited by the operator. In this section we
will analyze each Value field indicating its functional characteristics, its particular properties (that can be configured by
the Properties Editor) and its Events (Events Editor).
Invert Function
Option
A general property of all graphic objects (buttons, value fields,

numerical fields etc.) that can be inserted in a project page is
called the "Invert Function" option.
The "Invert Function" option can be associated to variables
that have a Boolean behaviour (true/false) and can be used
only if activated as shown hereafter.
Select the "Tools" menu and then the "Options" sub-menu :
326
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
clicking on "Various" the following image will appear :
Selecting the "Show the invert function" box, the option will
be activated.
Invert Function
option
operation
Select the "Invert" option in "Editor Properties", using it as an

example with a numerical field associated to a "Tag" :
Chapter 6
327
Properties Editor
The behaviour associated to the "Tag" is inverted. For example, if a "Tag" enables the display of the background colour of
the numerical field when its value is "1", selecting the "Invert"
option, the numerical field background will be visible even
when the value of the "Tag" is "0" and not "1".
Thresholds Management Function
A new functionality is present inside POLYMATH (starting from
version 1.7).
The new POLYMATH function, called Thresholds is present inside the Editor Properties and as been created as an additional
option in order to manage the colour change, the flashing, hide, disable and other properties of the various objects.
Thresholds
option
functioning
To explain functioning of the Thresholds option, the AreaColourPressed property of a Touch-sensitive Button will be taken
as an example :
On the first click, access the immediate colour selection :
328
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
With the second click, access the direct assignment to Tag :
With the third click, access the new "Soglie" (Thresholds)

item:
Chapter 6
329
Properties Editor
The following editing mask will appear by clicking on the

icon :
From the previous mask, select the type of thresholds management to be performed, whether with "Valore" (Values) or
"Bits". Moreover, the "ColoreAreaPremuta" (AreaColourPressed) property of the "PulsanteSfioramento" (Touch-sensitive
Button) must be associated to a "Tag". In our example we have selected the "Valore" type of management. In this case the
user can add all of the values he wants without any limits :
330
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
The first threshold is assigned with the value "10", associating

it to green :
A second threshold is now added by clicking on the "Aggiungi"

(Add) button :
Chapter 6
331
Properties Editor
The second threshold is assigned with the value "20", associating it to blue :
Clicking on the
button to end editing.
If the user should select the "Bits" type management, the same amount of values must be introduced as there are Bits defined to which the desired settings are to be associated.
Practically, the user can assign a different colour to every Bit,
for example when the second Bit is at 1, the object will be yel-
332
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
low. When the third Bit is at 1, the object will be blue, when
the fourth Bit is at 1, the object will be red and so on.
If there are more Bits at 1, the lowest one will be considered.
The Bits that the user addresses may not be adjoining.

The most insignificant Bit must be Bit "1" while the most significant Bit will depend on the length of the type of Tag associated, e.g. if the Tag is at 16 Bit, the user can insert the
Bits from 1 to 16.
Objects to
which the
Thresholds
functionality
can be applied
The new Thresholds Management functionality is supported by

the following objects, with properties described below :
Rectangle
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Hidden
Ellipse
Area Colour
Area Visibility
Line Colour
Hidden
Chapter 6
333
Properties Editor
3D Ellipse
Arc
Line Colour
Hidden
Circular Sector
Area Colour
Area Visibility
Line Colour
Hidden
Line
3D effect
Line Colour
Line Size
Hidden
Polygon
Area Colour
Area Visibility
Line Colour
Line Size
Hidden
Polyline
Line Colour
Line Size
Hidden
Regular Polygon
Area Colour
Area Visibility
Line Colour
Line Size
334
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Hidden
Label
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Text Flashing
Text Colour
Text Horizontal Alignment
Text Vertical Alignment
Hidden
Image
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Hidden
Numerical Field
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Text Flashing
Text Colour
Rejected Characters
Chapter 6
335
Properties Editor
Disabled
Hidden
Mile Separator
Dynamic Text
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Text Flashing
Text Colour
Disabled
Hidden
Ascii Field
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Text Flashing
Text Colour
Disabled
Hidden
Symbol Field
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
336
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Disabled
Hidden
Date Time Field
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Text Flashing
Text Colour
Disabled
Hidden
Bar Field
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Bar Background Colour
Disabled
Hidden
Indicator
Area Visibility
Border Style
Hidden
Touch-sensitive Button
Area Colour Pressed
Area Colour Released
Area Visibility
Border Flashing
Chapter 6
337
Properties Editor
Border Colour Pressed

Border Colour Released
Border Thickness
3D Button
Text Flashing
Text Colour
Image Horizontal Alignment
Image Vertical Alignment
Disabled
Hidden
Tactile Area
Disabled
Slide Potentiometer
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Disabled
Hidden
Slide Selector
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Disabled
Knob potentiometer
Area Visibility
338
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Border Style
Disabled
Hidden
Knob Selector
Area Visibility
Border Style
Disabled
Hidden
Monostable Button
Area Colour Pressed
Area Visibility Pressed
Area Colour Released
Area Visibility Released
Disabled
Hidden
Bistable Button
Area Colour Key Off
State Area Off Present
Area Colour State On
State Area On Present
Disabled
Hidden
Frame
Background Frame Colour
Transparent Background Frame Colour
Page Edge Colour
Page Border Thickness
Page Border Style
Trend Buffer View
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Chapter 6
339
Properties Editor
Border Thickness
Border Style
Hidden
Trend Buffer Graphics
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Trend Buffer X-Y View
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Hidden
Trend X-Y Graphics
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Data Log View
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
340
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Hidden
Active Alarms View
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Historic Alarms View
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Hidden
User List
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Hidden
Recipes List
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Chapter 6
341
Properties Editor
Hidden
Recipe Editing
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Hidden
Recipe Type Name Text
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Text Flashing
Text Colour
Disabled
Hidden
Recipe Comment
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Text Flashing
Text Colour
Disabled
Hidden
342
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Chronothermostat View
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Flashing
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Style
Hidden
Chronothermostat Grid
Area Colour
Area Visibility
3D Border
Border Colour
Border Thickness
Border Flashing
Vertical Scale Label Colour
Keyboard Display
Area Colour
Border Colour
Text Colour
Numerical Field
A Numerical Field can be introduced into a page by clicking on
the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Value
Fields->Numerical field). After clicking on the icon, use the
mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH
should draw the Field.
The purpose of the Numerical Field is to show the operator the
updated value of a particular variable. These fields can be also
be edited to become Edit value fields.
The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to
learn about the details of the properties and events that can
be assigned to a Numerical Field. In POLYMATH, the value of
the Numerical Field is represented by a series of hash characters which in Runtime are substituted by the effective value.
Chapter 6
343
Properties Editor
Note: an alternative method of creating a Numerical Field is to drag

a numerical variable from the Project Explorer directly onto the
destination page in the work area.
Properties of the Numerical Field

Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Numerical

field. Must be unique among the
graphic elements
Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Numeric

Field, which can be selected using the
AreaVisibility
Determines whether the numerical

field must have the background area
or if it must be transparent. A Boolean
variable can be associated to this value
Border3D

344
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Properties
Description
BorderBlink

BorderColor
BorderVisibility
Determines whether the Border of the

Numeric Field is present or not; a Boolean variable can be assigned to this
value
BorderSize

thresholds
BorderStyle

Digits
Defines the maximum number of characters visible in the field representing

the value
FontField

you can edit
Languages page 166)
KeyboardId
Enabling this option allows you to select the keyboard to use for editing
Representation
Indicates the value representation format, which will be either Decimal with
or without a Sign, Hexadecimal, Binary, Floating or Fixed Point
TagId
Reference variable for the value to be

displayed. This is a numerical variable.
Using the appropriate keys you can
create a new variable or edit an existing one
Chapter 6
345
Properties Editor
Properties
Description
TextBlink

TextColor
Determines the color of the Field text

TextHAlign
Determines the type of horizontal

alignment of the text; this can be Center, Left or Right
TextVAlign

alignment of the text; this can be Center, Top or Bottom
TruncationDigits
Indicates the number of digits to be

truncated when finally representing
the field; the digits are truncated starting from the right (e.g. 1456 when
truncation = 2 is 14). The value can be
associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds
Disable
Indicates whether the field should be

disabled
Hide
Determines whether the object is initially visible. You can also assign a
Boolean variable (for Runtime changes) or it can be managed with thresholds
LeadingZeroes
Indicates if zeroes should be set before

the significant digits; e.g. if True
000541 will be displayed, otherwise it
will simply be 541
Lock

not
PasswordLevel
Determines the authorization level required to be able to edit the field (see
chap. 5, Password configuration
page 213). This property is ignored if
the field is Read Only
346
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Properties
Description
TabIndex

General page 139)
Thousep
Indicates whether to show thousand

separators or not. The value can be
PasswordChar
Allows you to use a general numerical

field and view, during insertion of its
data, the character attributed to the
"Password Character" property. For
example, if you attribute the "*" character to the "Password Character"
property, a line of asterisks "*****"
will appear when inserting the data
(e.g. "12345").
Picture
Indicates the layout of the representation of the numerical value; for example, if the value is 35403 and if the
picture is ##!#:## the field displayed
will be 35!4:03
DecimalDigits
Indicates the number of decimal digits

to display if the representation format
is Fixed Point
NegativeLeftText
Indicates the string that will appear to

the left when the value is negative
PositiveLeftText

the left when the value is positive
NegativeRightText

the right when the value is negative
PositiveRightText

the right when the value is positive
TypeOfMovement

Chapter 6
347
Properties Editor
Properties
Description
TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Numerical Field events

Table 25: Numerical Field events
Event
Description
OnAbortInput
Activated when data input operation is

ended
OnBeginInput
Activated when data input using the

keyboard starts
OnValueChange
Activated when the value of the Field is

changed using the keyboard
Dynamic Text
A Dynamic text can be introduced into a page by clicking on
the icon
Fields->Dynamic text). After clicking on the icon, use the
The purpose of a Dynamic text is to show the operator a given
string as the function of the value of a variable. Which string
contained in a Text List is displayed depends on the value of
the variable, (see chap. 5, Text list page 230). For example
the words On or Off can be shown as a function of a Boolean variable.
be assigned to a Dynamic text. In POLYMATH, the value of a
Dynamic text is represented by the first value of the text list
which in Runtime is substituted by the correct value.
348
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Properties of the Dynamic Text

Table 26: Properties of the Dynamic Text
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Dynamic text.

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Dynamic

text, which can be selected using the
can be assigned to a whole variable .
The value can be associated with Tag
AreaVisibility

background area or should be transparent; a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value . The value can be
Border3D

BorderBlink

Chapter 6
349
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the Dynamic text or not; a
this value
BorderSize

thresholds
BorderStyle

FontField

you can edit
Password configuration page 213)
TagId

TextBlink
Indicates the blinking mode of the text

displayed; can be No Blinking, Slow
Blinking or Rapid Blinking
TextColor

TextHAlign

alignment of the text; this can be Center, Left or Right. The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed
with thresholds
350
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TextVAlign

alignment of the text; this can be Center, Top or Bottom. The value can be
Value
Active if the type of control is valueorientated; the values on which to apply the list strings must be indicated.
By clicking on
you can access the
mask associating values and elements
of the text list
ControlType
Indicates the type of control to exercise over the control variable; this can
be value-oriented, single-bit orientated or bit-group-oriented.
Disable

disabled. The value can be associated
with Tag or it can be managed with
thresholds
FirstBit
Active if the type of control is single-bit

orientated or bit-group-oriented. It indicates the bit reference to apply the
control to (or the group initial reference if the control relates to a group)
Hide
LastBit

orientated. Indicates the last bit of the
group to apply the control to
Lock

not
PasswordLevel
Chapter 6
351
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TabIndex

General page 139)
TextListId
Defines the text list from which the

string to be displayed will be selected
in Runtime. Using the appropriate keys
you can create a new list or edit an existing one (see chap. 5, Text list
page 230)
TextMaxLen
Indicates the maximum length of the

text

the Label text must be disabled
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Dynamic Text Events

Table 27: Dynamic Text Events
Event
Description
OnAbortInput

ended
352
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Table 27: Dynamic Text Events

Event
Description
OnBeginInput

keyboard starts
OnValueChange

ASCII Field
An ASCII field can be introduced into a page by clicking on the
icon
Fields->ASCII field). After clicking on the icon, use the mouse
to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw
the Field.
ASCII fields tell the operator the updated value of a particular
String variable. These fields can also be edited thereby becoming value changing fields.
be assigned to an ASCII Field. In POLYMATH, the value of an
ASCII field is represented by a series of dollar symbols ($)
that can be substituted by the effective value in Runtime.
Note: An alternative method of creating an ASCII Field is to drag a

string variable from the Project Explorer directly onto the destination page in the work area.
Properties of the ASCII Field

Table 28: Properties of the ASCII Field
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the ASCII field.

Comment
Chapter 6
353
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the ASCII

AreaVisibility

Border3D

BorderBlink

BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the ASCII field or not; a
this value
BorderSize

thresholds
354
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
BorderStyle

FontField

you can edit
Languages page 166)
KeyboardId
TagId

TextBlink

TextColor

TextHAlign

with thresholds
TextVAlign

Disable

thresholds
Chapter 6
355
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Hide
Lock

not
PasswordLevel
TabIndex

General page 139)
AsciiLen
Determines the maximum length of

the string represented in the Field
PasswordChar
Allows you to use a general numerical

field and view, during insertion of its
data, the character attributed to the
"Password Character" property. For
example, if you attribute the "*" character to the "Password Character"
property, a line of asterisks "*****"
will appear when inserting the data
(e.g. "12345").
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
356
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
FinalX
FinalY
ASCII Field events

Table 29: ASCII Field events
Events
Properties
OnAbortInput

ended
OnBeginInput

keyboard starts
OnValueChange

Symbol Field
A Symbol field can be introduced into a page by clicking on the
icon
fields->Symbol field). After clicking on the icon, use the
The Symbol field serves to indicate to the operator a given image according to the value of a related variable; depending on
the value of the variable, an image contained in a list of images is displayed (see chap. 5, Image list page 232). For example, the image of a led that may be ON or OFF can be
shown, according to the Boolean variable.
be assigned to a Symbol field. In POLYMATH, the Symbol field
value is represented by the first image in the image list will be
replaced by the correct image in Runtime.
Chapter 6
357
Properties Editor
Properties of the Symbol Field

Table 30: Properties of the Symbol Field
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Symbol field.

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Symbol

Field, which can be selected using the
AreaVisibility

Border3D

358
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
BorderBlink

BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the Symbol Field or not; a
this value
BorderSize

thresholds
BorderStyle

TagId

Value
Active if the type of control is valueoriented; it is necessary to indicate the

values on which to apply the strings in
the list. By clicking on
you access
the mask for associating values with
elements in the list of images
ControlType
Indicates the type of control to exercise over the control variable; this can
be value-oriented, single-bit orientated or bit-group-oriented.
Chapter 6
359
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Disable

thresholds
FirstBit

orientated or bit-group-oriented. It indicates the bit reference to apply the
Hide
LastBit
Active if the control is bit-group oriented. Indicates the last bit of the group
to which the control is applied
Lock

not
PasswordLevel
TabIndex

General page 139)
ImageAutoSize

ImageHAlign
Indicates the type of horizontal alignment of the image within the Field,
which can be Center, Left or Right
ImageKeepAspect
Ratio

image
360
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
ImageListId
Indicates the list of images from which

a Runtime selection of the image to be
displayed is made. Using the appropriate keys a new list can be created or an
existing one edited (see chap. 5, Image list page 232)
ImageTransColor
Indicates the color, selectable using

the RGB code or the color palette, for
which the transparency filter should be
applied
ImageTransparent

ImageVAlign
Indicates the type of vertical alignment

of the image within the Field, which
can be Center, Top or Bottom
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Symbol Field events

Table 31: Symbol Field events
Event
Description
OnAbortInput

ended
OnBeginInput

keyboard starts
OnValueChange
Activated when the value of the field is

Chapter 6
361
Properties Editor
DateTime field
A DateTime field can be introduced into a page by clicking on
the icon
fields->DateTime field). After clicking on the icon, use the
The DateTime field serves to indicate to the operator the current date and/or time while a project is running. A variable can
be associated to the field, like Long or UnsignedLong (e.g. to
use the data set in the device) or the system variable
SYS_DateAndTime that shows the time of the operating system of the panel (see chap.Appendix A - System Variables
page 737). To express the day or the month in letters rather
than in numbers, the corresponding translations must be given in appropriate text lists (see chap. 5, Text list page 230).
be assigned to a DateTime field. In POLYMATH, the value of
the DateTime field is represented by the DateTime of the operating system of the machine the programmer is using
.
Properties of the DateTime field

Table 32: Properties of the DateTime field
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Date-Time

field. Must be unique among the
graphic elements
Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
362
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Date/Time

AreaVisibility
Determines whether the Field has a

Border3D

BorderBlink

BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the Date/Time field or not; a
this value
BorderSize

thresholds
BorderStyle

Chapter 6
363
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
FontField

you can edit
Languages page 166)
KeyboardId
TagId
Reference variable for the data value

to be displayed. The variable selected
can be Long or Unsigned Long. Using
the appropriate keys you can create a
new variable or edit an existing one
TextBlink

TextColor
Determines the color of the Text field,

TextHAlign

with thresholds
TextVAlign

Disable

thresholds
Hide
364
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Lock

not
PasswordLevel
TabIndex
Makes it possible to control the active

focus using cursor keys within a page.
It also controls the order in which data
is introduced in several fields when the
General page 139)
DatePosition
Indicates the position of the Date within the field: this may be centered, leftward or rightward
DateRepresentation
Indicates the format of the date to be

shown; the order and the layout of the
day, month and year can be selected.
You can choose whether or not to assign a text list to the value of the
month so as to display the string related to the current month (see chap. 5,
Text list page 230)
TimePosition
Indicates the position of the Time within the field: this may be centered, leftward or rightward
TimeRepresentation
Indicates the format of the date to be

shown; you can indicate whether or
not to insert the seconds and whether
to create an AM/PM type of display
TypeOfDayOfWeek
Indicates the display related to the day

of the week; it is possible not to display anything, to show an ordinal number (Sunday being 0, etc.) or to assign
a text list to the number so as to view
(also in multilanguage) the current day
(see chap. 5, Text list page 230)
Chapter 6
365
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
DayOfWeek
Active if the TypeOfDayOfWeek is set

as a text list. This property indicates
the text list assigned to the day of the
week; a text list of 7 values must be
created (see chap. 5, Text list
page 230)
DayOfWeekPosition
Indicates the position of the text related to the Day (if desired) within the
field: this may be centered, leftward or
rightward
Month
Active if the DateRepresentation display is to be the full name of the

month. This property indicates the text
list assigned to the month; a text list of
12 values must be created (see chap.
5, Text list page 230)
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
DateTime field events

Table 33: DateTime field events
Event
Description
OnAbortInput

ended
OnBeginInput

keyboard starts
366
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Table 33: DateTime field events

Event
Description
OnValueChange
Activated when the value of the field is

Bar Field
A Bar field can be introduced into a page by clicking on the
icon
Fields->Bar field). After clicking on the icon, use the mouse to
indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw
the Field.
The Bar field serves to give a graphic indication of the value
of a variable within a Scroll bar guided by a scale of values. If
the field is editable, the operator can change the value simply
by moving the pointer onto desired the Scale value.
be assigned to a Bar field.
Properties of the Bar field

Table 34: Properties of Bar field
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Bar field. Must

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Bar field,

which that can be selected using the
Chapter 6
367
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
AreaVisibility

Border3D

BorderBlink

BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the Bar Field or not; a Boolean variable can be assigned to this
value
BorderSize

thresholds
FontSize
Indicates the size of the character of

the values written above the numerical
division lines
ScaleNotches
Indicates the number of subdivision

marks appearing between two numerical divisions. These are shorter division lines than the numerical ones,
giving greater precision to the representation
368
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
ScaleColorRanges
Indicates the color ranges to be assigned to given value intervals within

the scale. By clicking on
you enter
an editing window in which the value
intervals and their respective colors
can be defined; the window also allows
you only to specify the limits in relation
to the scale to be displayed
ScaleSectors
Indicates the number of notches on the

scale of values. You will also see the figure for the value above the notch
(calculated based on the number of
notches)
TagId
Reference variable corresponding to

the position of the indicator. Using the
appropriate keys you can create a new
variable or editor an existing one
AlignBarColorToScale
Color
Allows to align, or not, the color of the

bar to the color of the scale
BarBackgroundColor
Allows you to assign a color to the bar

background. The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed
with thresholds
Direction
Indicates the direction of the Bar:

whether vertical or horizontal
Disable

thresholds
FillBarColorRanges
Determines the color of the filling of

the bar through code or RGB color palette. The value can be associated with
integer variable.
Hide
Chapter 6
369
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
PasswordLevel
TabIndex

General page 139)
BarOrigin
Indicates from which value the Bar value count should start
ScaleValueColor
Color of the values (figures) related to

the numerical subdivisions of the
scale. This can be selected using the
RGB code or the color palette
ScalePosition
Indicates where the scale of values

should be positioned in relation to the
Bar. If the Bar is vertical, the scale can
be positioned to the left or the right; if
it is horizontal, the scale can be above
or below
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
370
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Bar field events

Table 35: Bar field events
Event
Description
OnValueChange

changed using the touch screen
Indicator
An Indicator can be introduced into a page by clicking on the
icon
fields->Pointer). After clicking on the icon, use the mouse to
define the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the
Indicator.
The Indicator gives a graphic representation of the value of a
variable within a given scale of values. Unlike the Bar, the Indicator cannot be edited and has a different graphic form.
be assigned to an Indicator.
Properties of the Indicator

Table 36: Properties of the Indicator
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Indicator. Must

Comment
Top
Left
Chapter 6
371
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Indicator

area, which can be selected using the
AreaVisibility

Border3D

BorderBlink

BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the Indicator or not; a Boolean variable can be assigned to this
value
BorderSize

wished
BorderStyle

FontSize

division lines
372
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
IndicatorColor

(hand) using the RGB code or the color
palette
ScaleNotches

ScaleColorRanges

you enter
ScaleSectors
Indicates the number of divisions on

the scale of values. The number relating to the value above the division is
also displayed (calculated according to
the number of divisions)
TagId
Reference variable corresponding to

the position of the indicator. Using the
appropriate keys you can create a new
variable or edit an existing one
Hide
Lock

not
StartAngle
Determines the Indicator start position

(given as an angle)
SweepAngle

the aperture of the Indicator
ScaleValueColor

Chapter 6
373
Properties Editor
Simple Controls
Properties
Description
TipColor

(hand) using the RGB code or color
palette. The value can be assigned to a
whole variable
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Simple Controls are objects that can be inserted into a page

to show the operator the value of an item of data (variable)
and/or edit it. In this section we will analyze each Simple Control, identifying their functional characteristics, their properties (configurable using the Properties Editor) and their
associated events (Events Editor).
Touch Button
A Touch Button can be introduced into a page by clicking on
the icon
controls->TouchButton). After clicking on the icon, use the
should draw the button.
Touch Buttons are useful as they allow the operator to assign
a given function or script user with a single click. For further
details regarding scripts and predefined functions, the reader
is advised to consult the relevant section of this manual (see
chap.Appendix B - Predefined functions page 745 and see
be assigned to a button.
374
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Properties of the Touch button

Table 37: Properties of the Touch button
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Touch button.

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColorPressed
Determines the color of the Area of the

button (when depressed), which can
be selected using the RGB code or color palette. The value can be assigned
to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds
AreaColorReleased
Determines the color of the Area of the

button (when released), which can be
selected using the RGB code or color
whole variable or it can be managed
with thresholds
AreaVisibility
Determines whether the Button has a

Chapter 6
375
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
BorderBlink

BorderColorPressed
Determines the color of the Border

(when the button is depressed) using
BorderColorReleased
Determines the color of the Border

(when the button is released) using
BorderVisibility

Border to the button or not; a Boolean
BorderSize

thresholds
Button3D
Determines whether the button is in

3D. The value can be associated with
Tag or it can be managed with thresholds
Bitmap
Indicates the choice of image to apply

to the button: No image, a single image or list of images
Image
Active only if Bitmap set on Image;

with this you can indicate which of the
images in the project to apply to the
button
Caption
Indicates the type of inscription to display on the button: None, Label or Text
list
376
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Text
Active only if Caption is set for Label;

makes it possible to indicate the text to
be applied to the button. Inside a multilanguage project, click on
to edit
texts in any language (see chap. 5,
Languages page 166)
FontField

you can edit
Languages page 166)
TextBlink

TextColor
Determines the color of the text of the

button, which can be selected using
TextHAlign

centering of the text within the Label.
thresholds
TextVAlign
Allows you to specify the vertical centering of the text within the Label. The
Disable

thresholds
Hide
Lock

not
Chapter 6
377
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
PasswordLevel
Determines the authorization level required to access the button functions

(see chap. 5, Password configuration
page 213)
TabIndex

movement when using cursor keys
within a page. It also controls the order in which data is introduced in several fields when the automatic setting
of the next field of the page is enabled
(see chap. 5, General page 139)
TextMaxLen
Determines the maximum value in relation to the length of the text string
TextMultiLine
Determines whether the Label text can

start a new line

the Button text must be disabled
TextListValue
Active if TextListType is value-oriented; it is necessary to indicate the values on which to apply the list strings.
By clicking on
you can access the
mask for associating values and text
list elements
TextListType
Indicates which type of check to perform on the control variable: can be

value-oriented, single-bit or bit-grouporiented
TextListId
Active only if Caption is a Text List

type. Determines the reference text
list (see chap. 5, Text list page 230)
TextTagId
Active only if Caption is a Text List

type. Determines the variable to
choose from the text list (see chap. 5,
Text list page 230)
TextListFirstBit
Active if TextListType is single-bit or

bit-group-oriented. Indicates the reference bit to be checked (or the group
initial reference if the control relates to
a group)
378
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TextListLastBit
Active if TextListType is bit-group-oriented, indicates the last bit of the

group to which the control is applied.
ImageAutoSize

ImageKeepAspect
Ratio

image
ImageListValue
Active if ImageListType is value-oriented. Indicate the values corresponding to the Strings in the list. By clicking
on
you access the mask for associating values and text list elements
ImageListType
Indicates which type of check to perform on the variable: value-oriented,

single-bit or bit-group-oriented
ImageListId
Active only if the Bitmap is an Image

List. Determines the reference text list
(see chap. 5, Image list page 232)
ImageTagId
Active only if the Bitmap is an Image

List. Determines which text list variable to choose (see chap. 5, Image
list page 232)
ImageTransparent

ImageHAlign

centering of the image within the button. The value can be assigned to a
with thresholds
ImageVAlign
Allows you to specify the vertical centering of the image within the button.
thresholds
Chapter 6
379
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
ImageListFirstBit
Active if the ImageListType is singlebit orientated or bit-group-oriented. It

indicates the bit reference to apply the
ImageListLastBit
Active if ImageListType is bit-grouporiented. Indicates the last bit of the

group to which the check is applied
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Touch button events

Table 38: Touch button events
Event
Description
OnPressed
Activated whenever the button is

pressed
OnReleased
Activated whenever the button is released after being pressed
Touch Area
A touch-sensitive area can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create>Simple controls->Touch area). After clicking on the icon, use
should draw the item.
The Touch Area is useful when you want to assign an entire
screen area to a given function or user script (for example a
380
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
part of an image to create a map). The area in question can

contain other graphic objects or elements.
Note: If a Touch area is superimposed on other objects, only the

function relating to the Touch area is performed in Runtime. In general, the operation relating to the object positioned on the surface is
performed while those relating to the objects underneath are ignored.
For further details regarding the script and predefined functions, the reader is advised to consult the relevant section of
this manual (see chap.Appendix B - Predefined functions
page 745 and see chap. 9, Scripts page 553).
be assigned to a Touch area.
Properties of the Touch Area

Table 39: Properties of the Touch Area
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Touch area.

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
Chapter 6
381
Properties Editor
Table 39: Properties of the Touch Area

Properties
Description
Disable

thresholds
Lock

not
PasswordLevel
Determines the authorization level required to access the Area functions

page 213)
TabIndex

General page 139)
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Touch Area events

Table 40: Touch Area events
Event
Description
OnPressed

pressed
382
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Table 40: Touch Area events

Event
Description
OnReleased
Touch Keyboard Button

A "Touch Keyboard Button" can be inserted inside the keyboard.
Double-click one of the keyboard types on Polymath default in
the "Keyboards" sub-menu of the "Explore Project" :
Chapter 6
383
Properties Editor
The following image will appear :
Click on the icon

or the "Main Menu" (Fields->Create>Simple controls->Touch Keyboard Button.
The "Touch Keyboard Button" allows to insert a touch key for
the creation and configuration of a new keyboard.
After having clicked the icon, indicate the area in which POLYMATH must designate the button using the mouse inside of a
key.
The main property of the "Touch Keyboard Button" consists in
the possibility of associating the ASCII code of the symbol to
which the button is placed during the creation of the keyboard.
Slide potentiometer
A Slide Potentiometer can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create>Simple controls->SlidePotentiometer). After clicking on the
icon, use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where
POLYMATH should draw the Potentiometer.
A Slide Potentiometer is useful for introducing a direct check
on a variable. There is a continuous representation of the value of the reference variable and the operator can attribute any
value by just clicking on the indicator (slide control).
be assigned to a Potentiometer.
384
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Properties of the SlidePotentiometer

Table 41: Properties of the Slide Potentiometer
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Potentiometer.

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Potentiometer, selectable using the RGB code or
AreaVisibility
Determines whether the Potentiometer

has a background area or should be
transparent; a Boolean variable can be
assigned to this value or it can be managed with thresholds
Border3D

BorderBlink

which can be No Blinking, Slow blinking or Rapid blinking. The value can be
Chapter 6
385
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the Potentiometer or not; a
this value
BorderSize

thresholds
FontSize

division lines
IndicatorColor
Indicates the color of the precision indicator of the Potentiometer; this is selected using the RGB code or the color
palette
ScaleNotches

ScaleColorRanges

you enter
ScaleSectors

386
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TagId
Reference variable whose value is

checked. Using the appropriate keys
you can create a new variable or edit
an existing one
CursorColor
Indicates the color of the whole cursor

of the Potentiometer: this is selected
using the RGB code or the color palette
Direction
Indicates the direction of the scale:

Disable

thresholds
Hide
Lock

not
PasswordLevel
Determines the authorization level required to be able to edit the potentiometer value (see chap. 5, Password
configuration page 213). This property is ignored if the field is Read Only
TabIndex

within a page. It also controls the order in which data is introduced in various fields when the automatic setting
ScaleValueColor

Chapter 6
387
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
ScalePosition

Potentiometer. If the Potentiometer is
vertical, the scale can be positioned to
the left or the right; if it is horizontal,
the scale can be above or below
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Slide Potentiometer events

Table 42: Slide Potentiometer events
Event
Description
OnValueChange
Activated when the value of the Potentiometer is changed using the touch
screen
Slide Selector
A Slide Selector can be introduced into a page by clicking on
the icon
controls->SlideSelector. After clicking on the icon, use the
should draw the Selector.
Slide Selectors are useful is useful for introducing a direct
check on a variable. There is a discrete representation of the
value of the reference variable and the operator can attribute
one of the available values by just clicking on the indicator
(slide control).
388
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

be assigned to a Slide Selector.
Note: It is advisable to use the SlideSelector (rather than a Potentiometer) if the number of choices that can be executed by the operator is restricted, giving a limited range of options.
Properties of the SlideSelector

Table 43: Properties of the SlideSelector
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Selector. Must

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Potentiometer, which can be selected using the
AreaVisibility

Chapter 6
389
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Border3D

BorderBlink

BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the Selector or not; a Boolean variable can be assigned to this
value
BorderSize

thresholds
FontField
Active if the value type is Text List.

you can edit
Languages page 166)
FontSize
Establishes the Font size
IndicatorColor
Indicates the color of the precision Indicator of the Potentiometer. This can
be selected using the RGB code or the
color palette
TagId

an existing one
390
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
CursorColor
Indicates the color of the entire cursor

of the Potentiometer. This can be selected using the RGB code or the color
palette
Direction
Indicates the direction of the scale:

Disable

thresholds
Hide
Boolean variable (for Runtime changes)
Lock

not
NumValues
Defines the values to be inserted into

you enter
PasswordLevel
Determines the authorization level required to edit the potentiometer value

TabIndex

ValueType
Defines the type of display setting for

the scale: the display of values can be
maintained or a text list can be used
corresponding to the values
Chapter 6
391
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TextListId
Active if the value type is Text List. Allows you to choose the text list associated with the values in question (see
chap. 5Text list page 230)
ScaleValueColor
Determines the color Color relating to

the scale of values. This can be selected using the RGB code or the color palette
ScalePosition

Bar. If the Bar is vertical, the scale can
be positioned to the left or the right; if
it is horizontal, the scale can be above
or below
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Slide Selector events

Table 44: Slide Selector events
Event
Description
OnValueChange
Activated when the value of the Selector is changed using the touch screen
392
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Knob Potentiometer
A Knob Potentiometer can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create>Simple controls->KnobPotentiometer). After clicking on the
POLYMATH should draw the potentiometer.
Knob potentiometers are useful for introducing a direct control
on a variable. A continuous representation of the value of the
reference variable is given and the operator can attribute any
value simply by clicking on the knob indicator.
be assigned to a potentiometer.
Properties of the Knob Potentiometer

Table 45: Properties of the Knob Potentiometer
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Potentiometer.

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Potentiometer, selectable using the RGB code or
color palette. The value can be assigned to a whole variable
Chapter 6
393
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
AreaVisibility

Border3D

BorderBlink

BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the Potentiometer or not; a
this value
BorderSize

wished
BorderStyle

FontSize
Establishes the Font size for representing the text of the scale
IndicatorColor
Indicates the color of the precision indicator of the Potentiometer. This is

selected using the RGB code or the color palette
KnobColor
Determines the color of the Potentiometer knob, selectable using the RGB
code or color palette
394
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
ScaleNotches

ScaleColorRanges

you enter
you simply to specify the limits in relation to the scale to be displayed
ScaleSectors

TagId

you can create a new variable or editing an existing one
Disable

thresholds
Hide
Lock

not
PasswordLevel
Determines the authorization level required to edit the potentiometer value

StartAngle
Determines the Knob starting position

(given as an angle)
Chapter 6
395
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
SweepAngle

the aperture of the Knob
TabIndex

movement when using the cursor keys
ScaleValueColor
Determines the color relating to the

scale of values. This can be selected
using the RGB code or the color palette
ScaleEnabled
Determines whether the scale of values is to be present or not
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Knob Potentiometer events

Table 46: Knob Potentiometer events
Event
Description
OnValueChange
Activated when the Potentiometer value is changed using the touch screen
396
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Knob Selector
A Knob Selector can be introduced into a page by clicking on
the icon
controls->KnobSelector). After clicking on the icon, use the
should draw the selector.
Knob selectors are useful for introducing a direct control on a
given variable. A discrete representation of the value of the
reference variable is given and the operator can attribute one
of the values present simply by clicking on the knob.
be assigned to a Slide selector.
Note: It is advisable to use the Knob selector (rather than a potentiometer) if the number of choices the operator can make is to be restricted, giving a limited range of options.
Properties of the Knob Selector

Table 47: Properties of the Knob Selector
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Selector. Must

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
Chapter 6
397
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
AreaColor
Determines the color of the Selector,

AreaVisibility
Determines whether the Selector has a

Border3D

BorderBlink

BorderColor
BorderVisibility
Determines whether the Border of the

Selector should be present or not; a
this value
BorderSize

whole variable can be assigned, if so
desired
BorderStyle

FontField
Active if the value is a Text List value.

Font for the text shown in the field; by
clicking on
you can edit multilanguage Fonts (see chap. 5, Languages
page 166)
FontSize
Establishes the Font size
398
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
IndicatorColor
Defines the color of the indicator hand.

This is selected using the RGB code or
the color palette
KnobColor
Determines the color of the Selector

knob, which can be selected using the
RGB code or color palette.
TagId

an existing one
Disable

thresholds
Hide
Lock

not
NumValues
Indicates the values to insert into the

scale. By clicking on
you enter an
editing window in which the value intervals and their respective colors can
be defined; the window also allows you
only to specify the limits in relation to
the scale to be displayed
PasswordLevel
Determines the authorization level required to be able to edit the selector

value (see chap. 5, Password configuration page 213). This property is ignored if the field is Read Only
StartAngle
Determines the Knob starting position

(given as an angle)
SweepAngle

the aperture of the Knob
Chapter 6
399
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TabIndex

ValueType
Indicates the display type for setting

the scale: the display of values can be
maintained or a text list corresponding
to the values can be used
TextListId
Active if the value is a Text List value.

Allows you to choose the text list associated with the values in question
(see chap. 5Text list page 230)
ScaleValueColor
Determines the color of the scale of

values. This can be selected using the
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Knob Selector events

Table 48: Knob Selector events
Event
Description
OnValueChange
Activated when the Selector value is

changed using the touch screen
400
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Complex
Controls
Complex Controls are objects that can be inserted into a page

in order to show the operator the value of one or more data
items (or groups of data, like recipes, alarms, trends etc.)
and, if required, edit them. In this section we will analyze each
Complex Control, setting out its functional characteristics,
their respective properties (to be configured by the Properties
Editor) and associated events (Events Editor).
Monostable Button
A Monostable Button can be introduced into a page by clicking
on the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create>Complex controls->Monostable button). After clicking on the
POLYMATH should draw the button. The Monostable Button
serves basically to trigger OnPressed and OnReleased events
to which the desired functions (or scripts) can be assigned.
For further details regarding predefined functions and user
scripts that can be assigned to the button, the reader is advised to consult the appropriate section in this manual (see
chap.Appendix B - Predefined functions page 745 and see
learn about the details of the meaning of the properties that
can be assigned to a Monostable Button and how to edit them.
Note: No variable has to be assigned to a monostable button. When

you want the pressing of the monostable button to have an effect on
a variable, just assign the appropriate functions to the buttons
events.
Chapter 6
401
Properties Editor
Properties of the Monostable button

Table 49: Properties of the Monostable button
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Monostable

button. Must be unique among the
graphic elements
Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColorPressed
Determines the color of the area of the

button (when pressed), selectable using the RGB code or color palette. The
PressedAreaVisibility

background or if it must be transparent
when pressed; a Boolean variable can
AreaColorReleased

button (when released), which can be
with thresholds
ReleasedArea
Visibility
Determines whether the button has a

background or if it must be transparent
when released; a Boolean variable can
Disable

thresholds
402
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Table 49: Properties of the Monostable button

Properties
Description
Hide
Lock

not
PasswordLevel
Determines the authorization level required to access the button utilities

page 213)
TabIndex

TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Monostable button events

Table 50: Monostable button events
Event
Description
OnPressed

pressed
Chapter 6
403
Properties Editor
Table 50: Monostable button events

Event
Description
OnReleased
Monostable button events

Once a monostable button is added to a page its form can be
edited but in OnPressed state and in OnReleased state. To edit
the button just double-click on it within the page; editing the
monostable button comprises three windows: Pressed, Released and General.
In the Pressed and Released masks the graphic appearance of
the button in its two states can be defined. Editing these windows works like normal editing for project pages (see chap. 6,
Managing a page page 295).
Note: A monostable button differs from a touch button in its graphic

form which is completely editable. As described in this chapter, images or geometric forms can be applied to them. The library supplied with POLYMATH contains a set of buttons ready for use in a
project (see chap. 7, POLYMATH Libraries page 479).
The General window can be used to set identifying properties

related to the button; the Name is a unique string within a set
of graphic objects, while the comment is a recognition text to
be used only within POLYMATH. You can also choose to overwrite the global grid dimensions to make positioning on the
surface of the button more (or less) precise.
Bistable button
A Bistable button can be introduced into a page by clicking on
the icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Complex controls->Bistable button). After clicking on the icon, use
should draw the button.
A bistable button is useful when you need to change and
memorize the value of a variable by pressing it. Unlike a
monostable button, the bistable button must have two values
of a variable assigned to it (one for the ON-state and one for
the OFF-state) and pressing it changes the value variable.
404
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
The library supplied with POLYMATH contains a set of buttons

ready for use within the project (see chap. 7, POLYMATH Libraries page 479).
be assigned to a bistable button and how to edit it.
Properties of a Bistable button
Table 51: Properties of a Bistable button
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Bistable button. Must be unique among the graphic
elements
Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
OffStateAreaColor

Button (in OFF state), which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette. The value can be assigned to a
with thresholds
OffStateAreaVisibility

background or should be transparent
when it is OFF; a Boolean variable can
OnStateAreaColor

button (in ON state), which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette. The value can be assigned to a
with thresholds
OnStateAreaVisibility

background or should be transparent
when it is ON; a Boolean variable can
Chapter 6
405
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TagId

an existing one
ValueStateOff
Indicates the value that the reference

variable must assume for the button to
be OFF; if the button goes to OFF by
being pressed, the value of the variable is updated to that value
ValueStateOn
Indicates the value that the reference

variable must assume for the button to
be ON; if the button goes to ON by being pressed, the value of the variable is
updated to that value
Disable
Indicates whether the button should

be disabled. The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with
thresholds
Hide
Lock

not
PasswordLevel
Determines the authorization level required to access the button utilities

page 213)
TabIndex

TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
406
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Bistable button events

Table 52: Bistable button events
Event
Properties
OnSwitchButtonOff
Activated when the Button is pressed

in position OFF
OnSwitchButtonOn
Activated when the Button is pressed

in position ON
Editing the Bistable button

Once a Bistable button has been added to a page, its form can
be edited both for the ON state and the OFF state. To edit the
button just double-click on it within the page; editing a
Bistable button comprises three windows: OFF, ON and General.
The OFF and ON masks can be used to define the graphic appearance of the button in its two states. Editing these windows
works like normal editing for project pages (see chap. 6,
Managing a page page 295).
The General window is used to set identifying properties relating to the Button: the Name is a unique string within the set
of graphic objects while the comment is a recognition text to
be used only within POLYMATH. You can also choose to overwrite the global grid dimensions to make positioning within
the surface of the button more (or less) precise.
Frame Field
A Frame field can be introduced into a page by clicking on the
icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Complex
controls->Frame). After clicking on the icon, use the mouse to
indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should add the
Frame.
Chapter 6
407
Properties Editor
A Frame Field is simply an area for containing an actual

Frame. We have already described in the preceding chapter
how to create a Frame (see chap. 5, Frames page 178).
be assigned to a Frame Field.
Note: A Frame can also be added to a page simply by dragging the

frame in question from Project Explorer to the desired page position
in the Work area. With this procedure POLYMATH automatically
creates a field to contain the dragged frame.
Properties of a Frame Field

Table 53: Properties of a Frame Field
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Frame Field.

Comment
Top
Left
FrameId
Indicates the Frame to be contained by

the Frame Field being edited
Lock

not
TabIndex

movement using cursor keys within
the page. It also controls the order in
which data is introduced in several
fields when the automatic setting of
the next field of the page is enabled
Trend View
A Trend View can be introduced into a page by clicking on the
icon
or using the Main Menu (Fields->Create->Complex
controls->TrendView). After clicking on the icon, use the
should draw the TrendView.
408
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
A Trend View is the field inside which you can see the contents
of the Trend Buffer, whose working was described in the preceding section (see chap. 5, page 220).
be assigned to a TrendView and how it is edit.
Properties of a TrendView
Table 54: Properties of a TrendView
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the TrendView.

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor
Determines the color of the display,

Chapter 6
409
Properties Editor
Table 54: Properties of a TrendView

Properties
Description
AreaVisibility
Determines whether the sector has a

Border3D

BorderBlink

BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the display or not; a Boolean
BorderSize

thresholds
BorderStyle

Hide
Lock

not
410
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Editing a TrendView
After inserting a TrendView into a page, just double-click on it
to edit. The default object is a Trend Graph (see chap. 6,
Properties of a Trend Graph page 412) that can be accompanied, if the programmer wishes, by a series of control buttons for displaying the Trend. Editing is organized through two
masks, Fields and General.
The Fields mask allows you to indicate which buttons have to

be present together with the table and position them in the area. Each button has properties which can be edited in the
Properties Editor as happens with normal touch buttons (see
chap. 6, Touch Button page 373). To add or eliminate a button just click on the list of buttons present to the left of the
table. If an object is already present in the page it will appear
highlighted within the list (it will be visible in the Table Edit Area). To move an element (button or table) just drag it to the
desired position. Insertable buttons are different and a noneditable predefined function can be assigned to each of these:
Move Left: The button has two functions depending on
whether the cursor is displayed or not: if the cursor is
invisible, pressing the key makes the graph move from
right to left. If, however, the cursor is visible, the button
moves it to the left and when it reaches the furthest
point, the graph moves from right to left by a unit defined by the principal horizontal division of the grid.
Move Right: The button has two functions depending on
whether the cursor is displayed or not: if the cursor is
invisible, pressing the key makes the graph move from
left to right. If, however, the cursor is visible the button
moves it to the right and when it reaches the furthest
point, the graph moves from left to right by a unit defined by the principle horizontal division of the grid.
Move Up: the button makes the graph move upwards by
a unit defined by the major vertical division of the grid.
Chapter 6
411
Properties Editor
Move Down: the button makes the graph move downwards by a unit defined by the major vertical division of
the grid.
Principal: the button makes the graph move from right
to left until the oldest sample readings are positioned on
the left side of the graph.
End: the button makes the graph move from right to left
until the most recent sample readings are positioned on
the right side of the graph.
GoTo: the button makes a dialog window appear to ask
the user at what date and time the right side of the
graph should be put.
IncreaseVerticalEnlargement: increases the vertical
scale factor
ReduceVerticalEnlargement: decreases the vertical
scale factor
IncreaseHorizontalEnlargement: increases the horizontal scale factor
ReduceHorizontalEnlargement: decreases the horizontal scale factor
"Zoom": Increases the total graphic display
"Reduction": Decreases the total graphic display
Reset Enlargement: restores the original scale factors
(no zoom)
"User Button": Button to which the user can assign a
function/script.
"HorizontalCursorPosition": it represents the sample acquisition time (when it identifies at least one sample on
the graphics)
"Selected Pendrive Value": field that indicates the pendrive currently selected
ShowScalePen: Determines the scale pen to be shown
via a pull-down menu
There are also two bistable buttons, a Date-Time Field and a
Numerical Field that can be edited as already described in this
chapter (see chap. 6, Bistable button page 403, see chap. 6,
DateTime field page 361 and see chap. 6, Numerical Field
page 342) each having its own function:
CursorEnabled: allows the graphic cursor to be displayed or not
Pause: shows whether or not the update of the graph is
enabled (does not disable the acquisition of samples).
HorizontalCursorPosition: represents the time of the acquisition of the sample (when it identifies at least one
sample on the graph)
Pen Selected: field indicating that the Pen is currently
selected.
412
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
As already described in this chapter, another customized label

can be added to the complex field (see chap. 6, Complex label page 319) or a dynamic field showing the value of the
Trend on the pen (see chap. 6, Trend Pen page 319).
The General mask can be used to insert a name and an identifying comment for the TrendView being edited. In addition,
you can overwrite the default dimensions of the editing grid of
the page (see chap. 5, Main window page 129) introducing
new measures in pixels valid only for editing the current field.
Properties of a Trend Graph
Table 55: Properties of a Trend Graph
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Trend Graph.

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Dimension of the width
Height
Dimension of the height
AreaColor

Chapter 6
413
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Border3D

BorderBlink

BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the Table or not; a Boolean
BorderSize

whole variable can be assigned or it
BorderStyle

Lock

not
Pens
Indicates the pens to use in representing the trend. By clicking on the

key you can edit the types of pen (as
shown in the next subsection)
RefreshTime
Indicates the refresh period of the

trend expressed in milliseconds
ScrollType
Indicates how the scroll movement of

the table should operate: may be continuous, half screen or full screen
TabIndex
Determines the index that the object

will occupy in the table order
414
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
TimeSpan
Length of time periods expressed in

thousandths of a second. If the value
10000 is entered, for example, at any
point the trend table will display the
values gathered in 10 seconds
UpdateMode
Indicates the way the Trend display is

updated: automatically, with a change
of value or on command
ChartAreaColor
Indicates the color of the chart area,

code or color palette
ChartAreaTop
Vertical coordinate position of the

chart
ChartAreaLeft
Horizontal coordinate position of the

chart
ChartAreaWidth
Size of the width of the chart
ChartAreaHeight
Height dimension of the chart
ChartBorderColor
Determines the border color of the

chart which can be selected using the
RGB code or color palette
ChartBorderSize
Determines the border size of the chart
GridHorDivisionColor
Indicates the color of the divisions of

the horizontal grid, can be done using
the RGB code or the color palette
GridHorDivision
Number
Indicates the number of horizontal divisions in the grid
GridHorDivisionStyle
Indicates the style of the divisions of

the horizontal grid: may be Solid or
Broken line
GridHorMinDivision
Color
Determines the color of the horizontal

grid subdivisions, which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette.
GridHorMinDivision
Number
Indicates the number of horizontal

subdivisions in the grid, that is, the
number of horizontal lines between
any two divisions
Chapter 6
415
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
GridHorMinDivision
Style
Indicates the style of the subdivisions

of the horizontal grid: may be Solid or
Broken line
GridHorVisible
Indicates whether there should be a

horizontal grid
GridVerDivisionColor
Determines the color of the vertical

grid divisions, which can be selected
using the RGB code or color palette.
GridVerDivision
Number
Indicates the number of vertical divisions in the grid
GridVerDivisionStyle
Indicates the style of the divisions in

the vertical grid: may be Solid or Broken line
GridVerMinDivision
Color

subdivisions of the grid, which can be
palette.
GridVerMinDivision
Number
Indicates the number of vertical subdivisions in the grid, that is, the number
of horizontal lines between any two divisions
GridVerMinDivision
Style

in the vertical grid: may be Solid or
Broken line
GridVerVisible
Indicates whether there needs to be a

vertical grid
HorScaleLabelColor
Indicates the color for the label texts of

the horizontal scale; these can be selected using the RGB code or color palette
HorScaleLabelFont
Indicates the Font for the label texts of

the horizontal scale
HorScaleLabelSkip
Indicates the frequency with which the

horizontal scale labels should be inserted
HorScaleMinNotches
Len
Indicates the minimum length of the

notches on the horizontal scale of values
416
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
HorScaleMode
Indicates the way the scale should be

displayed. The Date alone, the Time
alone, both or tenths of seconds can be
represented
HorScaleNotchesLen
Indicates the length of the notches on

the horizontal scale of values
HorScaleTimeFormat
Active if the type of scale envisages

the Time and permits its format to be
specified
HorScaleDateFormat

the Date and permits its format to be
specified
HorScaleVisible

horizontal scale
VerScaleLabel
Decimal
Number of decimal digits to show on

the vertical scale
VerScaleLabelFont

the vertical scale
VerScaleLabelSkip

vertical scale labels should be inserted
VerScaleMinNotches
Len
Indicates the minimum length of the

notches on the vertical scale of values
VerScaleNotchesLen
Indicates the length of the notches on

the vertical scale of values
VerScaleVisible

vertical scale
VerScaleVisible
Number
Number of digits to show on the vertical scale
Editing Trend Pens

To be able to edit the Pens for writing Trends, you have to enter the complex field edit function, TrendView, (double-click
on it in the page). After selecting the Trend Graph, use the appropriate Properties Editor to click on the icon
in the Pens
option.
Chapter 6
417
Properties Editor
The Pen edit window that is displayed is composed of three

sections. The left part has a list of pens created by the user
from which it is possible to create and eliminate elements. The
bottom part contains a preview of the pen currently being edited, while the middle part of the window contains the real editing area for the pen selected. This window is organized into
property masks, Intervals and Interval Colors that are dealt
with in the next subsections.
Properties
First of all, it is possible to assign a Name to the Trend Pen and

assign a Trend Buffer, for which the Pen must be used.
A type must be indicated for the scale of values: this may be:
Programmed - it is necessary to indicate the maximum
and minimum values which can also be assigned to variables
418
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Automatic - calculated in Runtime on the basis of the

values contained in the Buffer (but limits can also be inserted)
Tag Limit related - the Buffer has to refer to a limited
variable (see chap. 5, Limits page 143)
Client - maximum and minimum values must be defined
You can also choose the appearance of the penline, which can
be of the following: samples only, analog (continuous, with
oblique connections between the values) or digital (scaled,
with digital steps). Also the dimensions of the line, its color
and style (solid, broken or dotted) can be edited to suit the
users taste.
The pen marker can assume various different geometric forms
(pixel, circle, cross etc.) and you can choose not to show the
icon relating to the pen.
Each variation updates the preview at the bottom of the mask.
Intervals
This mask is used to insert the values relating to the intervals

to which different representation colors can be attributed. The
scale of intervals must present values in increasing order.
Interval colors
Chapter 6
419
Properties Editor
This mask lets you assign a color to each of the value intervals
set out in the Interval mask. A color is applied when its value
read by the Buffer memory is within the corresponding interval.
TrendXY
A "TrendXY" can be inserted inside of the page clicking on the
icon
or from the "Main Menu" (Fields->Create->Controls
Complexes->TrendXY). After having clicked the icon, indicate
the area in which POLYMATH must designate the "TrendXY"
using the mouse inside of the page.
The "TrendXY" is the field inside of which the content of the
TrendBufferXY is displayed, the functioning of which was described in the previous paragraph.
Consult the next sub-paragraphs to know the details of the
properties that can be associated to a VistaTrendXY and its
editing modes.
Properties of the TrendXY

Table 56: Properties of a TrendViewXY
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the TrendView.

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
420
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
AreaColor
Determines the color of the display,

AreaVisibility
Determines whether the Trend View

Border3D

BorderStyle

BorderColor
BorderVisibility

Border to the display or not; a Boolean
BorderSize

thresholds
BorderBlink

Chapter 6
421
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Hide
Lock

not
Edit the TrendXY

After having inserted a "TrendXY" on a page, double-click it to
start its editing. A "TrendXY Graphic" will be present by default which, upon the programmer's choice, can be accompanied by a range of control buttons to view the "TrendXY". The
editing is organised on two masks: "Fields" and "General".
From the "Fields" mask, the buttons which should be present

together with the table can be indicated and positioned inside
of the area. Each button has its relative properties which can
be edited in "Editor Properties" as for normal touch buttons
(see chapter 6). To insert or remove a button, click the list of
buttons at the left of the table. If an object is already present
on the page, it will be highlighted inside of the list (and it will
be visible inside of the drawing area). To move an element
(button or table) drag it to the desired position. There are several buttons that can be inserted and each one has a pre-determined function associated to it (unchangeable) :
"Move to the Left": the button has two functions depending on whether or not the cursor is viewed: if the
cursor is invisible, the key pressure scrolls the graphic
from right to left. If the cursor is
422
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
visible, move the cursor to the left. When it reaches the

left edge, the graphic scrolls from the right
to the left of a unit specified by the greater horizontal
division of the grid.
"Move to the Right": the button has two functions depending on whether or not the cursor is viewed: if the
cursor is invisible, the key pressure scrolls the graphic
from left to right. If the cursor is
visible, move the cursor to the left. When it reaches the
right edge, the graphic scrolls from the left
to the right of a unit specified by the greater horizontal
division of the grid.
"Move up": the button scrolls the graphic from the
bottom to the top of a unit specified by the
greater vertical division of the grid.
"Move down": the button scrolls the graphic from the
top to the bottom of a unit specified by the
greater vertical division of the grid.
"Initial page": the button scrolls the graphic from right
to left until the oldest samples are positioned
on the left of the graphic.
"End": the button scrolls the graphic from left to right
until the newest samples are positioned
on the right of the graphic.
"Go to": the button displays a dialogue box to ask the
user which time and date must be
placed at the right of the graphic.
"Vertical Size Increase": increases the vertical scale
factor
"Vertical Size Decrease": decreases the vertical scale
factor
"Horizontal Size Increase": increases the horizontal scale factor
"Horizontal Size Decrease": decreases the horizontal
scale factor
"Zoom": Increases the total graphic display
"Reduction": Decreases the total graphic display
"Reset zoom": restores the original scale factors (no
zoom).
"User Button": Button to which the user can assign a
function/script.
"Show Pen Scale": determines the Scale pen to be
shown by means of the pull-down menu
Also present: three "Bistable Buttons", a "Time Date field" and
two "Numerical Fields" which can be edited as described in this
chapter (see chap. 6, Bistable button page 403, see chap. 6,
Chapter 6
423
Properties Editor
DateTime field page 361 e see chap. 6, Numerical Field

page 342) Each one of them has a particular function :
"Cursor Enabled": allows the graphic cursor to be displayed or not.

"Break": represents if the graphic update is enabled or
not (it does not disable
sample acquisition).
"Pen Enabled": Displays or hides the selected pen.
"Time Date Field": Displays the sample instant.
"Numerical Field" 1: "X" value.
"Numerical Field" 2: "Y" value.
As already described in this chapter, a further customised label can be inserted on the complex field (see chap. 6, Complex label page 319) or go and insert a dynamic field which
shows the Trend value on the pen (see chap. 6, Trend Pen
page 319).
An identification name and comment for the "Trend" that is

being edited can be inserted on the "General" mask. The page
editing grid default dimensions can be overwritten as well
(see chap. 5, Main window page 129) introducing new measurements in pixel, valid only for the current field editing.
424
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Properties of a Trend Graph XY

Table 57: Properties of a Trend Graph XY
Properties
Description
Top
Left
Width
Height
AreaColor

AreaVisibility
Determines whether the Graph has a

BorderVisibility

Border to the Table or not; a Boolean
BorderSize

whole variable can be assigned, if so
desired or it can be managed with
thresholds
BorderColor
BorderStyle

Border3D

Chapter 6
425
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
BorderBlink

UpdateMode
Indicates the way the Trend display is

updated: automatically, with a change
of value or on command
RefreshTime
Indicates the refresh period of the

trend expressed in milliseconds
HorScaleVisible

horizontal scale
HorScaleMode
Indicates the way the scale should be

displayed. The Date alone, the Time
alone, both or tenths of seconds can be
represented
HorScaleDateFormat

the Date and permits its format to be
specified
HorScaleTimeFormat

the Time and permits its format to be
specified
HorScaleLabelFont

the horizontal scale
HorScaleLabelColor
Indicates the color for the label texts of

the horizontal scale; these can be selected using the RGB code or color palette
HorScaleLabelSkip

horizontal scale labels should be inserted
VerScaleVisible

vertical scale
VerScaleVisible
Number
Number of digits to show on the vertical scale
VerScaleLabel
Decimal
Number of decimal digits to show on

the vertical scale
426
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
ScrollType
Indicates how the scroll movement of

the table should operate: may be continuous, half screen or full screen
TimeSpan
Length of time periods expressed in

thousandths of a second. If the value
10000 is entered, for example, at any
point the trend table will display the
values gathered in 10 seconds
GridHorVisible

horizontal grid
GridHorDivision
Number
Indicates the number of horizontal divisions in the grid
GridHorMinDivision
Number
Indicates the number of horizontal

subdivisions in the grid, that is, the
number of horizontal lines between
any two divisions
GridHorDivisionStyle
Indicates the style of the divisions of

the horizontal grid: may be Solid or
Broken line
GridHorMinDivision
Style

of the horizontal grid: may be Solid or
Broken line
GridHorDivisionColor
Indicates the color of the divisions of

the horizontal grid, can be done using
the RGB code or the color palette
GridHorMinDivision
Color
Determines the color of the horizontal

grid subdivisions, which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette.
GridVerVisible

vertical grid
GridVerDivision
Number
Indicates the number of vertical divisions in the grid
GridVerMinDivision
Number
Indicates the number of vertical subdivisions in the grid, that is, the number
of horizontal lines between any two divisions
Chapter 6
427
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
GridVerDivisionStyle
Indicates the style of the divisions in

the vertical grid: may be Solid or Broken line
GridVerMinDivision
Style

in the vertical grid: may be Solid or
Broken line
GridVerDivisionColor

grid divisions, which can be selected
using the RGB code or color palette.
GridVerMinDivision
Color

subdivisions of the grid, which can be
palette.
Pens
Indicates the pens to use in representing the trend. By clicking on the

key you can edit the types of pen (as
shown in the next subsection)
Editing of the Trend Pens

To access the "TrendXY" writing pens editing, enter the TrendXY" complex field editing (double-click it on the page). After
having selected the "TrendXY Graphic", click on the icon
in
the "Pens" voice in the relative "Editor Properties".
The displayed pens editing window is made up of three sections. On the left, there is a list of pens created by the user
from which to create and eliminate elements. At the bottom
428
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
there is a preview of the pen currently being edited. At the

centre of the window there is the actual editing area for the
selected pen. This window is divided in "Properties", "Intervals" and "Interval Colours" masks. They will be described in
the following sub-paragraphs.
Properties
First of all, a "Name" and a "Trend bufferXY", for which the

"Pen" must be used, can be associated to the Trend Pen.
Indicate a value "Scale type" that can be :
"Programmed": the Max and Min values that can also be

associated to variables must be indicated
"Automatic": calculated by Runtime, based on the values contained in the Buffer (but the limits can also be
inserted)
"By the tag limits": the Buffer must refer to a limited variable (see chap. 5, Limiti page 145)
"Client": the Max and Min values must be indicated
From a graphical point of view, the aspect of the "Pen" can be

established. It can be "Signal only", have an "Analogue" dash
(continuous, with oblique connections between the values) or
"Digital" (scaled, with digital steps). Even the dimensions of
the line, the colour and the style ("Solid", "Dash", "Dot",
"Dash Dot", "Dash Dot Dot") can be edited at will.
The pen marker can assume different geometrical shapes
("Pixel", "Cross", "Plus, "Cross and plus" and "circle") and one
can choose to not show the icon relative to the pen.
Every variation will update the preview at the back of the
mask.
Chapter 6
429
Properties Editor
Intervals
From this mask, insert the values relative to the intervals to

which different representation colours can be attributed. The
interval scale must present values in increasing order.
Interval Colours
In this mask, a colour can be associated to each of the value

intervals described in the Interval mask. The colour is applied
when the value read by Buffer is contained in the relative interval.
Active Alarm View
Active Alarm View is a predefined element in POLYMATH, one
that can be inserted into the project pages. It allows the operator to access the alarm list and perform the principal operations with a simple click. To insert an Active Alarm table into
a page, click on the icon
or, alternatively, use the main
menu: Fields->Create->Complex Controls->ActiveAlarmView. After clicking draw just its outline in the page and the
table appears automatically.
430
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Once the table has been inserted into the page and been selected, a series of properties contained in the Properties Editor
can be attributed to it; the meanings of these properties are
identical to those of TrendView properties (see chap. 6, Properties of a TrendView page 408).
By double-clicking on the table, you access its editing page
which comprises two masks: Fields and General.
The default contents of the Fields mask include the Alarm Grid
table, whose properties will be dealt with in the next subsections (see chap. 6, Properties of the Active Alarm Grid
page 432). Using this mask you can proceed to indicate which
buttons should be present with the table and position them
within the area. To insert or remove a button just click on the
list of buttons to the left of the table; if an object is already
present in the page, it will appear highlighted within the list
(and will be visible in the Table Edit Area). To move an element (button or table) just drag it to the desired position. The
buttons that can be inserted are different and each has a predefined (non editable) function assigned to it:
Page Up: allows the operator to go up the pages of the
table
Page Down: allows the operator to go down the pages
of the table
Chapter 6
431
Properties Editor
Page Left: allows the operator to move left within the

page
Page Right: allows the operator to move right within the
page
Line Up: select the line above the current one
Line Down: select the line below the current one
Cursor Left: move the table cursor leftwards
Cursor Right: move the table cursor rightwards
User button: this button can have a user-chosen function or a script assigned to it (see chap.Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 and see chap. 9,
Scripts page 553)
Show Page: displays the page assigned to the alarm
Acknowledgement: acquires the selected alarm
Global Acknowledgement: allows the operator to perform a global (cumulative) acquisition of all the alarms
present in the table, if this option has been enabled for
the alarm in question (see chap. 5, Properties
page 200)
Group Acknowledgement: allows the operator to perform a global (cumulative) acquisition of all the alarms
in the table that belong to the same group as the one
selected, if this option has been enabled for the alarm
in question (see chap. 5, Properties page 200)
Show History: shows the page containing the Alarm History. Enter the appropriate Events Editor and indicate
the name of the page to go to after pressing this key
In addition, Dynamic fields can be assigned to the system
variables related to the alarms, each of which has properties
that can be edited using the Properties Editor (see chap. 6,
Label page 316). These fields are:
Total of active alarms: shows the total number of active
alarms (not yet acknowledged or not yet terminated)
Total of active alarms not acknowledged: shows the total number of alarms not acknowledged
Total of alarms not returned: shows the total number of
alarms not terminated (still present in the device)
432
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
The General mask can be used to insert a name and an identifying comment for the Alarm table being edited. In addition,
new measures in pixels valid only for editing the current field
The graphic properties (fonts and colors) of the Active Alarm
View grid can be configured by using together the Fields and
the Priorities mask of the Alarms (see chap. 5, Fields
page 171 and see chap. 5, Priorities page 189).
Properties of the Active Alarm Grid
Table 58: Properties of the Active Alarm Grid
Properties
Description
Top
Left
Width
Height
Columns
This field allows the operator to determine which columns to put in the table
and define their respective properties.
To edit the columns click on the icon
. In the window which appears enter
the details relating to their width, to
the font and to the dimension and format of the titles of each column in the
table.
Chapter 6
433
Properties Editor
Table 58: Properties of the Active Alarm Grid

Properties
Description
RowHeight
Determines height in pixels of each

row
Lock
Determines whether the object can

move or not
TabIndex

AutoScrollEnabled
Indicates whether table scrolling

should be enabled automatically.
AutoScrollInterval
Active if autoscroll is enabled. Sets the

number of lines for the autoscroll interval.
Filters
This field allows the operator to insert

filtering parameters for the alarms to
be displayed within the table. To apply
these filters click on the icon
. In
Runtime only the alarm instances respecting the conditions indicated in the
Filters window will be shown. If more
than one filter is set, only the alarm instances respecting the limits (AND
conditions) will be shown in runtime.
HScrollBarVisible
Indicates whether the horizontal scroll

bar should be visible in Runtime.
LetterHeadVisibility
Indicates whether the tables should

have titles.
RibbonVisibility
Allows the operator to decide whether

or not to display the index numbers of
the alarm (in the columns to the left of
the table)
TimeStampOrder
Indicates the chronological order in

which to arrange the alarms in the
grid; may choose to show the most recent ones first, or the oldest ones
VScrollBarVisible
Indicates whether the vertical scroll

434
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Alarm History View

The Alarm History table is a predefined element in POLYMATH,
one that can be inserted into the project pages. It allows the
operator to access the active alarm list and perform the principal operations with a simple click. To insert an Alarm History
View table into a page, click on the icon
or, alternatively,
use the main menu: Fields->Create->Complex Controls>Alarm History. This table contains only those alarms whose
configuration explicitly says that they are to be saved in the
terminals Alarm History (see chap. 5, Properties page 200).
After clicking on the table draw just its outline in the page and
the table will appear automatically.
Once the table has been inserted into the page and been selected, a series of properties can be attributed using the Properties Editor; the meanings of these properties are identical to
those of the properties in TrendView (see chap. 6, Properties
of a TrendView page 408).
By double-clicking on the table itself you access its editing
page which comprises two masks: Fields and General.
Chapter 6
435
Properties Editor

Page Up: allows the operator to go up the pages of the
table
Page Down: allows the operator to go down the pages
of the table
Page Left: allows the operator to move left within the
page
Page Right: allows the operator to move right within the
page
Line Up: select the line above the current one
Line Down: select the line below the current one
Cursor Left: move the table cursor leftwards
Cursor Right: move the table cursor rightwards
User button: this button can have a user-chosen function or a script assigned to it (see chap.Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 and see chap. 9,
Scripts page 553)
Show Page: displays the page assigned to the alarm
The General mask can be used to insert a name and an identifying comment for the Alarm History table being edited. In
addition, you can overwrite the default dimensions of the editing grid of the page (see chap. 5, Main window page 129)
introducing new measures in pixels valid only for editing the
current field.
The graphic properties (fonts and colors) of the Active Alarm
View grid can be configured using together the Fields and Pri-
436
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
orities masks of the Alarm (see chap. 5, Fields page 171 and
see chap. 5, Priorities page 189).
Properties of the Alarm History Grid
The properties of the Alarm History Grid coincide with those of
the Active Alarm Grid (see chap. 6, Properties of the Active
Alarm Grid page 432).
User List Table
The User List table (see chap. 5, Password configuration
page 213) is a predefined element in POLYMATH, one that can
be inserted into the project pages. It allows the operator to
access the user list (respecting the limits of its level of protection) and perform the principal operations with a simple click.
To insert a User List table into a page, click on the icon
or,
alternatively, use the main menu: Fields->Create->Complex
Controls->User list.
After clicking draw just the outline of the table and it will appear automatically.
identical to those of the properties in TrendView (see chap. 6,
Properties of a TrendView page 408).
Chapter 6
437
Properties Editor
By double-clicking on the table itself you access its editing

page which comprises two masks: Fields and General.
Add User: allows the operator to add a new user
Delete User: allows the operator to remove the user selected
Change Password: allows the operator to change the
password relating to the user selected
The General mask can be used to insert a name and an identifying comment for the User table being edited. In addition,
438
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

new measures in pixels valid only for editing the current field
The graphic properties (fonts and colors) of the User List can
be configured using together the Fields mask and Password element (see chap. 5, Fields grid page 220).
Note: After inserting a new user in Runtime, you will have to change
his/her password by selecting the corresponding row in the table
and then by clicking on Change Password. Just insert the new
password in the ensuing mask, leaving blank the field relating to the
old password (since the new user does not possess any assigned
password).
Properties of the Password Grid

Table 59: Properties of the Password Grid
Properties
Description
Top
Left
Width
Height
Dimension of height
Columns
This field allows the operator to edit

the appearance of the table. To edit
the columns click on the icon
. In
the window which appears enter the
details relating to their width, to the
font and to the dimension and format
of the titles of each column in the table
RowHeight

row
Lock

move or not
TabIndex

HScrollBarVisible

VScrollBarVisible

Chapter 6
439
Properties Editor
Recipe List Table

The Recipe List table is a predefined element in POLYMATH,
one that can be inserted into the project pages. It allows the
operator to access the Recipe list in the terminal (see chap. 5,
Recipes Types page 203). To insert a Recipe List table into
a page, click on the icon
or, alternatively, use the main
menu: Fields->Create->Complex Controls->Recipe list.
After clicking draw just the outline of the table and it will appear automatically.
identical to those occurring in TrendView (see chap. 6, Properties of a TrendView page 408).
table, whose properties will be dealt with in the next subsec-
440
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
tions (see chap. 6, Properties of the Active Alarm Grid

Delete: deletes the Recipe selected
Export: exports the Recipe selected into a .csv file
Export all Recipes: exports all the Recipes in the table
into a .csv or .xml file
Transfer (download): downloads the Recipe selected
onto a device
Import Recipes: imports the Recipes from a .csv file
In addition, a Dynamic field can be inserted, which contains
the Recipe type list in a pull-down menu which allows the operator to filter the display for a specific type of Recipe. The
properties relating to position and dimension can be inserted
into the Properties Editor of this field, and it is also possible to
indicate which type of Recipe to display as default when the
page opens.
The General mask can be used to insert a name and an identifying comment for the Recipe table being edited. In addition,
The graphic properties (fonts and colors) of the Recipe list can
be configured using the Fields mask of the Recipes element
(see chap. 5, Fields page 171).
Chapter 6
441
Properties Editor
Properties of the RecipeGrid

Table 60: Properties of the Recipe Grid
Properties
Description
Top
Left
Width
Height
Columns
This field allows the operator to determine which columns to put in the table
and define their respective properties.
To edit the columns click on the icon
. In the window which appears enter
the details relating to their width, to
the font and to the dimension and format of the titles of each column in the
table
RowHeight

row
Lock

move or not
TabIndex

HScrollBarVisible

bar should be present in Runtime when
the dimensions of the instances allow
for it
LetterHeadVisiblity
Indicates whether the tables should

have titles
OrderMode
Indicates the way the instances should

be ordered within the table; the order
can be alphabetical, chronological order of editing and Recipe ID order
VScrollBarVisible

bar should be present in Runtime when
the number of instances allow for it
Recipe Editing Table

The Recipe Editing table is a predefined element in POLYMATH, one that can be inserted into the project pages. It al-
442
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
lows the operator to access the Recipe editor in the terminal

(see chap. 5, Recipes Types page 203). To insert a Recipe
Editing table into a page, click on the icon
or, alternatively,
use the main menu: Fields->Create->Complex Controls>RecipeEditing.
After clicking draw just the outline of the table in the page and
it will appear automatically.
identical to those of TrendView (see chap. 6, Properties of a
TrendView page 408).
Chapter 6
443
Properties Editor
Save: saves the Recipe in the terminal memory (if necessary, overwriting the one being edited)
Save as: saves the Recipe open in any case the insertion window of the name
Load: loads the Recipe selected into the video buffer
Delete Buffer: empty the buffer
Transfer to Buffer (upload): transfers the Recipe from
the device to the video buffer
Transfer from Buffer (download): transfers the data of
the Recipe present from the video buffer to the device
In addition, dynamic fields can be inserted which contain a
Recipe list and the name of the uploaded Recipe which has
same properties as the Label objects (see chap. 6, Label
page 316) that can be edited using the Properties Editor.
The General mask can be used to insert a name and an identifying comment for the Recipe table being edited. In addition,
The graphic properties (fonts and colors) of the Recipe list can
be configured using the Fields mask of the Recipes element
Operations for transferring Recipes
The following summary gives an overview of all the operations
that can be performed on transfers of Recipes using VTs and
devices. It is important to note that transfer operations see
the interaction of 3 elements: the physical memory of the VT
(where the Recipes are saved), the VT video buffer (containing the data of just one Recipe, the one being displayed on the
444
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
panel) and the device (in whose memory the Recipe data really resides).
When you decide to manage the transfer of Recipes in synchronized mode constitutes a special case.
In this case, before transferring the data the terminal asks for
the status of the device, waiting for an authorization. The synchronization procedure happens by means of the write/read of
certain exchange areas (see chap.Appendix C - Status area
page 761 and see chap.Appendix D - Command area
page 765).
A synchronized transfer is defined at the moment the function
is attributed (or the script instruction, see chap. 9, Scripts
page 553)
Let us give a practical example. Supposing we are performing
a synchronized download and are using a Recipe type in noncompatible mode (see chap. 5, Modes of compatibility
page 209), then, at the request for a transfer of data, the devices will behave as follows:
the VT will send the data transfer request to the PLC
(WORD0.BIT1 of the Status Area)
the PLC responds, enabling the transfer using bit 4 of
WORD0 of the Command Area
At this point, the data transfer will begin (WORD0.BIT0
of the Status Area)
At the end of the transfer, the VT will signal to the PLC
(WORD0.BIT3 of the Status Area) that the download
has terminated
the PLC will respond confirming the reception
(WORD0.BIT0 of the Command Area)
If during the data transfer the handshake times are not respected, the VT puts at 1 in the Status Area the Error In Transferring bit (bit 14 = download, bit 15 = upload).
Chapter 6
445
Properties Editor
Chronothermostat
A "Chronothermostat" can be inserted inside of the page by
clicking on the
icon or from the "Main Menu" (Fields->Create->Complex Controls->Chronothermostat). After having
clicked the icon, indicate the area in which POLYMATH must
designate the "Chronothermostat" using the mouse inside of
the page.
A "Chronothermostat" represents a Polymath object that allows to detect a temperature and edit the behaviour of the system in "Manual" or "Automatic" mode at will. Scheduling
allows to program the temperature trend weekly.
The "Chronothermostat" is the field inside of which the content of the TaskSettimanali (WeeklyTasks) is displayed, the
functioning of which was described in the last previous paragraph (see chapter 7 "TaskSettimanali" on page
Consult the next sub-paragraphs to know the details of the
properties that can be associated to a "Chronothermostat"
and its editing modes.
Properties of the Chronothermostat Grid

Table 61: Properties of the Chronothermostat Grid
Properties
Description
Name
Identification name of the Chronothermostat View. It must be unique among

the graphic elements
Comment
Identification comment inside of POLYMATH
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
446
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor

AreaVisibility
Determines whether the Chronothermostat has the background area or if it

must be transparent. A Boolean variable can be associated to this value or it
Border3D
Determines the 3D effect of the Border. It can be Flat, Relief, Rec-essed,

Bump or Etched. The value can be associated to a whole variable or it can
BorderStyle
Determines the style of the Border. It

can be Solid or Dashed. The value can
be associated to a whole variable or it
BorderColor
Determines the Border colour by means of the RGB code or the colour palette. The value can be associated to a
with thresholds
BorderVisibility
Determines whether the Viewer border

is present or not. A Boolean variable
can be associated to this value
BorderSize
Determines the dimension of the Border. It must be a number to which a

whole variable can be associated optionally, or it can be managed with
thresholds
BorderBlink
Determines the flashing of the Border.

It can be No Flash, Slow Flash or Fast
Flash. The value can be associated to a
with thresholds
Chapter 6
447
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Hide
Determines whether the object is visible initially. It can also be associated to

a Boolean variable (for Runtime modifications) or it can be managed with
thresholds
Lock

move or not
Edit the Chronothermostat

After having inserted a "Chronothermostat" on a page, double-click it to start its editing. A "graphic" will be present by
default which, upon the programmer's choice, can be accompanied by a range of control buttons to view the "Chronothermostat". The editing is organised on two masks: "Campi" e
"Generale" (Fields and General)
Fields
From the "Fields" mask, the buttons which should be present

be edited in "Editor Propriet" (Properties Editor) as for normal touch-sensitive buttons. To insert or remove a button, click the list of buttons at the left of the table. If an object is
already present on the page it will be highlighted inside of the
list (and it will be visible inside of the drawing area). To move
an element (button or table) drag it to the desired position.
Several buttons can be inserted and each one has a pre-determined function associated to it (unchangeable) :
"Copy": the button copies the daily trend of the temperature in order to overwrite it on another day at will.
This is useful when it is necessary to have the same dai-
448
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
ly schedule on different days. Functions by pressing the

button and then selecting the days where the modification is to be applied. To conclude, re-select the "Copia"
(Copy) key
"Change state": the button allows to pass from heating
mode to cooling mode and vice versa. This function
must be activated in the "Script" della "WeeklyTask"
"Script" screen used. It is only active if the selection of
"Type of Chronothermostat" corresponds to "Riscaldamento e Raffreddamento" (Heating and Cooling)
"Save": the button memorises and saves the modifications made to this function
"Automatic": allows to start "Chronothermostat" scheduling. The system reads the previously-set cycle values and behaves according to the same
"Manual": the system leaves "Automatic" mode and follows a variable temperature value at will at any time
from the panel
"Default": pass to a pre-established temperature value
(Default) in the design phase. The "Automatic" function
is deactivated
"Perform": activates "Chronothermostat" functioning
"Off": exists the "Chronothermostat" functioning mode
"User Button": identifies a new button that can be customised freely by the user
General
An identification name and comment for the "Chronothermostat" that is being edited can be inserted on the "General"
mask. Moreover, it is possible to overwrite the default dimensions of the page editing grid introducing new measurements
in pixel valid only for editing the current field.
Chapter 6
449
Properties Editor
Properties of the Chronothermostat Grid

Properties
Description
Name
Identification name of the Chronothermostat View. It must be unique among

Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor

Border3D

BorderColor
with thresholds
BorderVisibility

BorderSize

thresholds
BorderBlink

with thresholds
450
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
WeeklyType
Determines the type of use of the

Chronothermostat. It can be None,
Days or Week
GridLineVisible
Determines if the grid has reference lines or if it must be transparent
GridLineColor
Determines the Visible Grid Line colour

by means of the RGB code or the colour palette. The value can be associated to a whole variable
GridUnusedCellColor
It determines the colour of the cells

not used in the Grid by means of the
RGB code or the colour palette. The
value can be associated to a whole variable
OffLabel
Determines the text to display in the

grid in the intersection point of the
graphical lines
WeekTask
Determines the selection between

TaskSettimanali present for programming
GrdiColors
Allows to use the

button to access
the configuration window of the colours relative to the graphic temperature intervals
Lock

move or not
TabIndex

BackgrImageEnabled
Determines the presence or not of a

background image in the grid
BackgroundImageID
Determines the background image

used in the program
HorScaleVisible
Determines the presence or not of the

horizontal scale in the graphics
HorScaleLabelFont
Determines the Font to use for the labels of the horizontal scale
Chapter 6
451
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
HorScaleLabelColor
It determines the colour of the labels in

the horizontal scale by means of the
RGB code or the colour palette
VerScaleVisible
Determines the presence or not of the

vertical scale in the graphics
VerScaleLabelFont
Determines the Font to use for the labels of the vertical scale
VerScaleLabelColor
It determines the colour of the labels in

the vertical scale by means of the RGB
code or the colour palette The value
Scheduler View
"Scheduler View" is the "Scheduler" function graphical representation inside of the page (see chap. 5, Schedulers
page 259).
A Scheduler View can be inserted inside of a page by clicking
on the icon
or from the Main Menu (Fields->Create>Controls Complexes->Scheduler View). After having clicked
the icon, indicate the area in which POLYMATH must draw the
new Scheduler View inside of the page using the mouse :
452
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Before creating a new "Scheduler view" it is necessary (but

not indispensable) to have created a "Scheduler" to which associate it. It is also possible to create scheduler after having
created scheduler view by editing the "Scheduler" property directly from property editor under the "Advanced" item :
After having inserted "Scheduler", the "Vista Scheduler" image automatically becomes the following :
It is certainly possible to customise "Scheduler View" using

the days of the week or the "Week" and "Week-end" keys.
Chapter 6
453
Properties Editor
Scheduler View Properties

Table 63: Scheduler View Properties
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Scheduler

View. Must be unique among the
graphic elements
Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor

AreaVisibility
Determines whether the Scheduler

View should have a background or if it
must be transparent; a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value or it
Border3D

BorderBlink

BorderColor

454
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Table 63: Scheduler View Properties

Properties
Description
BorderVisibility

value
BorderSize

BorderStyle

Hide
thresholds
Lock

not
Scheduler
Allows associating and modifying a

new "Scheduler" to "Scheduler View"
Editing Scheduler View

After having inserted a Scheduler View on a page, doubleclick it to start its editing. A graphic will be present by default
which, upon the user's choice, can be accompanied by a range
of control buttons to view the Scheduler View. The editing is
organised on two masks: Fields and General.
Fields
Chapter 6
455
Properties Editor
From the Fields mask, the buttons which should be present

be edited in Editor Properties as for normal touch buttons.
(see chap. 6, Touch Button page 373). To insert or remove
a button, click the list of buttons at the left of the table. If an
object is already present on the page, it will be highlighted inside of the list (and it will be visible inside of the drawing
area). To move an element (button or table) drag it to the desired position. There are several buttons that can be inserted
and each one has a pre-determined function associated to it
(unchangeable) :
"Save": the button saves and stores the changes made.

"Automatic": allows scheduling to start The system reads previously set values and behaves based on them. By
pressing once the "Automatic" button the system
switches to "Manual" and Scheduler is disabled.
Run: activates set function in events.
"Stop": stops Scheduler execution.
"Copy": the button copies Scheduler daily trend to then
overwrite it into a different day at will. It is useful when
the same daily scheduling is needed on different days.
It functions by pressing the button and subsequently
selecting days the change is to be applied to; finish by
selecting the "Copy" key again
User Button: identifies a new button that can freely be
customised by user
General
An identification name and comment for the Scheduler" that

is being edited can be inserted on the "General" mask. The page editing grid default dimensions can be overwritten as well
introducing new measurements in pixel, valid only for the current field editing (see chap. 5, Main window page 129).
456
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Holiday Groups View

"Holiday group view" is the "Holiday group" function graphical
representation inside of the page (see chap. 5, Holiday
Group page 267).
A Holiday Group View can be inserted inside of a page by clicking on the icon
or from the Main Menu (Fields->Create>Controls Complexes->View "Holiday Group"). After having
clicked the icon, indicate the area in which POLYMATH must
draw the new Holiday group view inside of the page using
the mouse: :
Holiday Group View Properties

Table 64: Holiday Groups View Properties
Properties
Description
Name
Identifying name of the Holiday

Groups Viewer. Must be unique among
Comment
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
Chapter 6
457
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
AreaColor

AreaVisibility
Determines whether the Holiday

Groups Viewer should have a background or if it must be transparent; a
this value or it can be managed with
thresholds
Border3D

BorderBlink

BorderColor

BorderVisibility

value
BorderSize

BorderStyle

458
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
Hide
thresholds
Lock

not
Properties of the Holiday Groups Viewer grid

Table 65: Properties of the Holiday Groups Viewer Grid
Properties
Description
Top
Left
Width
Width dimension
Height
Height dimension
AreaColor

Border3D

BorderBlink

with thresholds
BorderColor
with thresholds
Chapter 6
459
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
BorderVisibility

BorderSize

thresholds
FontGridCell
Determines the font used to display

text in grid cell
FontHeaders
Determines the font used to display

text grid headers
TextColorDisableCell
Determines the RGB color used for the

text in disable cell
TextColorEnableCell

text in enable cell
TextColorSelectedCell

text in selected cell
TextColorWeek

text in week headers
TextColorWeekend

text in weekend headers
Hide
Determina se loggetto inizialmente

visibile; anche possibile associare
una variabile di tipo Boolean (per modifiche a Runtime) oppure pu essere
gestito a soglie.
Lock
Determina se loggetto si pu spostare

o no
TabIndex
Permette di controllare il movimento

del focus quando si utilizzano i tasti di
movimento del cursore allinterno di
una pagina; inoltre controlla lordine di
inserimento dati su pi campi quando
la Impostazione automatica del campo
successivo della pagina abilitato (see
chap. 5, Generale page 176)
460
Chapter 6
Properties Editor

Properties
Description
ImageSelectedCell
Allows assigning an image to selected

cell
ImageUnselectedCell
Allows assigning an image to unselected cell
ImageCurrentCell
Allows assigning an image to "current

day" cell
ImageDisableCell
Allows assigning an image to not enabled cell (or cells) (days not included in
current month)
HolidayGroup
Determines which holiday group to

show
DayOfWeek
Determines texts list used for week

days
Edit Holiday Group View

After having inserted a Holiday Group on a page, double-click it to start its editing. A default graphic is present accompanied by a "Save" button.
The editing is organised on two masks: Fields and General.
Fields
From the "Fields" mask it is possible to edit grid keys characteristics. Each button has its relative properties which can
be edited in Editor Properties as for normal touch buttons
(see chap. 6, Touch Button page 373). To insert the "Save"
button simply click on it, while dragging it to the desired po-
Chapter 6
461
Properties Editor
sition will move it. A pre-determined function (unchangeable)

is associated to the "Save" button.
You can have the following buttons along with the grid (which
can also be edited) :
Month: views configured month

Month increase button
Month decrease button
Year: views configured year
Year increase button
Year decrease button
Only in Runtime it is possible to select the days where the

scheduler does not need to operate (holidays) :
Note: Current day is selected by default in blue.
462
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
General
An identification name and comment for the Holiday group

that is being edited can be inserted on the "General" mask.
The page editing grid default dimensions can be overwritten
as well introducing new measurements in pixel, valid only for
the current field editing (see chap. 5, Finestra Principale
page 131).
Movement
properties of
the objects
A movement property can be associated to every object present in the creation of the POLYMATH project.
This is used to determine the behaviour of this object associated to a "Tag".
The commands useful for introduction of a movement are present in the object "Editor Propriet" (Properties Editor) :
Table 66: Movement properties of the objects
Properties
Description
TypeOfMovement

TagDirectMovement
TagX
TagY
Steps
Movement intervals
FinalX
FinalY
Chapter 6
463
Properties Editor
Once an object has been selected, by clicking the

button,
the movement associated to it can be displayed graphically.
Shift the object to the desired position.
Direct Movement
The image shifts to the pre-established point.

Horizontal Movement
The image follows the established horizontal movement (Tag

X).
464
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Vertical Movement
The image follows the established vertical movement (Tag Y).

Horizontal and Vertical Movement
The image follows the established horizontal and vertical movements (X and Y Tags).
Operations on
graphic
elements
For all the graphic elements described in this chapter it is possible to perform a series of useful operations aimed at further
improving the graphic presentation of the project.
In this section we will give a complete description of practical
examples relating to standard operations, like grouping, alignment and distribution.
Chapter 6
465
Properties Editor
Grouping of two or more graphic elements

The grouping function is useful whenever you want to deal
with a group of graphic elements as a single block so as to be
able to perform cumulative operations on all the elements. To
group two or more elements select them simultaneously (using the mouse to construct an area to enclose them) and click
on the icon
of the toolbar (or Layout->Group using the
Main menu).
For example, let us insert into a page a Regular 5-sided polygon and then a touch button.
Let us suppose that after individually defining the properties

of the single objects (as shown in the previous sections), we
want the button to be over the Polygon and want this structure
to be a single structure, so that we can move, resize or duplicate them together as a group. First of all we will move the
button (selecting it and dragging it to the desired position).
Now we have to select the two objects collectively. We just

click on the icon
and draw a selection area inside the page
big enough to contain the outlines of both objects as shown in
the following figure:
466
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
at this point release the button and both elements will be selected,
and the Group key on the toolbar will become activated

(Layout->Group). By clicking on this icon the elements become grouped and the Polygon-button ensemble becomes usable as a single element. The type of object created is Group
Field and, when selected, the Properties Editor can be used to
attribute the properties relating to dimensions and position
besides the name and identifying comment in the context of
POLYMATH. Once a Group Field is created it is possible to edit
the position of the objects within it (or delete and add objects)
after double-clicking on the group itself. In this way you access the Group editor in which it is also possible to set the
Groups general properties and dimensions.
This operation can of course be performed on all the types of
graphic element described in this chapter. Moreover, the elements of a group can be disaggregated later by clicking on the
key (Layout->Separate), active only when a group of objects is selected. After their division the elements return to being separately editable.
Chapter 6
467
Properties Editor
Depth order of objects

When there is an overlapping of more than one object in a
page, the operator can establish display priority policy for the
overlapping objects. By selecting one of the objects it is possible to determine at what depth level to position it by pressing one of the four keys also to be found in the Main menu
Layout->Level.
To understand the way the four options work let us take the
example given in the previous section, but adding to the polygon and the touch button a third element, a Sector.
We will apply the Level commands to the touch button, then
select it (click on
and then on the button). Now by clicking
on
(Layout->Level->Move to First Level) the button is
brought to the top level above all the other objects.
When, instead, we click on the icon

(Layout->Level>Move to Lowest Level), the button selected is taken to the
bottom level, that is, below all the other objects. See figure:
468
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
Now, if we click on the icon

(Layout->Level->Up), the button is moved one level towards the top, that is, it rises only
above the object that was immediately above it at that moment (in our example, the polygon).
Naturally, with each click of this icon, the object selected appears at a different level.
Similarly, by clicking on the icon
(Layout->Level->Down)
the button is moved down by one level, that is, it drops only
below the object that was immediately below it at that moment (in our example, the polygon).
Chapter 6
469
Properties Editor
Alignment of objects
When there are two or more objects in a page the operator
can use the tools supplied by POLYMATH to obtain their automatic alignment; these tools can be accessed directly via the
Main menu (Layout->Align) or via the respective icons of the
toolbar, as described below.
To describe the various behaviors of the Alignment function,
we will use the same example we utilized in the last subsection: three elements in a page, namely a touch button, a polygon and a Sector.
First of all we enable the icon relating to alignment by clicking
on the icon
, then we draw in the page a selection area big
enough to contain the outlines of both objects. See figure:
Once the mouse key is released the objects become selected

and the alignment icons become clickable.
470
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
There are six icons in the Alignment Menu, each of which behaves differently, as shown below:
By clicking on
(Layout->Align->Top), the top edges of all
the figures selected are aligned with one another at the level
of the top edge of the highest positioned object (in our example, the button). See figure:
By clicking on
(Layout->Align->Bottom) the lowest edges
of all the figures selected are aligned with one another at the
level of the bottom edge of the lowest positioned object (in our
example, the button). See figure:
Chapter 6
471
Properties Editor
By clicking on
(Layout->Align->Mid-point) the (vertical)
mid-points of all the figures selected are aligned with one another at the level of the (vertical) mid-point of the lowest positioned object (in our example, the button). See figure:
By clicking on
(Layout->Align->Left) the left edges all the
figures selected are aligned with one another at the level of
the left edge of the leftmost object (in our example, the button). See figure:
By clicking on
(Layout->Align->Center) the (horizontal)
mid-points of all the figures selected are aligned with one an-
472
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
other at the level of the (horizontal) mid-point of the lowest

positioned object (in our example, the button). See figure:
By clicking on
(Layout->Align->Right) the right edges all
the figures selected are aligned with one another at the level
of the right edge of the rightmost object (in our example, the
button). See figure
Arrangement of objects
When there are at least three objects in a page the operator
can use the tools supplied by POLYMATH to obtain their automatic arrangement; these tools can be accessed directly via
the Main menu (Layout->Arrange) or via the respective icons
of the toolbar, as described below.
Objects are arranged within a page by taking as a point of reference the distance between the first two objects in the page.
(For vertical arrangements, the reference is the distance between the first two objects encountered scrolling the page
from top to bottom; for horizontal arrangements, the reference is the distance between the first two objects encountered
scrolling the page from left to right).
Chapter 6
473
Properties Editor
The following subsections offer simple examples which take

into consideration only three touch buttons of different dimensions but more complex configurations are dealt with in the
same way.
Horizontal arrangement
Using our example, let us add three different colored buttons
to the page. See below:
After drawing the three buttons, let us click on the

icon of
the toolbar and draw a selection area that includes all the objects. This activates the arrangement options of the toolbar or
Main menu: Layout->Arrange.
In the examples in this subsection, our starting point to illustrate how the arrangement operation works will always be this
same initial situation. For horizontal arrangements, POLYMATH takes as its reference the distance between buttons 1
and 2 (being the first two from the left).
To operate a simple horizontal arrangement, just click on the
icon
of the toolbar or Main menu (Layout->Arrange->Horizontally).
POLYMATH will arrange all the objects selected such that the
distance between the left side of one object and the right side
of the object preceding it is always equal to the distance between the left side of the second object and the right side of
the first object (reference objects calculated according to their
order when scrolling the page from the left). If the reference
distance is less than zero, POLYMATH takes it automatically to
0.
In our example, the result obtained will be the one represented in the next figure:
474
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
To operate a rightward arrangement, just click on icon

of
the toolbar or Main menu (Layout->Arrange->Right).
distance between the right sides of consecutive objects is always equal to the distance between the right sides of the first
two objects (reference objects calculated according to their
0, thereby aligning to the right.
To arrange to the center, just click on icon

of the toolbar
or the Main menu (Layout->Arrange->Center).
distance between the central vertical axes of consecutive objects is always equal to the distance between the central vertical axes of the first two objects (reference objects calculated
according to the order when scrolling the page from the left).
If the reference distance is less than zero, POLYMATH takes it
automatically to 0, thereby aligning to the center.
To operate a leftward arrangement, just click on the icon

of the toolbar or Main menu (Layout->Arrange->Left).
distance between the left sides of consecutive objects is al-
Chapter 6
475
Properties Editor
ways equal to the distance between the left sides of the first
0, thereby aligning to the right.
Vertical arrangement
Using our example, let us add three different colored buttons
to the page as indicated in the next figure:
After drawing the three buttons, let us click on icon

of the
toolbar and draw a selection area that includes all the objects.
This activates the arrangement options of the toolbar or Main
menu: Layout->Arrange.
In the examples in this subsection, our starting point to illustrate how the arrangement operation works will always be this
same initial situation. For vertical arrangements, POLYMATH
takes as its reference the distance between buttons 1 and 2
(being the first two from the top).
476
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
To operate a simple vertical arrangement, just click on the

icon
of the toolbar or Main menu (Layout->Arrange->Vertically).
distance between the top side of one object and the bottom
side of the object preceding it is always equal to the distance
between the bottom side of the first object and the top side of
the second object (reference objects calculated according to
their order when scrolling the page from the top). If the reference distance is less than zero, POLYMATH takes it automatically to 0.
For a top-line arrangement, just click on icon

of the toolbar
or the Main menu (Layout->Arrange->Top).
distance between the top sides of consecutive objects is always equal to the distance between the top sides of the first
order when scrolling the page from the top).
Chapter 6
477
Properties Editor
For a mid-point arrangement, just click on the icon

of the
toolbar or the Main menu (Layout->Arrange->Mid-point).
distance between the central horizontal axes of consecutive
objects is always equal to the distance between the central
horizontal axes of consecutive objects (reference objects calculated according to their order when scrolling the page from
the top). If the reference distance is less than zero, POLYMATH takes it automatically to 0 (thus making the alignment
in the center).
For a bottom-line arrangement, just click on the icon

of the
toolbar or the Main menu (Layout->Arrange->Bottom).
478
Chapter 6
Properties Editor
distance between the lowest sides of consecutive objects is always equal to the distance between the lowest sides of the
first two objects (reference objects calculated according to
their order when scrolling the page from the top).
If the reference distance is less than zero, POLYMATH takes it
automatically to 0 (thus making the alignment at the bottom).
Chapter 7
479
Other anchorable windows
7.
In the last chapters we dealt with the workings of the three

main anchorable windows: Project Explorer, Properties Editor
and Events Editor.
But POLYMATH contains other anchorable windows, each of
which has its particular purposes and functions as we shall
now see: Library Explorer, Error Viewer and Complirer Output.
POLYMATH
Libraries
POLYMATH has a structure saving tool that also functions outside the context of the project being edited: the Library.
This too is useful as it makes it possible to store, save and reuse portions of a project; each individual element or set of elements - indeed, even a whole project - can be put in a library
to be easily re-usable in new projects. A classic example of
the use of the Library is when you want to maintain a uniform
style in different projects without having to redefine them
each time. For example, you need simply create a frame with
the colors, the size and the style required and save it in a Library to conserve it and make it available to be inserted in all
the other projects.
With POLYMATH an unlimited number of libraries can be managed. The libraries are managed using the Explorer Library
window which is an anchorable window and thus can be customized at will (see chap.3, Anchorable windows page 84).
This chapter describes POLYMATH's standard libraries and
how to insert objects of the various categories of library in a
page of the project.
Library Explorer
Library Explorer is the window that shows the contents of the
libraries being worked on and allows them to be managed.
480
Chapter 7
Image of the Explore Libraries in "Double click" mode :
Select "Explore Libraries" at the bottom of "Explore Resources" :
Chapter 7
481
Image of the Explore Libraries in "Extended" mode :
The Library comprises the following categories of objects :
Buttons
Swicthes
Lights
Pipes and Valves
Tanks
Motors
Machinery
Images List
Images
Flags and Icons
Various
Keyboards
User Objects
Temporary Objects
482
Chapter 7
The library allows you to use objects immediately by dragging

them with the mouse onto the page :
Chapter 7
483
This window appears after you have dragged an object onto

the page. You can now edit the various properties of the object
as you like :
DOUBLE CLICK mode

Double click an object :
484
Chapter 7
This window appears. You can define all the parameters of the
variables associated with the object :
Selecting "User Interface" and then clicking "Edit" :
Chapter 7
485
Takes you back to the previous page where you can edit the
properties of the object.
In the same way, it's possible to import a button on the page,
choosing among the several ones available in the library, editing its properties from the popup windows after double-clicking on the object. For example, let's import the button
Access 2 :
After double-clicking on it, the following window appears allowing to configure all the parameters of the "Released" button :
486
Chapter 7
By twice clicking on the Preview key it is possible to :
Change the Background colour

Change the Symbol internal colour
Edit the Background colour
Change the rotation (default=0)
Change the Mirror
In the released page it is possible to change both the features of the released button: :
Area Colour
Area Visibility
Chapter 7
487
The following window will appear, where it's possible to configure all the "Pressed button parameters :
The following window will appear, where it's possible to configure all the "General button parameters :
488
Chapter 7
The following window will appear, where it's possible to configure all the "functioning button parameters :
The following window will appear, where it's possible to configure all the "Events button parameters :
EXTENDED mode
Select the object with a single click of the mouse. The "Properties Editor" window appears to the right of the POLYMATH
Chapter 7
489
where you can define all the parameters of the variables associated with the object :
Double-clicking the object opens the window below where you

can edit the properties of the object :
490
Chapter 7
Libraries management
To manage libraries click on the appropriate "Libraries management" icon in "Libraries explorer" :
This screen opens :
Selecting the "Visible" column boxes makes it possible to determine which libraries need to be visible in "Libraries Explorer".
Chapter 7
491
Note: To choose a library click twice on "check-box", the first time

is to select a library and the second time is to make the selection effective.
Libraries management window contains the following keys :
Delete
Export
Up
Down
Update source
Update local
Tools
Delete :
If you want to delete a library, click on the corresponding
"check box" to select it, then click on the "Delete" key :
To confirm click on "Yes" :
492
Chapter 7
Export :
By clicking on "Export" it will be possible, by choosing the destination path, to export the selected libraries (for example in
a folder shared on the network) :
The utility of the operation described above is to be able to use

the group of objects belonging to a certain library also from
another PC where POLYMATH is installed, thus allowing access
to the same library file for different users, also it is possible to
maintain the library/ies continuously updated by clicking on
"Update Source" :
Chapter 7
493
The same utility is also found in case the library saved in the
network, therefore accessible by other users, is different from
the one in the processing phase project, therefore by clicking
on the "Local Update" key the project library will be updated
to the present library in the network :
Up :
Using "Up" the user will be able to move the selected field up
after going to the "Library Management" column.
Down :
Using "Down" the user will be able to move the selected field
down after going to the "Library Management" column.
494
Chapter 7
The "Tools" key is made up of the following submenus :
Create library
Import
Update system libraries
Check shared libraries
By clicking on "Import" it will be possible, by choosing the

source path, to import the selected libraries from a hard disk
(or from a folder shared on the network) :
Chapter 7
495
By clicking on "Update system libraries" eventual anomalies

on the objects of the system libraries are restored.
Clicking on "Check shared libraries" the local libraries (on PC)
will be updated will all the libraries on the network.
Creating a subfolder
User can add subfolders to the "USER" and "TEMP" folders by
clicking on the "Create Folder" icon :
496
Chapter 7
The new folder appears under library :
Right clicking makes it possible to perform the following operations on the just created folder :
Rename
Change icon
Delete
Select the "Rename" option to open this window :
Type the desired name then click OK to confirm.

Selecting the "Change Icon" option makes it possible to modify the default icon.
Selecting the "Delete Folder" option makes it possible to eliminate selected folder :
Chapter 7
497
Saving objects
It is possible to save edited objects in the USER OBJECTS folder in the same Library.
Objects saved in the USER OBJECTS folder can also be used
for other projects.
There is a folder in the Library Explore called TEMPORARY
OBJECTS where saved objects are only available for the current project.
Open the USER Objects folder :
Select the object you wish to save, press CTRL+Shift and drag
it into the "USER OBJECTS" library
498
Chapter 7
This operation can take a few seconds.
It is possible to save an entire page of a project in the library

by simply selecting it in Explore Project and dragging it into
the "User Objects" library. The operation can take a few seconds :
Chapter 7
499
Warning: If an element is dragged from the project to a library and

this object refers to a variable (e.g. Numeric field), POLYMATH
does not automatically import the variable into the Library, this operation must be done manually. When a variable is imported into a
Library, its reference to the memory address is lost.
Dragging is also the way an object moves from the library to

a project: just take an element from the Library Explorer to
the Project Explorer so that it is included in the project.
Warning: When inserting an element from the Library to the Project

pay special attention to the nomenclature of the objects. When the
object inserted has the same name as an element already present in
the project, POLYMATH will replace the element with the one
present in the library
Errors Viewer
"Error Viewer" is an anchorable window (see , " Le Finestre ancorabili" (Anchorable Windows on page 47" chapter) that supplies information regarding the errors present in the project.
The "Error Viewer" window lists, in real time, any errors associated with the project you are editing and validating; errors
are highlighted in red. Double-clicking the description of a
problem focuses the application on the source of the error,
opening a window ("Properties Editor", window in the work
area, etc.) where you can make the necessary corrections. Errors disappear as soon as they are corrected in the associated
area.
500
Chapter 7
Warning
Viewer
The "Warning Viewer" window lists, in real time, any warnings

associated with the project you are editing and validating;
warnings are highlighted in orange.
Double-clicking the description of a problem focuses the application on the source of the error, opening a window ("Properties Editor", window in the work area, etc.) where you can
make the necessary corrections. Errors disappear as soon as
they are corrected in the associated area.
Compiler
Output
"Compiler Output" is an anchorable window where the log information relative to the last compilation (if already carried
out during the actual session) of the project currently being
edited is reported. During the compilation phase, the log in
this window is updated in real time, showing the object and
the compiled file on which it is working. The errors and warnings are signalled as in the "Error Viewer" mask and a double
click on them causes movement of the focus onto the area of
application from where it is possible to solve the problem.
Chapter 7
501
502
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
503
Compiling, Downloading and

Runtime
8.

Runtime
The preceding sections have provided all the necessary

concepts for creating and editing a project by describing all
the utilities offered by POLYMATH. Once the editing phase is
over, the work done needs to be downloaded onto the ESA
panel.
First of all it is necessary to check that there are no problems
in the project that might prevent it behaving properly in
runtime. To detect any errors there needs to be a validation
operation which analyzes all the objects created and checks
that the properties are complete and coherent without,
however, creating any transfer files.
Transfer files are created, though, when compiling, which,
therefore, is the more complex operation. Once the compiled
files have been created, they can be downloaded onto the
panel using the appropriate POLYMATH function.
This chapter will supply the details of the operations of
validation, compilation and download, illustrating at the end
another very useful function of POLYMATH, the download of
the image of the operating system onto a Windows CE
terminal.
Validation
Validation is the operation that checks the coherence of the
objects added to the project. Any errors or warnings are
shown in the Errors Viewer window (see chap. 7, Errors
Viewer page 499).
POLYMATH offers wither a global validation of the project or
the validation of only the object currently being edited: a
project can be globally validated by clicking on the
icon of
the Toolbar (or main menu, using File->Validates Project)
while partial validation requires a click on
(File->Validates
Current).
There is also a choice as to whether to let POLYMATH perform
a validation in real-time (signals problems as they are edited)
or whether validation should be carried out only when
requested by the appropriate commands. This function can be
configured using the main menu by clicking on Tools>Options.
The Errors mask contains a report in real time of the errors
and warnings relating to the project being validated. The
504
Chapter 8
Runtime
errors appear in red while the warnings appear in orange. If
we double-click on the description of the problem, POLYMATH
will focus the application on the origin of the error, that is, on
the mask (Properties Editor, work area mask, etc.) where a
correction can be made. As soon as they are corrected in the
appropriate area, the errors disappear.
Compilation
Compilation is the operation whereby a project created with
POLYMATH is transformed into files ready to be sent to the
panel to be then interpreted by the VTs firmware.
To start off the compilation of a project click on the
icon in
the Toolbar (or use the main menu File->Compile). Any errors
or warnings detected in the process of compilation are
signalled in the Errors Viewer window (see chap. 7, Errors
Viewer page 499). Errors appear in red while Warnings
appear in orange.
Warning: It is always advisable to correct errors (in red) signalled

by the compiler before downloading the project onto the panel, as
failure to do so could cause runtime malfunctioning. By contrast, the
warnings relate to incomplete parts of the project that it would be
advisable to correct although their runtime impact is less grave.
When the compilation has finished the project is ready to be

downloaded onto the panel. When there is an attempt to
download a project that has not been compiled (or that
contains changes compared with the last compilation),
POLYMATH will advise the user and ask whether to go ahead
with the compilation again before beginning to transfer.
Chapter 8
505

Runtime
Project
simulation
Run time simulator

The project can be simulated directly on the PC without being
transferred to the terminal; all device variables and the
project's accurate execution can be verified without the device
actually being connected.
List of menu items
File
Menu Path
Function
Imports .csv files of following
elements:
File -> Import
Watch list
list of variables
selected by check
mark
Tag values
value of variables
Simulations
type of simulation
associated with single
variables
Exports .csv files of following

elements:
File -> Export
File -> Print
Watch list
list of variables
selected by check
mark
Tag values
value of variables
Simulations
type of simulation
associated with single
Prints
506
Chapter 8
Runtime
Tags
Menu path
Tags -> Edit value
Edits the value of the selected

variable
Tags -> Reset all

values
Resets the values of all

variables
Tags -> Add to

watch list
Adds the selected variable to

the "Watch List"
Tags -> Remove

from watch list
Removes the selected variable

from the "Watch List"
Tags -> Reset

watch list
Removes all variables from the

"Watch List"
Tags ->Show
watch list
Shows list of variables included

in the "Watch list"
Tags -> Show

complete list
Shows list of all variables

included in the project
Simulation
Simulation -> Play
Carries out all simulations
Simulation ->
Pause
Pauses the simulations
Simulation -> Stop
Stops the simulations
Simulation -> Add

new simulation
Adds a new simulation
Simulation -> Edit

simulation
Edits the selected simulation
Simulation ->
Remove
simulation
Removes the selected

simulation
Simulation ->
Enable simulation
Enables the selected simulation
Simulation ->
Disable simulation
Disables the selected simulation
Chapter 8
507

Runtime
Simulation ->
Remove all
simulation
Removes all simulations
Simulation ->
Enable all
simulation
Enables all simulations
Simulation ->
Disable all
simulation
Disables all simulations
List of buttons in the tags

"Device simulation" tag
List of configured simulations
Add: adds a simulation to a selected variable

Edit: edits the selected simulation
Remove: removes the selected simulation
"Project Tags" Tag

List of all the variables in the project
Edit Value: Edits the value of the selected variable.

Watch List: shows only the variables in the Watch List,
selected by check mark.
Reset List: Reset List: unchecks all variables, removing
them from the watch list.
508
Chapter 8
Runtime
From the simulator it is possible to change the values contained in the different columns shown by double clicking on the
desired column (for example the format of the variables) :
!!! WARNING !!! When quitting the simulator, all the values of the
variables, the watch list and the simulations are lost. To save them
for further use, use the file menu to export Watch lists, Tag values
and Simulations.
Downloading a
project
Preparing Windows CE panels for the first download

To ensure that projects created with POLYMATH are correctly
run on Windows CE panels, 2 files to be found on the
installation CD need to be copied onto the memory (Hard
Disk) of the panel:
Esa.cfg - this file is different for every model of panel in
that it contains hardware information and goes under
the root directory, Hard Disk\ .
Startup.esa - this file must be copied into the directory
Hard Disk\Esa\Startup. It allows the ESA Downloader
application to start and therefore enables
communication to take place in the project download
phase. In addition, the addition of this file leads to the
project being started automatically when the panel is
switched on.
Chapter 8
509

Runtime
After copying these two files the terminals operating system
starts; after successive start-ups the ESA Downloader
application will start automatically without any additional
operation being necessary.
Downloading a project
When a project is compiled it is ready to be transferred to the
terminal by invoking the Download function (if Esa
Downloader has been properly configured in accordance with
the indications in the preceding subsection). To start the
transfer just click on the
icon of the toolbar (or use main
menu File->Download). If there are files compiled for the
version of the project currently being edited, POLYMATH will
show the window relating to the hardware configuration of the
PC-terminal connection. If, on the other hand, no files have
been compiled for the project yet, POLYMATH will ask the
programmer whether it should start compiling.
The download window allows the operator first to select the

terminal to which the project file is sent and the parameters
for the type of connection to be used. The types of connection
catered for are :
Standard serial
Ethernet - TCP/IP
Local
USB
http
The serial connection is the most common type and it is

achieved by connecting the ports of the PC on which
POLYMATH has been installed and those of the terminal with
the appropriate cable (see chap. 5, Communication ports
510
Chapter 8
Runtime
page 128). The type of port to be used for the PC-terminal
connection must be specified.
In the EsaPolymath 2.1 version a second Download protocol
was added, called UDP (User Data Protocol) :
Note: With Polymath 2.0 and earlier versions, if a project is

download using the Ethernet port it is necessary to select the UDP
protocol in the operator panel downloader configurator menu.
If an Ethernet TCP/IP connection is required, it is necessary to

specify the parameters for making the connection: the IP
address and communication port (see chap. 8, Establishing
an Ethernet connection page 523). A remote connection (out
of those set on the PC being used) can be used when the
project download starts; in this case user credentials for
authenticating access rights (username and password) also
need to be given.
If the connection is Local (that is, the files are sent to a server
present on the same PC), just define the port through which
POLYMATH and the application will communicate.
Once the type of connection has been selected, just click on
Connect to activate the connection (which can be aborted by
clicking on Cancel.
Chapter 8
511

Runtime
Preparation of IT panels before download
The IT panels do not require any particular preparation if
choosing a USB connection. If an ethernet connection is
chosen, the panel must be connected to the network and the
network parameters must be configured as indicated in the
hardware manual Video terminal ITxxx/Control Panel/
Network. Finally, configure the connection gate on the
"Service page/configuration download" page of the terminal
(See hardware manual Video terminal ITxxx/Downloader
Configuration)
Perform the project Download on the IT terminal
When a project is compiled it can be transferred on to the
terminal by means of the Download function; to start transfer,
click on the icon
of the instruments bar (or on the main
menu File->Download). If there are compiled files for the
current project version edited, POLYMATH will display a
window relating to the configuration of the hardware
connection machine-terminal. If however, no files are
compiled with respect the project, POLYMATH will ask the
programmer to perform compilation.
In the window relating to download, it is possible to select the
terminal to send the project files and the relative parameters
to the type of connection to use; types foreseen for the IT
terminal are:
Standard Serial
Ethernet - TCP/IP
Local
USB
http
The USB connection is carried out by connecting, using a
suitable cable, the gates of the machine with POLYMATH
installed and those of the terminal (see chap. 5,
Communication ports page 128).
512
Chapter 8
Runtime
If an Ethernet TCP/IP connection is chosen, specify the
parameters in order to carry out the connection as IP address
and communication gate that must be configured before the
terminal (see chap. 8, Preparation of IT panels before
download page 511).
Once the connection has been selected, click on 'Connect' to
start the connection whilst clicking on 'Cancel', cancels the
operation.
Preparation of the PCs or PC terminals based on the first
download
If an ethernet connection is chosen, connect the PC to the
network and configure the network parameters (refer to the
windows guide or consult the network administrator).
PCUSB ADAPTER
If a SERIAL CAN or PROFIBUS connection is chosen, the ESA
"PCUSBxxxxxxx" product must be used.
The "PCUSBxxxxxxx" product is essential to establish
communication between PC/XS and the PLC provided with a
CAN/DP or SERIAL port.
ESA puts the following order codes at disposal :
PCUSBADP0SP2
PCUSBADP0CAN
PCUSBADP0DP
(RS232/485 serial communication board)

(CAN-BUS communication board)
(PROFIBUS-DP communication board)
In order to perform a project transfer, it is necessary to install

on the PC where the runtime is located, a program called
ESAPOLYMATH Downloader available on installation CD of the
POLYMATH. To install the downloader, follow the simple
instructions provided by the installation guide. At the end of
installation, the program asks if it must always be started with
the start of Windows. If the answer is no it must be manually
activated each time a transfer is to be carried out or runtime
launched.
After having installed the program, the icon is added
automatically inside "Control panel"
RCS_ADAPTER CONTROL PANEL :
Chapter 8
513

Runtime
During installation of the "ESAPOLYMATH Downloader"
application, the drivers necessary for connecting the "PCUSB"
are installed as well.
The drivers are requested the first time the "PCUSBxxxxxxx"
is connected to the PC/XS and are found skimming through
the path :
C\PROGRAM FILES\ESAELETTRONICA SPA\ESAPOLYMATH
DOWNLOADER\DRIVER RCS_ADAPTER.
Once the driver path requested by the application is inserted,
we connect the USB port used in our project (for example
USB1) with the COM to which the "PCUSB" is associated.
This connection is carried out double-clicking the
"RCS_ADAPTER CONTROL PANEL" icon previously described.
At this point, click "APPLY" to save the settings.

If there are problems during the connection, temporarily
deactivate firewall and the antivirus installed on the PC/XS, if
there is one.
Clicking the icon near the system clock in the traybar with the
right key of the mouse, one accesses the program functions :
"Start Up": clicking the new option opens a window that

allows you to select which project to start up. You can
also check a box for starting up the project in automatic
mode.
514
Chapter 8
Runtime
Select the required project and press "Activate"
Press OK to confirm.
"Info": displays the version of the DataModel supported

by the current Runtime
Connection Setting: allows you to configure the
connection parameters by selecting between the serial
or Ethernet port (port 4096), If the serial transfer is
Chapter 8
515

Runtime
chosen, a CVCOM41102 cable must be used. If the
direct ETHERNET transfer is chosen, a CVNET11002
cable (crossed type) must be used. If passing through a
HUB or a SWITCH, a standard network cable must be
used
Start ESA system: start runtime (the project starts after

it has been transferred onto XS/PC)
Stop ESA system: stop runtime
Exit Downloader: close downloader
About: shows information of the downloader versions
PCMACHINEBASE
The whole system regarding Runtime on the PC/XS working
with "ESAPOLYMATH DOWNLOADER" application described
until now, will automatically close after 20 minutes if the USB
Hardware key has not been inserted.
Inserting the "PCMACHINEBASE" key in the XS/PC terminal,
the system could request to insert the drivers to acknowledge
the key. These drivers are found skimming through the
following path :
C\PROGRAM FILES\EUTRONSEC\SMARTKEY DRIVERS
Carry out project Download on the PC or PC terminal based
When a project is compiled it can be transferred on to the
terminal by means of the Download function; to start transfer,
click on the icon
of the instruments bar (or on the main
menu File->Download). If there are compiled files for the
current project version edited, POLYMATH will display a
window relating to the configuration of the hardware
connection machine-terminal. If however, no files are
compiled with respect the project, POLYMATH will ask the
programmer to perform compilation.
516
Chapter 8
Runtime
In the window relating to download, it is possible to select the
relative parameter connection types to be used; the
envisioned connection types for the PC platforms are:
Standard Serial
Ethernet - TCP/IP
Local
USB
http
The serial connection is carried out by connecting, using a

suitable cable, the gates of the machine with POLYMATH
installed and those of the terminal/PC (see chap. 5,
Communication ports page 128).
If an Ethernet TCP/IP connection is chosen, specify the

parameters in order to carry out the connection as IP address
and communication gate that must be configured before the
PC (see chap. 8, Preparation of the PCs or PC terminals based
on the first download page 512).
Once the connection has been selected, click on 'Connect' to
start the connection whilst clicking on 'Cancel', cancels the
operation.
Transferring data
After setting all the connection variables and activated the
connection, POLYMATH checks the status of the terminal. In
particular, there is a check of the space available in the
terminals memory (relative to the needs of the current
project) and status of the projects components.
Chapter 8
517

Runtime
The upper part of the download mask is used to indicate

whether the project being sent is consistent with the type of
terminal being used to receive the transfer. If it is not, the
mask shows an error message.
Following this the details regarding the memory required for

the project and that available on the terminals supports is
shown: the operator can see if there is enough space on the
panel to hold the project files and, if there are problems, an
error message is shown.
Finally, in the lower part there is a list of project components,

the more recent of which (compared with those residing in the
terminal) are highlighted in pink. The support and the path
used for saving the files of the related section can be shown
or the operator can decide to let POLYMATH automatically
allocate the component on the physical supports available on
the panel.
At this point, all the elements on the panel (firmware, project
and all the other components) can be updated or, to save
time, only those elements requiring updating because the
currently used version is more recent than that of the
elements in the terminal.
518
Chapter 8
Runtime
Runtime: transfer of firmware files in the currently used

version of POLYMATH.
Pages: files containing information about the pages
created in the project
Help: files containing information about the help pages
created in the project
Images: the project images are simply copied into this
folder
Configuration: files containing information useful for
running the project properly (.xml component files).
The Scripts added by the user and the password files
can be found here, too.
Recipes: files (.rec) containing information on the
recipes saved in the memory of the VT
Translation: files containing translations of multilingual
project texts and system messages
Log: log files used by the application; this folder, for
example, contains the log files of the login/logout
operations, the alarm history and trend buffer logs.
Font: files containing relative information to fonts used
in the project
Report: files containing the relative information to the
project reports
Documents: empty directory ready to accommodate the
reports in pdf
Project: OPC files useful for managing the projects
communications
VTWinPro: contains general project information (.xml
files)
Font: font files installed and used by the project
After the file download is launched (whether it is partial or total

update) a log window for transfer operations being performed
by POLYMATH is opened :
Chapter 8
519

Runtime
By enabling the "Show details" check box, the file names currently being transferred are displayed :
Next to the download bar the remaining process completion time is displayed.
During panel transfer a message indicating download status is
displayed; after its completion the project execution is launched.
Change
Password
Polymath provides the possibility to set a password on the

panel, necessary then (if configured), to transfer the project.
In order to configure the Main Menu, click on Instruments>Utility downloader->Change Password Downloader CE.
520
Chapter 8
Runtime
At this point, the type of connection with which to

communicate to the panel will be requested and once chosen
the password can be changed.
To remove the password carry out again the procedure listed
above leaving the fields empty.
Execution runtime on XP
Once download is complete, runtime is automatically carried
out.
By means of the ESAPOLYMATH Downloader functions,
runtime can be stopped and restarted:
With regards runtime of Polymath on windows XP, a USB pen

drive is required that acts as a license without which runtime
will not execute. In order to create a project for the PC or any
other platform terminal PC based, no hardware drive is
required. The advanced polymath version with license is
sufficient. The same project can be used on a limited number
of PCs as long as each PC has a hardware drive.
Chapter 8
521

Runtime
Attention: if the drive is withdrawn from the USB gate in which it is

inserted, a message will appear on the terminal: The USB must be
connected while Esaruntime is running retry key check or close
runtime. At this point, re insert the drive in the gate and click on
the retry runtime to execute or cancel to close.
Download the
IT OPERATING
SYSTEM image
In POLYMATH, it is possible to transfer the whole image of the

Windows Operating System CE on the terminal. This
operation is reachable from the main menu clicking on
Instruments->Utility downloader->Update Boot Windows CE
for IT.
It is necessary to set the connection mode as in the case of
project download (see chap. 8, Transferring data page 516).
The loaded images on the panel will overwrite the existing one
for which backup should be carried out before performing this
operation.
Set up an
Ethernet
connection
To update the Boot between the PC and the IT panel, a

crossed ethernet cable is necessary (only possible method),
successively, it is necessary to set on the PC a local network
with the IT panel, setting as IP address : 192.168.100.2 and
as Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
From the Main Menu, click on Instruments->Utility

downloader->Update Boot Windows CE for IT to start the
procedure and follow the instructions.
522
Chapter 8
Runtime
POLYMATH will ask for the previously explained IP address to
be set and to select the file source from which the program will
read the Boot to be transferred.
During the installation of POLYMATH, a file is created on the
PC where the images for the operating systems of various ESA
panel models are copied ready to be downloaded on to the
terminal; generally the image files are found in the main
directory of the POLYMATH in the path \xml\OSImages\IT1xx
(for example for a IT105T, if the installation path has not be
modified, the image is in C:\Program Files\ESA
Elettronica\ESAPOLYMATH\xml\OSImages\IT105
TFT\NK.bin).
After selecting the source from the Boot File to transfer, press
the NEXT button and switch on the IT panel so that transfer
can begin.
Once transfer of the file is terminated, the IT panel should be

left on until the initial page is displayed.
Chapter 8
523

Runtime
At this point, if the image is different to that already installed,

connect a Mause USB because the panel will lose calibration.
Two error Pop ups will display, click ok.
Entering in CONTROL PANEL->STYLUS, it will be necessary to
calibrate the touch screen again.
Downloading
the image of
the Operating
System for VT
CE
POLYMATH offers the possibility of transferring the entire

Windows CE Operating System image to the terminal. This
can be done using the main menu by clicking on Tools>Update OS Image OS in panel.
The type of connection has to be defined as in the case of the
project download (see chap. 8, Transferring data page 516).
The image loaded onto the panel overwrites the existing one
(which should be backed up before running this operation).
While installing POLYMATH, the images of the operating
systems for the various models of ESA panels are copied onto
the PC ready to be downloaded onto the terminal. Generally
the image files are in the main directory of POLYMATH in the
path \xml\OSImages\VTxxx. For example, if the installation
path has not been changed, the image for VT595 will be in
C:\Program Files\ESA
Elettronica\ESAPOLYMATH\xml\OSImages\VT595\NK800.bin.
Establishing an
Ethernet
connection
ESA panels with Windows CE operating system allow a

connection to be made to an Ethernet network by means of
just a few simple steps. After connecting the terminal to the
network using the appropriate network cable, just define the
connection as set out below :
524
Chapter 8
Runtime
From the initial page of the terminal, click on "Control

Panel" :
From the "Control Panel, click on the "Network" icon :
Use the next window to insert the details by which the

panel is to be recognised within the network.
Select the "Specify an IP address" option and insert an
IP address and a Subnet Mask address. These
parameters must be used in order to interact with the
terminal inside of the network (for example,
Downloading a project via Ethernet, see chapter,
"Download the project on the VTCE panels" on page
290") :
Chapter 8
525

Runtime
Note: To check that the panel has been correctly set in the Ethernet
network, the operator is advised to perform a Ping operation
using a different terminal in the network. For example, using a
Windows PC, click on Start->Run->and write ping
***.***.***.*** replacing the asterisks with the IP address
assigned to the panel. A command window for checking the actual
connection and its speed will appear.
Naturally, to have a PC interact with the panel via Ethernet the

PC also needs to be configured to access the network with its
own IP address (the configuration is identical to that seen for
the terminal).
Sharing folders between panel and PC
It can sometimes prove useful to share folders in a network to
make them accessible to a Windows CE panel in the same
network (after having first carried out the configuration
indicated in the preceding section).
In this section we shall give an example of how to access a PC
folder with Windows XP using a POLYMATH project.
First of all create a new folder on your PCs hard disk
(e.g. C:\); we will rename this folder
Shared_Polymath and then select it by clicking with
the right-hand mouse key as indicated below :
526
Chapter 8
Runtime
Now select the option Sharing and Protection from the

resulting menu. This takes you to the window for the
sharing settings.
Now move to the Sharing tab as shown in the figure
below:
We select the option Share this folder; we then leave

the sharing name unchanged (leaving the default one
Chapter 8
527

Runtime
corresponding to the name we chose for the folder, in

our case Shared_Polymath).
Finally we click on the Authorization button to define
which users can have access to the folder (for details
regarding network users, consult your network
administrator) and which actions can be performed :
Using the lower part of the window, we select all 3

options available. In this way outside users can read
and write the files contained in this folder.
At this point we click on Apply and Ok in this window
and then on Apply and Ok in the window for assigning
the properties of the folder.
After making these settings, the folder C:\Shared_Polymath

will be accessible from any Windows CE panel connected to
the same network. In particular, the folder can be reached by
the panel by digit ting the following path :
\\NOMEPC\c$\Shared_Polymath
where NOMEPC indicates the ID name of ones personal
computer within the network (this name is given in the
System Properties of the PC under the option Name of
Computer or it must be requested from the network
administrator). The code c$ indicates the drive on which the
shared folder can be found.
A typical example of this function is when exporting recipes,
alarms or trend buffers directly to a PC so that they can be
dealt with more easily. To do this just carry out the export by
indicating the path \\NOMEPC\c$\Shared_Polymath\file.xml
528
Chapter 8
Runtime
in the Scripts or when configuring the function predefined in
POLYMATH.
Exporting files to various supports
After configuring the panel for Ethernet access or for sharing
folders, this connection can be used for exporting data from
POLYMATH projects. And therefore it is possible to use the
function for exporting and importing recipes, alarms or trend
buffers to various devices.
For example, to export data to a physical support other than
the main disk (like a mass storage card or USB key), just
specify the name of the file including the complete path (e.g.
Hard Disk2\fileexportato.xml) in the destination file path.
Online tools
The function Online tools allows several operations between

PC and HMI. For example it's possible to up/download files
between the 2 devices.
The function Online tools is placed in the Main Men by clicking on Tools->Utility downloader->Online Tools :
the following window will appear :
Chapter 8
529

Runtime
After having choosing the kind of connection (USB, in our case), just click onto Connect to establish the connection
between PC and HMI. The following window will appear :
From the previous window it's possible to execute the following operations :
Transfer : it allows to transfer a project previously open

Panel Explorer: it allows to view the files and the folders
in the HMI :
530
Chapter 8
Runtime
Compare memory: throughout Polymath is possible to

compare the memory of the HMI with respect of the memory used by the project (size of memory used and size
of memory free) :
Compare files : It compares files of a PC-project with

the files stored on the HMI, by clicking on the key Report Print is possible to print a list of the files :
Chapter 8
531

Runtime
Transfer files/Backup original project : The function has

2 sub-menus :
1- Transfer files to the panel : it allows to transfer files from

a HMI
2- Download files from the panel: it allows to transfer files
into a HMI
By selecting the first option Transfer files to the panel (with

the open project) the following window will appear :
532
Chapter 8
Runtime
In the window above you can see the following options :
CREATING BACKUP OF THE PROJECT ->you can decide

to create a backup of the project on the panel.
COMPRESSING THE PROJECT IN A ZIP FILE ->you can
zip the backup-file
PROTECTING THE ZIP-FILE BY A PASSWORD ->you can
protect the zip-file by a password
By clicking on Next the following window will appear :
In the window above there are the following buttons :
Add file/s ->Run the procedure again for new files to

add.
Remove row -> select the row and delete it
Delete file/s ->Remove files and folders in the panel.
It is useful to get part of the memory free.
Chapter 8
533

Runtime
Modify the destination folder ->just change the path

of the files.
By clicking on Add File you can choose the file to store into
the panel.
Once selecting the file to send, just choose the folder of destination. In the sample we've selected the folder Hard Disk.
Just click OK :
By clicking on Next the download will start. At the end just

press End :
534
Chapter 8
Runtime
Change the password downloader : it allows to change

the password downloader (blanked by default) :
Compile project : it compiles the project.
By selecting the second option Download files from the panel

the following window will appear :
Chapter 8
535

Runtime
In the window above there are the following buttons :

Add file/s -> Run the procedure again for new files to add.
Remove file/s -> Remove files and folders in the panel. It is
useful to get part of the memory free.
Modify the destination folder -> just change the path of the
files.
By selecting a folder of the panel you can choose the files to

copy.
536
Chapter 8
Runtime
By clicking the button Next Polymath will copy the selected

files in the folder selected :
Backup /
Restore
A different way to perform backup project is obtained from the

terminal control panel.
Backup
From the initial page of the terminal, click on Control Panel :
Chapter 8
537

Runtime
From the Control Panel, click on the Backup icon :
This window opens :
As you can see from the previous figure, the user can carry
out "Backup" or "Restore" (the latter option is discussed later), it is also possible to only backup the project, both the
538
Chapter 8
Runtime
project and recipes (alarms, trends, variables), or to backup
any combination of the 3 options (Run Time, Project, History).
In our example the Backup will be performed enabling all 3
options :
After having enabled the desired option boxes, click on the

browse key
to choose where to save the Backup file (in the
example the folder "My Documents" is chosen :
At this point we must name the file (123) :
Chapter 8
539

Runtime
Press the Start Backup key to save :
If everything has been completed properly, the wording

Backup Completed appears :
Restore
(Remote panel
update)
The Restore function is very useful when needing to load a

RunTime project and/or application on an "IT" terminal
without needing to use POLYMATH.
A practical example is when needing to send a project to a
remote customer that does not have the POLYMATH software
available.
First thin, the file to be sent must be created:
From POLYMATH, go top the main menu bar, specifically in
Tools/ Utilities Downloader / Backup-Restore:
540
Chapter 8
Runtime
Choose the terminal family (in our case the IT family) then
click on "Next" :
In the following image, enable the Panel Format Backup" option (only offline) and choose if the Project option, the Run
Time option or both at the same time are to be enabled then
click on Next :
Chapter 8
541

Runtime
In the next screen, choose the panel where the project is to

be saved and then enable the "Compile project" option. In the
second part of the screen, click on the "Browse" key to choose
where the project copy is to be saved, then click on "Next" :
The following image will appear, click on "Next" to save :
542
Chapter 8
Runtime
At the end, click on End :
At this point the file is ready to be sent to the "remote client",

after receiving it they must copy it on a "USB drive" and insert
it in the USB drive present on the "IT" file.
From the initial page of the terminal, click on Control Panel :
Chapter 8
543

Runtime
From the Control Panel, click on the Backup icon :
This window opens :
Enable the Restore option and then click on the browse key
to locate the file containing the project to be loaded on the
panel :
544
Chapter 8
Runtime
Locate the "Hard Disk2" folder :
Double click on folder, then select the file to be loaded :
Choose options to be enabled (Run Time, Project or both) :
Chapter 8
545

Runtime
Click on "Start Restore", the following image is displayed where the user is warned that during "Restore" all existing files in
directories involved in the process are replaced with the new
files, click "YES" to continue :
If everything has been completed properly, the wording Restore Completed appears :
546
Chapter 8
Runtime
Click "OK" to go back to Control Panel, where the project just
loaded can be launched by clicking on "Start ESA Application :
It's possible to execute backup/restore operations on both

HMI and PCs.
Such function is in Main Menu, Strumenti->Utilit downloader->Backup\Restore :
By clicking on Transferring files/Backup source project, the

following image will appears :
Chapter 8
547

Runtime
In the next window you can select the family of the panels: ITPC or VT :
Now the user can choose either to download the files onto the
panel or viceversa (in our sample we download files PC->HMI), if a project is open the following window will appear :
548
Chapter 8
Runtime
In the second part of the window, you can choose where to

store the project through the button Browse. Now click
"Next :
In the first submask, the option Connection Type allows to

select the kind of communication (serial COMPORT, ethernet,
USB, ecc.) :
Chapter 8
549

Runtime
By clicking End you end the procedure.

Panel Reset
"Panel Reset" is an application of the terminal control panel

which allows to cancel all that has been transferred onto the
Hard Disk.
From the initial page of the terminal, click on "Control Panel" :
From the "Control Panel, click on the "Reset" icon :
550
Chapter 8
Runtime
From the image above, the user can choose between 2 options:
Remove project and runtime -> choosing this option,

both the project and the runtime that have been transferred from Polymath onto the terminal will be cancelled.
Complete terminal disk reset -> choosing this option,
the whole content of the "Hard Disk" folder will be cancelled, with the exception of the files that are essential
for operating the terminal.
Choosing one of the two options described above and clicking

"Delete", the safety password will be requested, since important information contained in the terminal is about to be cancelled :
Chapter 8
551

Runtime
The default password is "1234". If wanted, it can be changed.

After having typed in the password, confirm pressing "Send"
on the "Input Panel" keyboard.
552
Chapter 8
Runtime
Chapter 9
553
Scripts
9.
Scripts
POLYMATH allows the programmer to add to the project whole

programmes or functions for managing and editing all the
applications components (graphic objects, variables, recipes
etc.) in runtime. Thanks to this, users can complement the set
of predefined functions supplied by POLYMATH with those they
have created according to their needs. User scripts can be
called up in a project when a button is pressed, when an event
is triggered or in response to being called by other scripts.
Scripts can be inserted into a project using Project Explorer
(see chap. 5, Scripts page 228) and their code can be
written using simple programming/scripting languages like
VBScript.
For details concerning programming techniques (variable
declarations, operators, conditional structures and predefined
functions) the user is advised to consult specialist manuals
relating to the language to be used.
In this chapter we will give information relating to the
properties and methods that can be used in POLYMATH scripts
with relevant examples.
Editing codes
In POLYMATH once a script has been inserted using Project

Explorer (see chap. 5, Scripts page 228) the editor page for
writing the code can be used.
The editor runs a real-time check of the syntax of the code,
immediately posting an on-screen warning should it detect
any imprecision in the formulation of the instructions.
554
Chapter 9
Scripts
As indicated in the figure above, a red circle is shown to

indicate the existence of an error. When the mouse cursor is
placed on it, a complete description of the problem is put on
screen. The errors and their related descriptions are also listed
the moment the project is validated and compiled.
The editor facilities the drafting of the code, showing too the
list of objects and properties available for the object that has
been inserted (Intellisense mechanism). This list appears
whenever the user presses the separation point between the
objects or between an object and the method (or property) to
be called. When the code is edited, the objects are, in fact,
separated from their respective children or methods by the
insertion of a point . (dot). There follows a chart showing the
hierarchy of objects accessible by script.
Chapter 9
555
Scripts
Therefore, to indicate an element of the page, we use an

instruction of the type:
ESAHMI.ESAPAGE("Page").ESACNTRL("Label").ControlWid
th=67
In the case of those objects that require a passage of the

name of the reference object (for example, ESAPAGE,
ESACNTRL, etc.), after the opening of the brackets just press
the ? key of the keyboard to obtain the list of objects that can
be inserted.
The following sections of this chapter will deal with the various
objects accessible by Script and set out their properties and
functions, giving where necessary practical examples of their
use.
556
Chapter 9
Scripts
Note: Some properties mentioned in the following paragraphs are

described as being in read-only mode when using Scripts; for many
of these properties, however, there is no physical protection, so
there is the possibility that the script will overwrite their value. This
overwrite operation is, in any case, not advised. It is thus the
programmers responsibility to avoid the properties indicated as
being read-only (R) being edited by the scripts.
Key to types of variable and syntactical premises

The following sections will refer to properties and methods
characteristic of objects. The table below gives a rapid key to
the abbreviations that will be used.
Table 1: Key to Abbreviations
Variable
Abbreviatio
n
Whole
Int
String
Str
Boolean
Bool
Long
Long
Double
Dbl
RGB (color,
returned by the
RGB function)
RGB
Variant
Var
Read, readonly
RW
Read&Write,
read and write
If a subroutine (method returning no value) requires an input

parameter, the passage can be achieved by using brackets or
by leaving them out:
ESAHMI.ESAMSGBOX Text
ESAHMI.ESAMSGBOX(Text)
When a subroutine requires more than one input parameter,
these parameters must be written consecutively and
Chapter 9
557
Scripts
separated by a comma (without brackets) as shown in the

following example:
ESAHMI.ESAPAGEMGR.ShowPageByNumber 32,0
If a function (a method returning a value) requires one of
more input parameters, a passage must be made using
brackets, as follows:
a=ESAHMI.ESATAG("Tag_Array").GetTagBitValue(1)
a=ESAHMI.ESAPAGEMGR.GetTAGBuffer
(RecipeType,RecipeName)
Use of functions and subroutines
It is possible to insert into ones projects functions and
subroutines (the former return a value while the latter do not)
that can be called by a script at any moment. The definition of
these functions happens as with normal scripts, only that it is
necessary to specify the type of input and output parameters.
After creating the script using Project Explorer, enter in the

General mask the type of output value (None if it is a
subroutine) and enter the type in question in the list of input
parameters.
ESAMSGBOX Method
The ESAMSGBOX method serves to make a message window
appear on the terminal with the value provided.
558
Chapter 9
Scripts
This method is useful for debugging the script as it allows the

user to view, for example, the value of a variable at a given
moment of its execution.
According to the simplest syntax for invoking that method, the
passage of a value (whether constant or variable) is as set out
in the following example:
ESAHMI.ESAMSGBOX(Message Text)
which in Runtime makes the window containing the message
Message Text appear. If, on the other hand, we use the
following syntax:
ESAHMI.ESAMSGBOX(VariableName)
in Runtime a window containing the current value of the
variable VariableName) appears.
Alternatively the method can be invoked with the passage of
two values; in this case the first parameter indicates the string
to be displayed while the second parameter must be a string
that then appears in the title bar of the window. See example
below:
ESAHMI.ESAMSGBOX Message Text,Message Title
will make a window containing the message Message Text
appear, while the title appearing in the bar above this window
will be Message Title.
Warning: The ESAMSGBOX method is advised only for debugging

the script, or rather during its testing. For the final project, when
messages are to be presented on screen for the operator, we strongly
advise the use of pop-up pages (whose appearance can be controlled
using Scripts).
Warning: To execute scripts relating to a variable the continuous

update option must be enabled during the setting of the variable in
POLYMATH (see chap. 5, Device page 142). In addition, tags can
only use the methods and properties relating to thresholds if these
have already been assigned.
Chapter 9
559
Scripts
Methods of the ESATAG objects accessible from

ScriptESAUSERMGR
Table 2: Methods of the ESATAG objects accessible from Script
Method
Description
OUT
Returns the IC variable

code inserted under string
form
Long
String
GetId
Gets the code type of the

value corresponding to the
type of tag
Integ
er
String
GetDataType

"rough" value (value inside
the device) from the
variable
Integ
er
String
GetRawDataT
ype
IsInvalid
Checks if the tag value is

not valid
Bool
ean
String
IsOffline
Checks if the tag is

correctly Off Line
Bool
ena
String
IsOffscan
Checks if the tag is

correctly Off Scan
Bool
ean
String
Checks if the tag value had

been forced whilst in Off
Scan
Bool
ean
String
IsForced
Checks if the threshold of

the tag is forbidden
Bool
ean
String
Set the tag to the Off Scan

status
String(tag
name)
Boolean(O
ffscan)
Set the threshold of the

tag to the forbidden status
String(Tag
name)
Boolean(I
nhibit)
GetStringLen
Gets the length configured

of the tag's string
Long
String
GetFillingType
Gets the filling assigned to

the code of the tag's string
Integ
er
String
IsInhibit
SetOffscan
SetInhibit
IN
560
Chapter 9
Scripts

Method
Description
OUT
GetFillingChar
Gets the fillings character

of the tag's string
Integ
er
String
Changes the fillings

character of the tag's
string
String(Tag
name)
Integer(Fil
lchar)
Gets the lower limit of the

operations in entry of a
numerical tag
Doub
le
String
GetInputValue
UpperLimit
Gets the upper limit of the

operations in entry of a
numerical tag
Dbl
String
GetInputRaw
ValueLowerLi
mit
Gets the lower limit of the

operations in exit of a
numerical tag
Dbl
String
GetInputRaw
ValueUpperLi
mit
Gets the upper limit of the

operations in exit of a
numerical tag
Dbl
String
GetConversion
Type
Gets the conversion type

code of a numerical tag
Integ
er
String
Gets the parameter of the

mathematical conversion
of the value of a numerical
tag
Dbl
String
GetConversion
X1Par

tag
Dbl
String
GetConversion
Y1Par

tag
Dbl
String
GetConversion
X2Par

tag
Dbl
String
GetConversion
Y2Par
SetFillingChar
GetInputValue
LowerLimitGe
tTagThrsDevR
eference
IN
Chapter 9
561
Scripts

Method
Description
OUT
SetInputValue
LowerLimit
Changes the lower limit of

the operations in entry of a
numerical tag
String(Tag
name)
Dbl(Limit)
Changes the upper limit of

the operations in entry of a
numerical tag
String(Tag
name)
Double(Li
mit)
Changes the lower limit of

the operations in exit of a
numerical tag
String(Tag
name)
Double(Li
mit)
Changes the upper limit of

the operations in exit of a
numerical tag
String(tag
name)
Double(Li
mit)
Changes the parameter of

the mathematical
conversion of the value of
a numerical tag
String(Tag
name)
Double(Co
nvPatamet
er)

the mathematical
a numerical tag
String(Tag
name)
Double(Co
nvPatamet
er)
SetConversion
X2Par

the mathematical
a numerical tag
String(Tag
name)
Double(Co
nvPatamet
er)
SetConversion
X2Par

the mathematical
a numerical tag
String(Tag
name)
Double(Co
nvPatamet
er)
GetCurrent
Value
Reads the current value

saved in the tag
Varia
nt
String
SetInputValue
UpperLimit
SetInputRaw
ValueLower
Limit
SetInputRaw
ValueUpper
Limit
SetConversion
X1Par
SetConversion
Y1Par
IN
562
Chapter 9
Scripts

Method
Description
OUT
GetCurrent
RawValue
Read the current "rough"

value (value inside the
device) saved in the tag
Varia
nt
String
ReadValue
Read the value of the tag

from the device
Varia
nt
String
Writes a new value of the

tag in the device
String(Tag
name)
Variant(Va
lue)
Reads from the device the

single element value of the
tag's array
Varia
nt
String(Tag
name)
Integer(In
dex)
Writes from the device the

single element value of the
tag's array
String(tag
Name)
Integer(In
dex)
Variant(Va
lue)
Reads from the device the

single bit value from an
array or the numerical
variable
Bool
ean
String(Tag
name)
Long(Inde
x)
Writes on the device the

single bit value from an
array or the numerical
variable
String(Tag
name)
Long(Inde
x)
Boolean(V
alue)
GetThreshold
Type

configured threshold
Integ
er
String
GetThreshold
State
Gets the current state of

the tag's threshold
Integ
er
String
Gets the current specific

level state of the threshold
Integ
er
String(Tag
name)
Integer(Le
vel)
WriteValue
ReadElement
WriteElement
ReadBit
WriteBit
GetThreshold
LevelState
IN
Chapter 9
563
Scripts
The object
ESAUSERMGR
This object offers functions relating to the user currently

logged onto the terminal. The following table describes the
methods that can be used with this object using a syntax of
ESAHMI.ESAUSERMGR.GetCurrentUser()
ESAUSERMGR methods accessible with Scripts
Table 3: ESAUSERMGR methods accessible with Scripts
Method
Description
OUT
IN
GetCurrentU
serName
Returns the name of the

user currently logged in
Str
GetCurrentU
serLevel
Returns the level of the

user currently logged in
Int
Long
Str
ExportUser
Log
The ExportUserLog function is used to control access to Password protected

objects. With this function
it is possible to export the
user log in CSV format with
a new script;
By opening file xxxxx.csv
with excel, registrations
will be shown
of the users which have
carried out password protected accesses
ExportUserLog script example :

ESAHMI.ESAUSERMGR.ExportUserLog \xxxxxx.csv,2
The object
ESAALARMMGR
This object offers functions relating to the management of the

alarms in the project. The following table describes the
ESAHMI.ESAALARMMGR.ClearAlarm(Alarm_1)
564
Chapter 9
Scripts
ESAALARMMGR methods accessible with Scripts

Table 4: ESAALARMMGR methods accessible with Scripts
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Alarm
Name
(Str)
AlarmOn
Raises named alarm with

lag set using POLYMATH.
Needs as an input
parameter the name of the
alarm to be acquired. Bear
in mind that you cannot
activate in Runtime the
event ON for an alarm
whose status is already ON
(the status must first be
changed to OFF)
Alarm
Name
(Str)
RaiseAlarm
Raises named alarm

without lag set using
POLYMATH. Needs as an
input parameter the name
of the alarm to be
acquired. Bear in mind
that you cannot activate in
Runtime the event ON for
an alarm whose status is
already ON (the status
must first be changed to
OFF)
ClearAlarm
Forces the named alarm

setting its status as
terminated (OFF). Needs
as an input parameter the
name of the alarm to be
terminated
Alarm
Name
(Str)
Chapter 9
565
Scripts

Method
Description
OUT
IN
Ack
Instances
Acknowledges all the

instances of the named
alarm (whether of
AlarmISA or OnlyAck
type), that is, if allowed by
the settings of the alarm
relating to the
acknowledgement of
multiple instances. Needs
name of the alarm, of the
operator and of the station
from which the request is
made (valid parameter in
the case of a network)
Alarm
Name
(Str)
Operator
(Str)
Station
(Str)
AckGroup

instances of the alarm
(whether of AlarmISA or
OnlyAck type) of the
named group, that is, if
allowed by the settings of
the alarm relating to global
acknowledgement . Needs
Group
Name
(Str)
Operator
(Str)
Station
(Str)
Operator
(Str)
Station
(Str)
AckGlobal

alarms (whether of
AlarmISA or OnlyAck
type), that is, if allowed by
the settings of the alarm
relating to global
acknowledgement. Needs
566
Chapter 9
Scripts
The object
ESARECIPEMGR
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Registratio
nID (Long)
Operator
(Str)
Station
(Str)
AckAlarm
Acknowledges the alarm

specified by the first input
parameter (whether it is
AlarmISA type or
OnlyAck). Needs as an
input parameter the
number with which the
alarm has been registered
(ID), the operators name
and that of the station
FileName
(Str)
FileType
(Int)
Alarms
Export
Exports active alarms to

the file in main directory of
the terminal. Needs two
input parameters, one
relating to the name to
give to the file and one
(whole) relating to its
type; the possible file
extensions are:
(FileType=1) XML
(FileType=2) CSV
FileName
(Str)
FileType
(Int)
History
Export
Exports history alarms to

the file in main directory of
the terminal. Needs two
input parameters, one
relating to the name to
give to the file and one
(whole) relating to its
type; the possible file
extensions are:
(FileType=1) XML
(FileType=2) CSV
History
Delete
Cancels the buffer of alarm

history and needs no input
parameter

recipes in the project. The following table describes the
ESAHMI.ESARECIPEMGR.GetTAGBuffer
RecipeType,variable1
Chapter 9
567
Scripts
ESARECIPEMGR methods accessible with Scripts

Table 5: ESARECIPEMGR methods accessible with Scripts
The object
ESARECIPETYP
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Str
GetTAG
Buffer

tag buffer related to a field
of the recipe; needs as
input parameters the
name of the type of recipe
and the field buffer
Structure
Name
(Str)
FieldName
(Str)
Structure
Name
(Str)
ClearTAG
Buffer
Clears the buffer of all

recipe variables (including
ID, name and comment):
the numerical variables are
set at 0, the strings at ;
it needs as an input
parameter the type of
recipe
Bool
Recipe
Compare
Returns a Boolean value

indicating whether the two
recipes indicated are the
similar (1) or different (0);
the test is carried out on
the versions that have
been saved. Requires as
an input parameter the
name of the recipe type
and of two recipes to
compare
Structure
Name
(Str)
Recipe
Name1
(Str)
Recipe
Name2
(Str)
IsActive
Indicates if it is in course
and therefore a transfer is
active
Integ
er
Structure
Name
(Str)

recipe types in the project. The following table describes the
ESAHMI.ESARECIPETYP.GetFirstRecipeTypeName()
568
Chapter 9
Scripts
ESARECIPETYP methods accessible with Scripts

Table 6: ESARECIPETYP methods accessible with Scripts
The object
ESARECIPEARC
Method
Description
OUT
IN
GetFirst
RecipeType
Name

first recipe type (in
ascending order of the IDs
set using POLYMATH)
Str
Str
GetNextt
RecipeType
Name

recipe type after the one
just displayed (in
ascending order of the IDs
set using POLYMATH).
Requires the method
GetFirstRecipeTypeName
to have been called at least
once

filing of recipes in the project. The following table describes
the methods that can be used with this object using a syntax
of
ESAHMI.ESARECIPEARC.RecipeImport(filename.xml)
ESARECIPEARC methods accessible with Scripts
Table 7: ESARECIPEARC methods accessible with Scripts
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Str
Structur
Name
(Str)
GetFirst
RecipeName

first recipe in the terminal
belonging to the type
specified. Needs as an
input parameter the type
of recipe whose list is to be
examined (in chronological
order of the insertion of
the recipes).
Chapter 9
569
Scripts

Method
Description
OUT
IN
Str
Structur
Name
(Str)
GetNext
RecipeName

next recipe in the terminal
belonging to the type
specified. Needs as an
of recipe whose list is to be
examined (in chronological
order of the insertion of
the recipes). The method
GetFirstRecipeName has to
have been called at least
once
Delete
Recipe
Deletes the recipe

specified by the
parameters as an input
parameter. Requires: the
recipe type name, the
recipe name and a Boolean
variable indicating whether
the user must confirm the
operation (1) or whether
deletion is automatic (0)
Structur
Name
(Str)
Recipe
Name
(Str)
UserFlag
(Bool)
Bool
RecipeExists
Returns a Boolean value

indicating whether the
recipe referred to exists
(1) or not (0). The test is
carried out on thee recipes
saved. Requires as an
of recipe and the name of
the recipe to be checked
Structur
Name
(Str)
Recipe
Name
(Str)
570
Chapter 9
Scripts
The object
ESARECIPETRF
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Int
Filename
(Str)
Structur
Name
(Str)
RecipeList
(Str)
Recipe
Export
Exports the recipes

referred to in the input
parameters. Necessary
specifications: the name of
the destination file (.xml or
.csv. If an empty string is
provided, the name can be
assigned in Runtime), the
recipe type name and the
list of recipes to be
inserted (names separated
by the TAB character on
the keyboard). If one of
the two parameters (or
both) is an empty string,
all recipes are exported
without consideration to
their type or name
Int
Filename
(Str)
Recipe
Import
Imports the recipes

contained in the file (.xml
or .csv) indicated by the
input string. If the input
string is empty, when this
method is called in
Runtime the window for
exporting files is shown to
allow a search for the file
from which to import the
recipe
This object offers functions relating to the transfer of recipes

the project. The following table describes the methods that
can be used with this object using a syntax of
ESAHMI.ESARECIPETRF.RecipeBufferUpload
RecipeType,1
Chapter 9
571
Scripts
ESARECIPETRF methods accessible with Scripts

Table 8: ESARECIPETRF methods accessible with Scripts
Method
Description
OUT
IN
LoadRecipe
Loads the recipe specified

by the input parameter
into the video buffer. It is
necessary to provide: the
type of recipe, the name of
the recipe and a Boolean
the loading is automatic
(0)
Structure
Name
(Str)
Recipe
Name
(Str)
UserFlag
(Bool)
SaveRecipe
Saves the data in the video

buffer into the recipe
specified by the input
parameter. It is necessary
to provide: the type of
recipe, the name of the
recipe and a Boolean
the loading is automatic
(0)
Structure
Name
(Str)
Recipe
Name
(Str)
UserFlag
(Bool)
Recipe
Download
Downloads onto a device

the recipe specified by the
input parameter. It is
type of recipe, the name of
the recipe and a Boolean
the download must follow
synchronization (1) or not
(0)
StructureN
ame (Str)
RecipeNa
me (Str)
SyncFlag
(Bool)
572
Chapter 9
Scripts
Table 8: ESARECIPETRF methods accessible with Scripts
The object
ESAPIPEMGR
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Recipe
Buffer
Download
Downloads the video

buffer onto the device
corresponding to the
recipe specified by the
input parameter. It is
type of recipe and a
Boolean variable indicating
whether the download
must follow
(0)
Structure
Name
(Str)
SyncFlag
(Bool)
Recipe
Buffer
Upload
Uploads the video buffer

from the device
corresponding to the
recipe indicated by the
input parameters. It is
type of recipe and a
Boolean variable indicating
whether the download
must follow
(0)
Structure
Name
(Str)
SyncFlag
(Bool)
This object offers functions relating to the Pipelines in the

project. The following table describes the methods that can be
used with this object using a syntax of
ESAHMI.ESAPIPEMGR.StartPipelineByNumber(2)
ESAPIPEMGR methods accessible with Scripts
Table 9: ESAPIPEMGR methods accessible with Scripts
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Starts the Pipeline

indicated by the input
parameter; needs the
string containing the name
of the Pipeline to be
provided
Start
PipelineBy
Name
Pipeline
Name
(Str)
Chapter 9
573
Scripts

Method
Description
OUT
IN
Starts the Pipeline

number relating to the
Pipeline ID
Start
PipelineBy
Number
PipelineID
(Int)
PipelineNa
me (Str)
StopPipeline
ByName
Stops the Pipeline

string containing the name
of the Pipeline to be
provided
StopPipeline
ByNumber
Stops the Pipeline

Pipeline ID
PipelineID
(Int)
Write
PipelineBy
Name
Forces the writing of the

Pipeline indicated by the
input parameter (also if
the Pipeline has been
stopped); the string
containing the name of the
Pipeline must be provided
Pipeline
Name
(Str)
PipelineID
(Int)
Write
PipelineBy
Number
Forces the writing of the

Pipeline indicated by the
input parameter (also if
the Pipeline has been
stopped); needs the
Pipeline ID to be provided
Int
Pipeline
Name
(Str)
GetPipeline
StatusBy
Name
Returns an indication of
the status of the pipeline
parameter; the string
containing the name of the
Pipeline must be provided.
The complete returned
data will have one of the
following values and
meanings:
1 - Inactive Pipeline
2 - Active Pipeline
3 - Disconnected Pipeline
(no communication)
574
Chapter 9
Scripts
The object
ESATIMER
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Int
PipelineID
(Int)
GetPipeline
StatusBy
Number
Returns an indication of
the status of the pipeline
parameter; the number
relating to the ID of the
Pipeline must be
transferred. The complete
returned data will have
one of the following values
and meanings:
1 - Inactive Pipeline
2 - Active Pipeline
3 - Disconnected Pipeline
(no communication)
This object offers functions relating to the timers in the

project. The following table describes the methods that can be
used with this object using a syntax of the type
var=ESAHMI.ESATIMER(nomeTimer).State
ESAHMI.ESATIMER(nomeTimer).Stop()
ESATIMER properties accessible with Scripts
Table 10: ESATIMER properties accessible with Scripts
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Defines Timer counting mode;

possible values of this property
are:
1 - Ascending (0 to Duration)
2 - Descending (Duration to 0)
Long
Direction
Count
Long
Duration
Defines the duration of the Timer.

The meaning of this value
depends on the type of Timer:
- if it is Once Only or Normal, the
unit of duration is 1/10 second
- if it is Single alarm, the duration
is a Date and Time expressed as
the number of seconds from 1/1/
1970
- if it is AlarmTime mode, the
duration is the current time of day
expressed a number of seconds
past midnight
Chapter 9
575
Scripts
Table 10: ESATIMER properties accessible with Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Long
Mode
Defines the Timer mode; possible

values of this property are:
1 - Once onlt
2 - Normal
3 - Single alarm
4 - AlarmTime
Long
State
Defines the current state of the

Timer; possible values of this
property are:
0 - Not Active
1 - Counting
2 - Terminated
3 - Suspended
Count
Indicates the current position of

the counter
Long
ESATIMER methods accessible with Scripts

Table 11: ESATIMER methods accessible with Scripts
The object
ESATRENDMGR
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Sets the duration value to

correspond with the input
value. Returns duration set
for timer
Long
SetTimer
Value
Duration
(Long)
Starts the timer; returns

the value of the start-timer
activity
Long
Start
Stops the timer; returns

the value of the stop-timer
activity
Long
Stop
Suspends the timer;

returns the value of the
suspend-timer activity
Long
Suspend
ESATRENDMGR gives access to certain properties and

methods that are useful for managing Trend Buffers.
576
Chapter 9
Scripts
ESATRENDMGR properties accessible with Scripts

It is important to emphasize that the properties offered by
ESATRENDMGR are only available as Read-only and the Trend
buffer ID that the following code lines refer to must be defined
at the beginning of the Script (or at least before using the
properties).
To exemplify this, we will analyze the following code lines:
ESAHMI.ESATRENDMGR.TrendId=5
a=ESAHMI.ESATRENDMGR.Name
ESAHMI.ESATRENDMGR.TrendId=1
b=ESAHMI.ESATRENDMGR.Name
After performing the 4 instructions listed above, variable a
will contain the name of the Trend buffer with ID=5, while
variable b will contain the name of the Trend buffer with
ID=1. (POLYMATH assigns the IDs during the editing of the
Trend buffer).
Table 12: ESATRENDMGR properties accessible with Scripts
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
TrendId
This is a unique code identifying

the trend selected
Long
Str
Name
This is the name of the Trend

buffer selected. It is unique in
that two Trend buffers with the
same name cannot exist
Long
Type
Defines the type of variable

assigned to the Trend buffer
selected. The possible values of
this property are: 0 - Single
value; 1 - Array
This is the name of the variable
assigned to the Trend buffer
selected
Str
SourceTag
Long
StrobeType
This is a code identifying the

event to start the acquisition of
new sample readings for the
Buffer selected. Possible codes
are:
0 ONTIMER
1 ONSTROBERISE
2 ONSTROBEFALL
3 ONCOMMAND
4 ONTAG
Chapter 9
577
Scripts
Table 12: ESATRENDMGR properties accessible with Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Used only if StrobeType has a

value of 1 or 2; indicates the
name of the variable that triggers
the acquisition
Str
StrobeTag
Used only if StrobeType has a

value of 0. This is the Timer
identity code used by the Trend
Long
StrobeTimer
Long
BufferSize
Represents the maximum number

of sample readings that can be
saved in the Buffer selected
(value set in POLYMATH). With
Array-type trends, this value is an
exact multiple of the array
dimension
Samples
Num
Represents the number of sample

readings currently in the Buffer
selected
Long
Long
Warning
Level
Defines the percentage threshold

of the number of samples for
which the OnWarningLevel event
is generated for the buffer
selected (value set in
POLYMATH).
Bool
Enabled
This is a Boolean flag indicating

the active state of the buffer
selected. If at 0 the trend
activities are ignored, while if at
1, the trend functions regularly
Long
StatusBit
The number of trend status area

bits assigned to the trend. If the
buffer is full, the bit assumes a
value of 1; if it is not full, 0; if the
buffer is not assigned to external
bits, -1
578
Chapter 9
Scripts
ESATRENDMGR methods accessible with Scripts

Table 13: ESATRENDMGR methods accessible with Scripts
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Bool
TrendId
(Long)
Value
(Var)
Time (Str)
Quality
(Bool)
GetFirst
Sample
Returns attributes of the

first (least recent) sample
of the trend buffer
specified by the input
parameter. Apart from the
Trend ID, requires as input
parameters pointers linked
to Variant, String and
Boolean type variables to
which the values are
returned. Returns TRUE if
the operation is successful,
while Quality indicates
whether the value of
Value exists or not (if
Quality=FALSE, the buffer
is empty)
Bool
TrendId
(Long)
Value
(Var)
Time (Str)
Quality
(Bool)
GetNext
Sample
Returns attributes of the

next sample of the trend
buffer specified by the
input parameter (next in
chronological order
relative to the last sample
read by the
GetFirstSample methods
or by GetNextSamples
itself). Apart from the
Trend ID, requires as input
parameters pointers linked
to Variant, String and
Boolean type variables to
which the values are
returned. Returns TRUE if
the operation is successful,
while Quality indicates
whether the value of
Value exists or not (if
Quality=FALSE, the buffer
has no successive
elements)
Checks whether the Trend
specified by the input ID is
empty (returns 1) or not
(returns 0)
Bool
IsEmpty
TrendId
(Long)
Chapter 9
579
Scripts

Method
Description
OUT
IN
PutValue
Adds to the trend indicated

by the input ID a new
sample with the attributes
provided as input
parameters. The sample
time is the current one.
TrendId
(Long)
Value
(Var)
Quality
(Bool)
PutValueAt
Adds to the trend indicated

by the input ID a new
sample with the attributes
passed as input
parameters. Time must be
expressed as DD/MM/
YYYY hh:mm:ss,mmm
TrendId
(Long)
Value
(Var)
Time (Str)
Quality
(Bool)
Removes all samples from

the specified trend and
triggers the event
OnBufferClear
Reset
Samples
TrendId
(Long)
TrendId
(Long)
Acquire
Sample
Acquires a new sample for

the trend indicated by the
input parameter. This
method functions
independently of the type
of trend acquisition and of
the value of its attribute
Enabled
ExportPart
TrendBuffer
Exports part of the buffer

of the trend indicated by
the input parameter.
Requires in addition the
passage of the destination
file name, the type of file
(1 - xml, 2 - csv) and the
times of the first and last
samples to be exported
TrendId
(Long)
FileName
(Str)
Type (Int)
TimeStart
(Str)
TimeEnd
(Str)
ExportFull
TrendBuffer
Exports all the samples in

the buffer of the trend
parameter. Requires in
addition the passage of the
destination file name, the
type of file (1 - xml, 2 csv)
TrendId
(Long)
FileName
(Str)
Type (Int)
580
Chapter 9
Scripts
The object
ESAPAGEMGR
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Change
ScaleLimit
Changes the limits of the

vertical scale assigned to
the penline. All tracks of
the trend specified are
updated. In addition needs
as input parameter the
new upper and lower
coordinates of the track
scale
TrendId
(Long)
MinLimit
(Dbl)
MaxLimit
(Dbl)
Long
GetTrendId
Returns the identifying

number (ID) of a trend
whose name is known
(provided as input
parameter for the method)
Trend
Name
(Str)
Enable
Used to enable or disable

the trend (in practice
operates on attribute
Enabled). Requires as
input parameter the trend
to edit and the value to be
attributed (1 enabled; 0
disabled)
TrendId
(Long)
Enabled
(Boolean)
The object ESAPAGEMGR offers functions and methods for the

global management of pages within the project. The following
table describes the methods that can be used with this object
using a syntax similar to:
ESAHMI.ESAPAGEMGR.ShowNextPage()
Properties of the object ESAPAGEMGR accessible from the
script
Table 14: Properties of the object ESAPAGEMGR accessible from the script
Properties
Description
OUT
IN
Current
Language
Indicates the identity code of the

current language in use
Integ
er
RW
Chapter 9
581
Scripts
ESAPAGEMGR methods accessible with Scripts

Table 15: ESAPAGEMGR methods accessible with Scripts
Method
Description
OUT
IN
ShowNext
Page
Shows the next page

(following order of page ID
number)
ShowPage
ByName
Shows the page identifying

it by the input parameter;
needs a string containing
the name of the page to be
passed
PageName
(Str)
Shows the page identifying

it by the input parameter;
needs an integer
containing the page ID to
be passed
ShowPage
ByNumber
PageID
(Int)
Show
Previous
Page
Shows the preceding page

(following order of page ID
number)
ShowHelp
Page
Makes it possible to show

the Help defined in
POLYMATH relating to the
page (full or popup)
currently being displayed
(see chap. 5, Help pages
page 173 )
ClosePopUp
PageBy
Name
Closes the popup page

indicated in the input
passage of a string relating
to the name of the popup
page
PageName
(Str)
ClosePopUp
PageBy
Number
Closes the popup page

indicated in the input
passage of an integer
relating to the identifying
number of the popup page
PageID
(Int)
582
Chapter 9
Scripts

Method
Description
OUT
IN
CloseActive
PopUp
Closes the currently active

popup page (the one in
focus); does not work if no
popup is in focus at the
moment the method is
invoked
GetNum
PopupOpen
Returns the number

(counter) of the currently
open popup pages
Int
Int
Index
(Int)
GetPopup
Open

number of the popup page
corresponding to the index
number provided as an
input parameter. The
index number provided as
an input parameter marks
the order of the opening of
the pages; for example, if
2 pages are opened, index
0 identifies the first page
opened while index 1
identifies the second page
opened. It is advisable to
use this command when in
the programming phase
the number of popup
opened at the moment the
method is invoked can be
foreseen
Str
PageID
(Int)
GetPage
Name
Returns a string of the

page name corresponding
to the input parameter;
needs the identifying
number of the page whose
name is required to be
passed
Int
PageName
(Str)
GetPage
Number

number of the page
corresponding to the input
name of the page whose
ID is required to be passed
Chapter 9
583
Scripts

Method
Description
OUT
IN
Bool
PageName
(Str)
IsPageName
Open
Returns a Boolean value (0

if False, 1 if True)
page relating to the input
parameter is open or not;
needs the passage of the
name of the page that is to
be checked
Bool
PageID
(Int)
IsPageNum
Open
Returns a Boolean value (0

if False, 1 if True)
page relating to the input
parameter is open or not;
ID number of the page that
is to be checked
Activates a specific window
PageID
(Int)
Show
Sequence
PageBy
Name
Displays the page where

the name of the page and
the name of the sequence
are specified
Sequence
Name(Str)
PageName
(Str)
Show
Sequence
PageBy
Number
Displays the page where

the Id of the page and the
name of the sequence are
specified
SequenceI
d(Int)
PageId
(Int)
Show
Previous
Sequence
Page
Displays the previous page

inside the current
sequence
ShowNext
Sequence
Page
Displays the following

page inside the current
sequence
Get
Sequence
Name
Gets the name of the page

sequence
Strin
g
SequenceI
d(Int)
Get
Sequence
Page
Gets the name of the page

sequence
Integ
er
Sequence
Name(Str)
Varies the light on the

display by increasing it
ActivePage
LightUp
584
Chapter 9
Scripts

Method
Description
OUT
IN
LightDown

display by decreasing it

display by setting the
specific value
LightSet
LightLevel
(Int)
CloseAllPop
Up
Closes all open PopUp pages
Current
Language
Returns a numeric value

based on the set language
Integer
Creates a file containing a

list of user accesses
Integer
Export file
(Str) Mode
(Int)
Saves persistent data in

panel memory
Integer
Carries out a copy of the

viewed page
PrintDialog (bool)
Orientation (int)
Mode (int)
Only for PC/XS: exits Runtime and turns off PC/XS
Prints and/or saves a

project report in PDF format
ReportMode (int)
PrintDialog (bool)
ReportName
(string)
OutputName(string)
ExportUser
log
Flush
Persistent
Data
Hardcopy
Quit
Application
Report
The object
ESAPAGE
The object ESAPAGE allows some properties of an individual

page to be managed as set out in the following table. The
string relating to the name of the references pages must be
passed to it. This object does not have usable methods but in
the following section we will analyze the object ESACNTRL
(child of the object ESAPAGE) which enables the user to act
on the individual objects contained in a page.
The correct syntax for using the object ESAPAGE is as follows:
ESAHMI.ESAPAGE(NamePage).AreaColor=RGB(23,24,23)
Chapter 9
585
Scripts
Warning: The methods and Properties of ESAPAGE (and thus of its

childrens objects) are only applicable to the currently open page. If
a Script tries to edit elements in a page not currently open in
runtime, an error signal will appear.
ESAPAGE properties accessible with Scripts

Table 16: ESAPAGE properties accessible with Scripts
The object
ESACNTRL
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
The name attributed to the page

by POLYMATH in the project
editing phase
Str
Name
The number attributed to the

page by POLYMATH in the project
editing phase
Int
Number
Width
The value of the width of the page
Int
Height
The value of the height of the

page
Int
RGB
RW
AreaColor
The background color of the page.

This can also be changed by
inserting in the input phase an
RGB value (Long) returned, for
example, by the RGB function
(e.g. AreaColor=RGB(24,255,0).
ESACNTRL (contained within ESAPAGE) puts at the operators

disposal a series of methods and properties relating to the
individual objects present in a page. The following sections will
analyze the properties and methods accessible using Scripts
in relation to each graphic object that can be added to a page
(maintaining the order followed in the chapter on the
Properties Editor). All the graphic elements use the same
Draw () method for redrawing the element in question.
The correct syntax to access the properties of the object
ESACNTRL is:
ESAHMI.ESAPAGE(PageName).ESACNTRL(ObjectName
).BorderColor=RGB(32,255,0)
586
Chapter 9
Scripts
Warning: When a Script modifies the graphic properties of an

object, these are displayed only when the object is redrawn using the
appropriate Draw () method. This method redraws the object
simultaneously applying all the changes made to the attributes up to
the moment the display is invoked. Dynamic fields that show a value
also have the RefreshControl () method capable of updating only the
value of the field while ignoring the graphic properties that have
been changed.
Properties of ESACNTRL - Rectangle

Table 17: Properties of ESACNTRL - Rectangle
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft
Defines the position (in pixels)

counting from the left where the
object has currently been drawn.
If this value is changed, the
object is moved horizontally
(when redrawn with the Draw
method).
Int
RW
ControlTop

counting from the top where the
method).
Control
Width
Defines the width of the object
Int
Control
Height
Defines the height of the object
Int
Defines whether the object should

be visible (0) or invisible (1).
Modifying this command provokes
an immediate redrawing without
needing to invoke the Draw
method.
Bool
RW
ControlHide
Chapter 9
587
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
RGB
RW
BorderColor
Defines the color of the border of

the object currently being
redrawn. Can be changed by
attributing an RGB (Long) value
returned, for example, by the
RGB function (e.g.
BorderColor=RGB(24,255,0). The
change will appear in runtime
after invoking the Draw method.
Int
RW
BorderBlink
Defines whether the edge of the

object should blink or not.
Possible values of this property
are:
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
If a different value from the
preceding ones is attributed, the
property is forced to 0. Modifying
this command provokes an
immediate redrawing without
method.
RGB
RW
AreaColor
Defines the color of the internal

area of the object currently being
RGB function (e.g.
Int
RW
FillDir
Defines infill direction of the

object currently being redrawn;
the values may be as follows:
0 - From bottom to top
1 - From top to bottom
2 - From left to right
3 - From right to left
property is forced to 0. The
change is shown in runtime after
the Draw method is invoked.
588
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
FillPercent
Defines the percentage infill of

redrawn. The change is shown in
runtime after the Draw method is
invoked.
RGB
RW
FillColor
Defines the infill color of the

object currently being redrawn.
Can be changed by attributing an
RGB (Long) value returned, for
(e.g. BorderColor= RGB
(24,255,0). The change is shown
in runtime after the Draw method
is invoked.
Methods of ESACNTRL - Rectangle

Table 18: Methods of ESACNTRL - Rectangle
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw
Redraws the whole object

from the beginning,
updating all the graphic
properties that were
changed.
Properties of ESACNTRL - Ellipse

Table 19: Properties of ESACNTRL - Ellipse
Properties
Description
Type
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

method).
Chapter 9
589
Scripts

Properties
Description
Type
RW
Int
RW
ControlTop

method).
ControlWidth
Int
Control
Height
Int
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
RGB
RW
BorderColor

RGB function (e.g.
Int
RW
BorderBlink
Defines whether the border of the

object should blink or not.
are:
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
property is forced at 0. Modifying
method.
590
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Type
RW
RGB
RW
AreaColor

RGB function (e.g.
Int
RW
FillDir

Int
RW
FillPercent

invoked.
RGB
RW
FillColor

(24,255,0). The change is shown
in runtime after the Draw method
is invoked.
Chapter 9
591
Scripts
Methods of ESACNTRL - Ellipse

Table 20: Methods of ESACNTRL - Ellipse
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Properties of ESACNTRL - Arc

Table 21: Properties of ESACNTRL - Arc
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

method).
Int
RW
ControlTop

object is moved vertically (when
redrawn with the Draw method).
ControlWidth
Int
ControlHeight
Int
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
592
Chapter 9
Scripts
Table 21: Properties of ESACNTRL - Arc

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
RGB
RW
ArcColor

the arc currently being redrawn.
(24,255,0). The change will
appear in runtime after invoking
the Draw method.
Int
RW
ArcBlink
Defines whether the arc should

blink or not. Possible values of
this property are:
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
Methods of ESACNTRL - Arc

Table 22: Methods of ESACNTRL - Arc
method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Chapter 9
593
Scripts
Properties of ESACNTRL - Circular sector

Table 23: Properties of ESACNTRL - Circular sector
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

method).
Int
RW
ControlTop

method).
Control
Width
Int
Control
Height
Int
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
RGB
RW
ArcColor
Defines the color of the arc of the

circular section currently being
RGB function (e.g. BorderColor=
RGB (24,255,0). The change will
the Draw method.
594
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ArcBlink
Defines whether the arc of the

circular section should blink or
not. Possible values of this
property are:
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
RGB
RW
AreaColor

RGB function (e.g.
Int
RW
FillDir

Int
RW
FillPercent

invoked.
Chapter 9
595
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
RGB
RW
FillColor

(e.g. FillColor= RGB (24,255,0).
The change is shown in runtime
after the Draw method is invoked.
Methods of ESACNTRL - Circular sector

Table 24: Methods of ESACNTRL - Circular sector
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Properties of ESACNTRL - Line

Table 25: Properties of ESACNTRL - Line
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

method).
Int
RW
ControlTop

596
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
X1
Horizontal coordinate of the

starting point. Changing this
value means moving the starting
point horizontally (when
redrawing using the Draw
method).
This value, if read with a Script,
assumes a value of X1-Left
(values set with POLYMATH).
Similarly, the point is drawn on
the pixel with the value X1+Left
(Script values).
Int
X2
Horizontal coordinate of the

arrival point. Changing this value
means moving the arrival point
horizontally (when redrawing
using the Draw method).
assumes a value of X2-Left
the pixel with the value X2+Left
(Script values).
Int
Y1
Vertical coordinate of the starting

point. Changing this value means
moving the starting point
vertically (when redrawing using
the Draw method).
assumes a value of Y1-Top
the pixel with the value Y1+Top
(Script values).
Chapter 9
597
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
Y2
Vertical coordinate of the arrival

point. Changing this value means
moving the arrival point vertically
(when redrawing using the Draw
method).
assumes a value of Y2-Top
the pixel with the value Y2+Top
(Script values).
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
RGB
RW
LineColor
Defines the color of the line

currently being redrawn. Can be
changed by attributing an RGB
(Long) value returned, for
the Draw method.
Int
RW
LineBlink
Defines whether the line should

blink or not. Possible values of
this property are:
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
598
Chapter 9
Scripts
Methods of ESACNTRL - Line

Table 26: Methods of ESACNTRL - Line
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Properties of ESACNTRL - Polygon

Table 27: Properties of ESACNTRL - Polygon
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

object has currently been drawn
(that is, the rectangle containing
it). If this value is changed, the
method).
Int
RW
ControlTop

object (or the rectangle
containing it) has currently been
drawn. If this value is changed,
the object is moved vertically
method).
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
Chapter 9
599
Scripts
Table 27: Properties of ESACNTRL - Polygon

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
RGB
RW
LineColor
Defines the color of the outline of

the polygon currently being
the Draw method.
RGB
RW
AreaColor

RGB function (e.g.
Int
RW
FillDir

Int
RW
FillPercent

invoked.
RGB
RW
FillColor

(e.g. FillColor= RGB (24,255,0).
The change is shown in runtime
after the Draw method is invoked.
600
Chapter 9
Scripts
Methods of ESACNTRL - Polygon

Table 28: Methods of ESACNTRL - Polygon
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Properties of ESACNTRL - Irregular line

Table 29: Properties of ESACNTRL - Irregular line
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

object has currently been drawn
(or the rectangle containing it). If
this value is changed, the object
is moved horizontally (when
Int
RW
ControlTop

containing it) has currently been
method).
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
RGB
RW
LineColor
Defines the color of the outline of

the polygon currently being
the Draw method.
Chapter 9
601
Scripts
Methods of ESACNTRL - Broken line

Table 30: Methods of ESACNTRL - Broken line
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Properties of ESACNTRL - Regular polygon

The properties and methods of the regular polygon coincide
with those of the polygon drawn by the user as already
described (see chap. 9, Properties of ESACNTRL - Polygon
page 598 and see chap. 9, Methods of ESACNTRL - Polygon
page 600).
Properties of ESACNTRL - Label
Table 31: Properties of ESACNTRL - Label
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

rectangle of the label has
currently been drawn. If this
value is changed, the object is
moved horizontally (when
Int
RW
ControlTop

object (or the rectangle of the
label) has currently been drawn.
Control
Width
Int
Control
Height
Int
602
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
RGB
RW
BorderColor

the rectangle of the label
(e.g.
Int
RW
BorderBlink

rectangle of the label should blink
or not. Possible values of this
property are:
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
RGB
RW
AreaColor

area of the label currently being
RGB function (e.g.
Chapter 9
603
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Str
RW
TextValue
Defines the value of the text

currently written on the label. Can
be varied by providing a new
string and the on screen update
happens after the Draw method
has been invoked.
RGB
RW
TextColor
Defines the color of the text

currently being written on the
label. Can be changed by
RGB function (e.g.
Int
RW
TextBlink
Defines whether the text of the

label should blink or not. Possible
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
Str
RW
FontFace
Name
Defines the font to use for writing

the text. Can be edited by
inserting the string relating to the
name of the Font (one of those
included in the project). The
after Draw method is invoked.
Int
RW
FontSize
Defines the size of the label text.

Can be changed by attributing the
required value. The change will
appear in runtime after Draw
method is invoked.
604
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Bool
RW
FontItalic
Defines whether the label text is

shown in Italics (1) or in Roman
(0). If modified using a Script,
the variation will appear in
runtime after Draw method is
invoked.
Bool
RW
FontBold

shown in Bold (1) or in Roman
invoked.
Bool
RW
Font
Underline

shown underlined (1) or normal
invoked.
shown barred (1) or normal (0). If
modified using a Script, the
variation will appear in runtime
Bool
RW
FontStrike
Out
Methods of ESACNTRL - Label

Table 32: Methods of ESACNTRL - Label
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Returns the length of the
string currently written in
the label.
Int
GetTextLen
Chapter 9
605
Scripts
Properties of ESACNTRL - Image field

Table 33: Properties of ESACNTRL - Image field
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

rectangle of the field has currently
been drawn. If this value is
changed, the object is moved
horizontally (when redrawn with
the Draw method).
Int
RW
ControlTop

field) has currently been drawn. If
is moved vertically (when
ControlWidth
Int
ControlHeight
Int
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
RGB
RW
BorderColor

the rectangle of the field currently
being redrawn. Can be changed
by attributing an RGB (Long)
value returned, for example, by
the RGB function (e.g.
606
Chapter 9
Scripts
Table 33: Properties of ESACNTRL - Image field

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
BorderBlink

rectangle of the field should blink
property are:
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
RGB
RW
AreaColor

area of the field being drawn. Can
be changed by attributing an RGB
(e.g.
Methods of ESACNTRL - Image field

Table 34: Methods of ESACNTRL - Image field
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Int
GetHorDim
Returns the original value

of the horizontal
dimension of the image
currently displayed within
the symbol field.
Chapter 9
607
Scripts
Table 34: Methods of ESACNTRL - Image field

Method
Description
OUT
IN
Int
GetVertDIm

of the vertical dimension of
the image currently
displayed within the
symbol field.
Properties of ESACNTRL - Numerical field

Table 35: Properties of ESACNTRL - Numerical field
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

the Draw method).
Int
RW
ControlTop

Control
Width
Int
Control
Height
Int

method.
Bool
RW
ControlHide
608
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
RGB
RW
BorderColor

Int
RW
BorderBlink

property are:
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
RGB
RW
AreaColor

area of the field currently being
drawn. Can be changed by
RGB function (e.g.
Str
RW
FontFace
Name

Int
RW
FontSize
Defines the size of the field text.

method is invoked.
Chapter 9
609
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Bool
RW
FontItalic
Defines whether the field text is

invoked.
Bool
RW
FontBold

invoked.
Bool
RW
Font
Underline

shown underlined (1) or in normal
invoked.
Bool
RW
FontStrike
Out

shown barred (1) or in normal
invoked.
Bool
RW
Disable
Defines whether the field is

enabled (0) or disabled (1), that
is, whether the user can edit it.
Editing this property provokes
method.
RGB
RW
ValueColor
Defines the color of the current

text contained in the field. Can be
(e.g.
610
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ValueBlink
Defines whether the current field

text should blink or not. Possible
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
Var
RW
Value

currently written onto the field.
Can be varied by providing a new
or Refresh Control is invoked.
Methods of ESACNTRL - Numerical field

Table 36: Methods of ESACNTRL - Numerical field
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Refresh
Control
Redraws only the part of

the field relating to the
value shown, leaving out
the graphic aspects of the
field. This function is
preferable to Draw when
all that is needed is a
refresh of the value (it is
quicker).
Chapter 9
611
Scripts
Properties of ESACNTRL - Dynamic text

Table 37: Properties of ESACNTRL - Dynamic text
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

the Draw method).
Int
RW
ControlTop

Control
Width
Int
Control
Height
Int
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
RGB
RW
BorderColor

612
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
BorderBlink

property are:
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
RGB
RW
AreaColor

RGB function (e.g.
RGB
RW
TextColor
Defines the color of the text

currently contained in the field.
the Draw method.
Chapter 9
613
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
TextBlink
Defines whether the current field

text should blink or not. Possible
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
Str
RW
FontFace
Name

Int
RW
FontSize
Defines the size of the field text.

method is invoked.
Bool
RW
FontItalic

invoked.
Bool
RW
FontBold

invoked.
Bool
RW
Font
Underline

shown underlined (1) or in normal
invoked.
614
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Bool
RW
FontStrike
Out

shown barred (1) or in normal
invoked.
Bool
RW
Disable

method.
Var
RW
Value

currently written onto the field.
Can be varied by providing a new
or Refresh Control is invoked.
Methods of ESACNTRL - Dynamic text

Table 38: Methods of ESACNTRL - Dynamic text
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Refresh
Control

quicker).
string currently written
into the field
Int
GetTextLen
Chapter 9
615
Scripts
Properties of ESACNTRL - ASCII field

The properties of the ASCII field accessible using Scripts
coincide with those of the Numerical field (see chap. 9,
Properties of ESACNTRL - Numerical field page 607).
Methods of ESACNTRL - ASCII field
Table 39: Methods of ESACNTRL - ASCII field
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Refresh
Control

quicker).
into the field
Int
GetTextLen
Properties of ESACNTRL - Symbol field

Table 40: Properties of ESACNTRL - Symbol field
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

the Draw method).
616
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlTop

Control
Width
Defines the width of the rectangle

containing the object
Int
Control
Height
Defines the height of the

rectangle containing the object
Int
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
RGB
RW
BorderColor

Int
RW
BorderBlink

property are:
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
Chapter 9
617
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
RGB
RW
AreaColor

RGB function (e.g.
Bool
RW
Disable

method.
Var
RW
Value
Defines the value the symbol field

refers to. Can be varied by
providing a new string and the on
screen update happens after the
Draw method or Refresh Control
is invoked.
Methods of ESACNTRL - Symbol field

Table 41: Methods of ESACNTRL - Symbol field
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Refresh
Control

quicker).
618
Chapter 9
Scripts
Table 41: Methods of ESACNTRL - Symbol field

Method
Description
OUT
IN
Int
GetHorDim

of the horizontal
dimension of the image
currently displayed inside
the Symbol field.
Int
GetVertDIm

of the vertical dimension of
the image currently
displayed inside the
Symbol field.
Properties of ESACNTRL - DateTime field

The properties of the DateTime field accessible using Scripts
coincide with those of the Numerical field (see chap. 9,
Properties of ESACNTRL - Numerical field page 607).
Methods of ESACNTRL - DateTime field
Table 42: Methods of ESACNTRL - DateTime
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Refresh
Control

quicker).
into the field.
Int
GetTextLen
Chapter 9
619
Scripts
Properties of ESACNTRL - Bar

Table 43: Properties of ESACNTRL - Bar
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

rectangle containing the bar has
Int
RW
ControlTop

containing the bar) has currently
vertically (when redrawn with the
Draw method).
Control
Width

Int
Control
Height
Defines the height of the

rectangle containing the object
Int
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
RGB
RW
BorderColor

the rectangle containing the bar
(e.g.
620
Chapter 9
Scripts
Table 43: Properties of ESACNTRL - Bar

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
BorderBlink

rectangle containing the bar
should blink or not. Possible
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
RGB
RW
AreaColor

area of the bar currently being
RGB function (e.g.
RGB
RW
Indicator
Color
Defines the color of the indicator

used in the bar currently being
RGB function (e.g. AreaColor=
the Draw method.
Var
RW
Value
Defines the value the bar refers

to. Editing this property provokes
method.
Bool
RW
Disable

method.
Chapter 9
621
Scripts
Methods of ESACNTRL - Bar

Table 44: Methods of ESACNTRL - Bar
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Refresh
Control

quicker).
Properties of ESACNTRL - Indicator

Table 45: Properties of ESACNTRL - Indicator
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

rectangle containing the indicator
has currently been drawn. If this
Int
RW
ControlTop

containing the indicator) has
moved vertically (when redrawn
with the Draw method).
Control
Width

Int
Control
Height
Defines height of the rectangle

Int
622
Chapter 9
Scripts
Table 45: Properties of ESACNTRL - Indicator

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
RGB
RW
BorderColor

the rectangle containing the
indicator currently being redrawn.
the Draw method.
Int
RW
BorderBlink

rectangle containing the indicator
should blink or not. Possible
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
RGB
RW
AreaColor

area of the bar currently being
RGB function (e.g.
Var
RW
Value
Defines the value the indicator

refers to. Editing this property
provokes immediate redrawing
without needing to invoke the
Draw method.
Chapter 9
623
Scripts
Methods of ESACNTRL - Indicator

Table 46: Methods of ESACNTRL - Indicator
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Refresh
Control

quicker).
Properties of ESACNTRL - Touch button

Table 47: Properties of ESACNTRL - Touch button
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

button has currently been drawn.
method).
Int
RW
ControlTop

Control
Width
Defines the width of the button.
Int
Control
Height
Defines the height of the button.
Int
624
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
RGB
RW
BorderColor

the button currently being
RGB function (e.g.
Int
RW
BorderBlink

button should blink or not.
are:
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
RGB
RW
AreaColor

area of the button currently being
RGB function (e.g.
Chapter 9
625
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Bool
RW
Disable
Defines whether the button is

is, whether the pressing it has an
effect or not (for example, the
function is executed or the Script
corresponding to it). Editing this
property provokes immediate
redrawing without needing to
invoke the Draw method.
Provides the text of the label
Strin
g
RW
Provides the colour of the label

displayed
Strin
g
RW
TextLabel
TextColor
Methods of ESACNTRL - Touch button

Table 48: Methods of ESACNTRL - Touch button
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Properties of ESACNTRL - Touch Area

Table 49: Properties of ESACNTRL - Touch area
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

area has currently been drawn. If
626
Chapter 9
Scripts
Table 49: Properties of ESACNTRL - Touch area

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlTop

object (that is, the rectangle
containing the bar) has currently
vertically (when redrawn with the
Draw method).
Control
Width
Defines the width of the currently

drawn area
Int
Control
Height
Defines the height of the currently

drawn area.
Int
Methods of ESACNTRL - Touch area

Table 50: Methods of ESACNTRL - Touch area
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Properties of ESACNTRL - Slide-Potentiometer

Table 51: Properties of ESACNTRL - Slide-potentiometer
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

method).
Chapter 9
627
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlTop

potentiometer has currently been
method).
Control
Width
Int
Control
Height
Int
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
RGB
RW
BorderColor

the rectangle containing the
potentiometer currently being
RGB function (e.g.
Int
RW
BorderBlink

rectangle containing the
potentiometer should blink or not.
are:
0 - No blinking
1 - Slow blinking
2 - Rapid blinking
method.
628
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
RGB
RW
AreaColor

area of the potentiometer
currently being drawn. Can be
(e.g.
Var
RW
Value
Defines the value represented by

the potentiometer. Can be varied
by providing a new string and the
on screen update happens after
Bool
RW
Disable

is, whether the user can edit its
value. Editing this property
Draw method.
Methods of ESACNTRL - Slide-Potentiometer

Table 52: Methods of ESACNTRL - Slide-potentiometer
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Draw

from the beginning,
changed.
Refresh
Control

quicker).
Chapter 9
629
Scripts
Properties and Methods of ESACNTRL - Slide-Selector

The properties and methods of the Slide-Selector that can be
accessed using Scripts coincide with those of the SlidePotentiometer (already described, see chap. 9, Properties of
ESACNTRL - Slide-Potentiometer page 626 and see chap. 9,
Methods of ESACNTRL - Slide-Potentiometer page 628).
Properties and Methods of ESACNTRL - Knob-Potentiometer
The properties and methods of the Knob-Potentiometer that
can be accessed using Scripts coincide with those of the SlidePotentiometer (already described, see chap. 9, Properties of
ESACNTRL - Slide-Potentiometer page 626 e see chap. 9,
Properties and Methods of ESACNTRL - Knob-selector
The properties and methods of the Knob-Selector that can be
accessed using Scripts coincide with those of the SlidePotentiometer (already described, see chap. 9, Properties of
ESACNTRL - Slide-Potentiometer page 626 e see chap. 9,
Properties of ESACNTRL - Complex Control Grid
Table 53: Properties of ESACNTRL - Complex Control Grid
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
ControlLeft

Grid has currently been drawn. If
Int
RW
ControlTop

Control
Width
Int
Control
Height
Int
630
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Bool
RW
ControlHide

method.
RGB
RW
BorderColor

the rectangle containing the Grid
(e.g.
RGB
RW
AreaColor

area of the rectangle containing
the Grid. Can be changed by
RGB function (e.g.
Bool
RW
Disable

is, whether the user can edit its
values. Editing this property
Draw method.
RGB
RW
GridColor
Defines the color of the Grid. Can

the Draw method.
Chapter 9
631
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
RGB
RW
RibbonBack
Color
Defines the color of the Grid

ribbon. Can be changed by
the Draw method.
RGB
RW
RibbonFore
Color
Defines the color of the text of the

Grid ribbon. Can be changed by
the Draw method.
RGB
RW
SelBack
Color
Defines the color of the cell/row

selected in the Grid. Can be
(e.g. AreaColor= RGB (24,255,0).
The change will appear in runtime
RGB
RW
SelFore
Color
Defines the color of the text of the

cell/row selected in the Grid. Can
the Draw method.
SortCol
Defines the number of columns

used to create the order.
Long
RW
Long
RW
SortMode
Defines how to create the order;

admissable values are:
0 - ascending
1 - descending
632
Chapter 9
Scripts
Methods of ESACNTRL - Complex Control Grid

Table 54: Methods of ESACNTRL - Complex Control Grid
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Count
Column
Returns the number of

columns in the Grid
Long
CountRow
Returns the number of

rows in the Grid
Long
Properties of ESACNTRL - Trend Graph

Table 55: Properties of ESACNTRL - Trend Graph
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Long
RW
ControlLeft

Long
RW
ControlTop

Control
Width
Long
Control
Height
Long

method.
Bool
RW
ControlHide
Chapter 9
633
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
RGB
RW
BorderColor

the rectangle containing the Grid.
the Draw method.
RGB
RW
AreaColor

area of the rectangle containing
the Grid. Can be changed by
RGB function (e.g.
RGB
RW
ChartArea
Color
Defines the color of the area of

the internal table. Can be
RGB
RW
ChartBorder
Color

the internal table. Can be
the Draw method.
Str
RW
ChartTime
Left
Specifies the exact position of the

left margin of the table, that is,
the start time of the table
displayed in the format DD/MM/
YYYY HH:MM:SS,mmm
634
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
RGB
RW
GridHorLine
Color
Defines the color of the horizontal

Grid. Can be changed by
the Draw method.
RGB
RW
GridHorMin
LineColor
Defines the color of the minimum

horizontal Grid. Can be changed
AreaColor= RGB (24,255,0). The
RGB
RW
GridVertLine
Color
Defines the color of the vertical

Grid. Can be changed by
the Draw method.
RGB
RW
GridVertMin
LineColor
Defines the color of the minimum

vertical Grid. Can be changed by
the Draw method.
RGB
RW
ScaleHor
LabelColor
Defines the color of the horizontal

scale label. Can be changed by
the Draw method.
CursorFlag
Defines whether the cursor is

visible (1) in the table or not (0).
Bool
RW
Chapter 9
635
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
RGB
RW
CursorColor
Defines the color of the cursor.

Defines the number of tracks
currently in the table. Available as
read-only.
Long
NumTracks
ActiveTrack
Specifies the identifying code of

the track that is currently active
Long
RW
Specifies the identifier of a track.

Gives access to the attributes of a
specific track.
Long
RW
TrackId
TrackNum
Ranges
The number of intervals into

which the track values are
divided.
Long
RW
Dbl
RW
TrackRange
1
Defines the limits of the values of

interval 1 into which the domain
of the track values has been
divided. Used only if the attribute
TraclNumRanges specifies a
sufficient number of intervals.
Dbl
RW
TrackRange
2

Dbl
RW
TrackRange
3

636
Chapter 9
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Dbl
RW
TrackRange
4

Dbl
RW
TrackRange
5

RGB
RW
TrackColor1
Defines the color of the sample

readings and the track lines in
relation to the intervals they
belong to. This is the standard
color used for the track icons and
the labels on the vertical scale.
readings and the track lines
relating to the interval of track
number 2.
RGB
RW
TrackColor2

number 3.
RGB
RW
TrackColor3

number 4.
RGB
RW
TrackColor4

number 5.
RGB
RW
TrackColor5

number 6.
RGB
RW
TrackColor6
TrackValue
Low
Specifies the exact coordinate of

the bottom margin of the table.
Long
RW
Chapter 9
637
Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
TrackMax
Samples
The maximum number of tracks

that can be inserted in a table
buffer. This is a read-only value.
Long
TrackNum
Samples
Indicates the number of samples

currently in the table buffer. This
is a read-only value.
Long
Methods of ESACNTRL - Trend Graph

Table 56: Methods of ESACNTRL - Trend Graph
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Long
AddTrack
Adds a new track to the

table. Requires the
passage of the track
identifier and the
maximum number of
samples the buffer will
hold.
TrackId
(Long)
NumSampl
es (Int)
Long
AddSample
Adds a new sample to the

track indicated by the
input parameter. Also
value of the sample, the
acquisition time and a flag
value is valid (1) or not
(0). Invalid values
(flag=0) are used to
specify acquisition errors.
TrackId
(Long)
Value
(Var)
Time (Str)
Quality
(Bool)
Removes the track

indicated by the identifier
passed as an input
parameter from the table.
Long
Remove
Track
TrackId
(Long)
Long
Remove
Samples
Removes all the samples

related to the track
indicated by the identifier
passed as an input
parameter.
TrackId
(Long)
638
Chapter 9
Scripts

Method
Description
OUT
IN
Long
TrackId
(Long)
Value
(Var)
Result
(Long)
GetCursor
TrackValue
Returns the value of the

track at the position
indicated by the cursor.
Needs as an input
parameter the ID of the
track and the value and
value-type pointers. The
value type is numerical,
with the following
meanings:
0 - intersection value; 1sample value; 2 - valid
value, but cursor is in cutoff area; -1 non-valid
value, the cursor is out of
range; -2 non-valid value,
the cursor is in a track
gap; -3 non-valid value,
the cursor is hidden.
Returns the time
coordinates of the cursor;
functions only if the cursor
is active
Long
Time (Str)
GetCursor
Position
SetCursor
Position
Changes cursor time

coordinates; functions only
if the cursor is active
Long
Time (Str)
MoveUp
Moves display of the table

up.
Long
Step
(Long)
MoveDown

down.
Long
Step
(Long)
MoveLeft

leftwards.
Long
Step
(Long)
MoveRight

rightwards.
Long
Step
(Long)
Long
Time (Str)
Goto
Moves the coordinates of

the table to the position
parameter.
Draw
Redraws the table

completely.
Long
Chapter 9
639
Scripts
object ESAPRN
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Chart
Alignment
Aligns the contents of the

table to the right.
Long
Changes the display times

from Relative to Absolute.
Needs as an input
parameter the times at
which to run the display.
Long
RelativeTo
Absolute
Time
RelTime
(Str)
AbsTime
(Str)
Changes the display times

from Absolute to Relative.
Needs as an input
parameter the times at
which to run the display.
Long
AbsoluteTo
Relative
Time
RelTime
(Str)
AbsTime
(Str)
ESAPRN puts at the users disposal simple functions for

printing strings on printers connected to the panel. A print
session can be managed by inserting and positioning a variety
of texts in the page. The page is printed and released only
after the method End has been invoked. This type of printing
is, therefore, useful when you need to print data destined to
change over time on the same page. In fact, the method Start
opens a buffer of elements to be printed that closes only when
the method End is invoked.
For a concrete example of the use of the print functions, the
reader is advised to consult Example 6 of this chapter (see
chap. 9, Example 6: Creates printout of list of recipes
page 649).
ESAPRN properties accessible with Scripts
Table 57: ESAPRN properties accessible with Scripts
Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
LastError
Indicates the code of the last

error
Int
RW
640
Chapter 9
Scripts
Table 57: ESAPRN properties accessible with Scripts

Properties
Description
Typ
e
RW
Int
RW
FontSize
Defines (in points) the size of the

font in which the strings inserted
during the print session will be
written. Can be called more than
once within the same print
session.
Moreover, when a value is
assigned to this property, the
properties PageRows and
PageColumns are updated.
PageWidth
Defines the page width in pixels.
Int
PageHeight
Defines page height in pixels.
Int
MarginHor
Indicates the horizontal margin of

the page in pixel
Int
RW
MarginVert
Indicates the vertical margin of

the page in pixel
Int
RW
Defines the number of printable

rows in the page. This property is
updated whenever the value of
the property FontSize changes.
Int
PageRows
Defines the number of columns

that can be printed in the page.
This property is updated
whenever the value of the
property FontSize changes.
Int
Page
Columns
Chapter 9
641
Scripts
ESAPRN methods accessible with Scripts

Table 58: ESAPRN methods accessible with Scripts
Method
Description
OUT
IN
Int
DialogBox
(Bool)
Start
Starts the print procedure

and leaves the panel
waiting for other print
inputs. This function needs
as an input parameter a
value indicating whether
the print setup window
should be shown. If the
value True is passed, the
Options window is shown
as soon as this instruction
is executed. If the value
False is passed, the print
command is sent to the
last printer used in the
current session or to the
default printer, if no
printing has been
performed in the current
session.
The actual printing starts
when the method PRNEnd
is invoked. The method
returns 1 if the user has
clicked on Ok (or if simply
it has been decided not to
show the DialogBox), 0 if
the user has cancelled the
operation or there is a
negative integer indicating
an error code. It is
important to deal with
cases in which a value
other than 1 is returned so
that no further print
operations are run.
Concludes the print setup
phase and sends the data
to the printer.
End
Abort
Interrupts and aborts the

print procedure being run.
642
Chapter 9
Scripts
Table 58: ESAPRN methods accessible with Scripts
Examples of
Script use
Method
Description
OUT
IN
NewPage
With this a new print page

can be created. After this
function has been invoked,
the next texts are printed
on a new page.
Text (Str)
WriteLN
Writes the text contained

in the input string in a
single row (going to the
next line when the row has
been printed).
WriteXY

in the input string into the
position indicated, in
pixels, by the two
parameters PosX and PosY
PosX(Int)
PosY(Int)
Text (Str)
WriteRC

in the input string into the
position indicated, in terms
of row and column
positions, by the two
parameters Col and Row.
Row(Int)
Col(Int)
Text (Str)
This paragraph deals practically with writing the scripting

code. We offer examples relating the use of all the accessible
objects described so far.
Example 1 - Analysis of variables and launching events
In this example we will suppose we have a project in which we
configure a page, a variable, an alarm and the controls
assigned to the page.
Using POLYMATH we set the objects we need while running the
Script. We set a variable, calling it Tag (the names of the
objects assigned using POLYMATH are important as this is the
key to accessing them using Scripts) of the Integer type
assigning an initial value of 0. In addition, we set a generic
alarm (Alarm) that will be set off when the variable Tag
assumes the value 10. We remember to set in Alarms, in the
User Signals mask (see chap. 5, Usersignals page 190), the
display of one of the user signals present.
We set a page called Page in which we insert a label (called
Label) and a touch button (Touch Button) to which we
assign the Script (Script) corresponding to the event
onReleased. Using Project Explorer, we drag the variable to
Chapter 9
643
Scripts
the work area to create a dynamic field showing its value in

runtime (useful for constantly monitoring its value). We add
two buttons to which we assign the predefined functions of
increase-decrease value acting on the variable Tag so as to
be able to change the value in runtime. The page created will
look like this:
Our Script must be able to get the value of the variable Tag,
check that the value is less than 5 and, should this not be the
case, launch an alarm, edit the layout of the label and the
page and take the variable to a low value.
To get the value of the variable, we use ESATAG and save it
into variable a with the following instruction:
a=ESAHMI.ESATAG.ReadValue (Tag)
Now let us analyze the received value: if the value is greater
than or equal to 5, an alarm is raised. Using POLYMATH we set
an alarm to be activated when the value 10 was reached, so
we are certain that it is the Script activating it now. The
control and activation code uses the object ESAALARMMGR as
indicated by the following rows:
If a>4 Then
ESAHMI.ESAALARMMGR.RaiseAlarm("Alarm")
End If
We can also run other instructions within the same condition
such that when we change the value of the variable and
launch the Script other changes will be applied, too. For
example, we change the text, the color and the blinking of the
label (object ESACNTRL, remembering to invoke the Draw
method related to the label) and the background of the page
(object ESAPAGE) as set out below:
If a>4 Then
ESAHMI.ESAALARMMGR.RaiseAlarm("Alarm")
ESAHMI.ESAPAGE("Page").ESACNTRL("Label").TextValue
="ValueError"
ESAHMI.ESAPAGE("Page").ESACNTRL("Label").AreaColor
=RGB (23,123,43)
644
Chapter 9
Scripts
ESAHMI.ESAPAGE("Page").ESACNTRL("Label").BorderColo
r=RGB (54,245,13)
ESAHMI.ESAPAGE("Page").ESACNTRL("Label").BorderBlin
k=2
ESAHMI.ESAPAGE("Page").ESACNTRL("Label").Draw()
ESAHMI.ESAPAGE("Page").AreaColor=RGB(25,25,25)
End If
Finally, we re-establish an admissible value for the variable
with the following instruction:
ESAHMI.ESATAG.WriteValue Tag,2
The final code inserted in the POLYMATH editor is the
following:
Example 2 - Page access according to user level

Another example of using Scripts is the way access to project
pages is managed according to the level of the user currently
logged onto the terminal.
Using POLYMATH we can set the objects we need while the
Script is run. We set two levels of use (see chap. 5, Password
configuration page 213), assigning a password for levels 3
and 8, for example. Remember that when the project starts
the predefined level is 10, that is, the lowest.
We add 3 buttons to the default page (Page): one recalling
the Script, the other two the log-in and log-out functions
respectively. Finally we set two new pages (Page_1 and
Page_2) that will be recalled by the Script depending on the
user level.
Let us look now at the implementation of the code: first of all
we must use the object USERMGR to get the level of the user
currently logged in:
a=ESAHMI.ESAUSERMGR.GetCurrentUserLevel()
Now we need merely create a check condition for this level
(the function returns an integer). The credentials of the user
will determine which page is displayed.
If a>3 Then
ESAHMI.ESAPAGEMGR.ShowPageByName("Page_1")
Else ESAHMI.ESAPAGEMGR.ShowPageByName("Page_2")
End If
The complete Script code is ass follows:
Chapter 9
645
Scripts
Example 3 - Exporting alarms to a file chosen by the user

Another example of how POLYMATH Scripts can be used is
provided by the use of value fields to receive data to be used
to invoke dynamic functions. We insert a complex field into a
page and this displays the Alarm history, an ASCII field
(ASCII, assigned to a string-variable) and a button to which
we assign a Script (event onReleased).
The Script reads the value of the ASCII field and saves it in
variable a using the following instruction:
a=ESAHMI.ESAPAGE("Page").ESACNTRL("ASCII").Value
Then we invoke the Export alarms function to which we pass
the string that has just been read:
ESAHMI.ESAALARMMGR.HistoryExport a,1
Naturally this is only a simple example useful for illustrating

the ease of programming via scripting that makes creating the
project extremely dynamic.
Example 4 - Saving a Recipe into a memory
In this subsection we will show how it is possible, for example,
using a Script to force the loading, the saving and exporting
of certain recipes when a bit in the device is raised. To do this,
we assign this Script to the event OnRawValueChange of the
control bit (in our case, the variable Control). The PLC raises
the status of the bit every X minutes allowing the Script to
operate.
The Script operates the saving of the export file using a format
of the type ric_DATA_ORA.xml.
In the project we create a type of recipe called Proportions
and define it as we wish; this will be used in the Script.
646
Chapter 9
Scripts
In this example we also introduce the use of a function that

checks a variable and returns a value; namely, the values
relating to the days, months, hours, minutes and seconds
returned by the functions VBSCRIPT can be values of 1 digit.
So that all files saved have the same format and the same
length, we write a function of a few rows that adds a 0 in front
of a digit if it is less than 10.
Using POLYMATH we create a Script in the usual way, but in

the general page we assign a name (addzero), a type of
returned value (Variant) and an input value (value,
numeric). We have created the structure of our function: now
we write its code:
If value<10 Then
value="0" & value
End If
addzero=value
If the input value (value) is less than ten (that is, consists of
only one digit), add the string 0 to the variable and finally it
returns the value of Value (if the cycle is not accessed the
function simply returns the value received as an input
parameter). The following is an example of applying this
function: addzero(5) is invoked by giving the value 5, and
returns the value 05.
Now let us analyze the code of our main Script:
a=ESAHMI.ESATAG("Check").GetRawValue()
First of all we read the raw value of the Check variable and if
its value is 1 we run our operations (this way we avoid
executing them when the bit passes from 1 to 0). The If cycle
is as follows:
If (a=1) Then
ESAHMI.ESARECIPETRF.RecipeBufferUpload
"Proportions",0
ESAHMI.ESARECIPETRF.SaveRecipe
"Proportions","Recipe",0
Chapter 9
647
Scripts
End If
We execute the upload of the recipe loaded onto the PLC (type
is Proportions) in the first rows of the cycle, while in the
second row we save that recipe (using the name Recipe) onto
the terminal. Now all we need is the save phase that is run
using the following instruction:
ESAHMI.ESARECIPEARC.RecipeExport
dest,"Proportions",""
ESAHMI.ESATAG.WriteValue Check,0
All the recipes are exported (the third parameter is an empty
string) and they are saved in the file indicated in the string
variable dest which we shall now go on to construct. After the
save operation the check bit returns to 0.
The string dest is constructed by adding the details relating
to the date and time of the execution of the operation. This
information can be obtained using the functions put at the
users disposal by the programming language, VBScript:
time=Now()
date=Date()
day=addzero(Day(date)
month=addzero(Month(date)
year=Year(dat)
hour=addzero(Hour(time)
minute=addzero(Minute(time)
second=addzero(Second(time)
dest="Hard Disk2\ric_" & day & "-" & month & "-" & year &
"_h" & hour & "." & minute & "." & second & ".xml"
As we can see, the variables day, month, hour, minute and
second are passed to the addzero function defined by us in
which the zeroes for one-digit values are added.
The final instruction leads to constructing the string dest
indicating the path and name of the file to which the recipes
are exported. In our case, we will save onto the support called
Hard Disk2 (which, for example, could be a USB key) with a
name of the type ric_02-12-2005_h12.13.08.xml. In this
way we will be certain to have a series of distinct exportations
in a file with unique names in terms of the support.
What follows is an overall view of the Script that has just been
configured
648
Chapter 9
Scripts
Example 5 - Canceling all the recipes in the VT

Putting together the methods described in this section you can
construct customized functions according to your own project
needs. In this example we shall see how to create a function
of just a few rows that will cancel all the recipes saved in the
VT. This is useful for avoiding cancelling each individual recipe
manually and substituting it with a cumulative cancellation.
We also introduce a few rows of code allowing us to time the
execution of the entire script (giving us an identifying value of
the time taken for it).
Let us now analyze the code:
t=Timer()
R_Type="Dieci_Var"
In the first line we ask for the instant the Script starts (the
Timer function returns the number of seconds elapsed since
12:00 AM) and we save this in variable (t). In the second line
we define the recipe type whose instances we want to cancel
completely (alternatively we could pass this string value as a
parameter for the function, as seen in example 4 for the
addzero function).
Next we go and get the name of the first recipe and save it in
a variable (a):
a=ESAHMI.ESARECIPEARC.GetFirstRecipeName(R_Type)
if there are no recipes for the type indicated (R_Type), the
function returns an empty string (). Thus cancellation should
only occur if the string returned is different from . We,
therefore, use a Do While cycle to make operation:
Do While a<>""
ESAHMI.ESARECIPEARC.DeleteRecipe R_Type,a,0
Loop
Chapter 9
649
Scripts
As we can see, the While cycle remains open until such time
as the value of a is different from the empty string (that is,
until recipes have been saved).
Cancellation occurs in accordance with the type indicated at
the beginning of the Script and the current value of a (recipe
name). In addition the value 0 is passed to avoid confirmation
being asked of the operator. Within the cycle we also update
the value of a by getting the new first recipe (we again use
GetFirst rather than GetNext because the delete operation has
changed the order of the recipes).
Exiting from the While cycle, all the recipes have been
eliminated, so all we can do is get the time taken by the
Script:
t=Timer()-t
return t
Using this instruction, the value of t is updated by removing
from the current value of Timer() the value obtained at the
beginning of the Script (saved in t). Thus, at the end of this
instruction t will contain the number of seconds elapsed
between the beginning and the end of the cancel operation.
Below is the complete code of our Script:
Example 6: Creates printout of list of recipes

What follows is an example illustrating the use of the print
functions. Supposing we want a paper printout of the list of
recipes present in the memory of the terminal. The logic
behind searching for recipes is similar to that used in the
previous example.
Let us first of all initialize the print session using the Start
method: by providing parameter 1 the Print options window is
shown in runtime before the print session starts. To abort the
print operation the user can click on the X of the window. This
control is carried out with an If that checks and, where
appropriate, stops the running of all the other code rows:
if (ESAHMI.ESAPRN.Start(1)=1) Then
Now we create a page heading of a title and two blank rows to
separate the title from the contents. To leave blank rows we
650
Chapter 9
Scripts
use the method WriteLN, passing an empty string. Before

writing the title, we set the font at a higher value which we
then reduce to a smaller font for the rest of the page.
ESAHMI.ESAPRN.FontSize=16
ESAHMI.ESAPRN.WriteLN(Recipe Lists in the VT)
ESAHMI.ESAPRN.WriteLN()
ESAHMI.ESAPRN.WriteLN()
ESAHMI.ESAPRN.FontSize=12
At this point we instance the read-cycle of the recipes saved
in the VT using the methods GetFirstRecipeName and
GetNextRecipeName. Within the cycle we use the method
PrintLN to have the name of a recipe in each line.
R_Type= Tipo_Recipes_1
Do While a<>""
ESAHMI.ESAPRN.WriteLN(a)
a=ESAHMI.ESARECIPEARC.GetNextRecipeName(R_Type)
Loop
Up to this point we have prepared the contents of the page,
now we launch the command that actually starts the printing:
ESAHMI.ESAPRN.End()
End If
With the execution of this method the print process begins.
Below we show the complete text of the Script:
Chapter 10
651
Tutorial
10.
Tutorial
The purpose of this chapter is to give practical examples of

how POLYMATH can be used to create complete projects. We
shall try to include all the functions offered by the application
together with simple but exhaustive descriptions. For our
project we will be using an ESA VT595 terminal with Windows CE operating system and a Telemecanique TSX 37 Micro PLC.
The following sections deal with the editing for every aspect of
the programming phase beginning from Hardware and Software configuration to navigation procedures, access and management of alarms and recipes in the project. In this Tutorial
project we do not intend to explain how Scripts are composed
or how to use the Library, as these topics are already fully
dealt with elsewhere in this manual (see chap. 9, Scripts
page 553 and see chap. 7, POLYMATH Libraries page 479).
Phase 1 - The
Project and
Hardware
Configuration
The first operation that must be performed with POLYMATH is

the creation of a new project, defining its operating procedures. The quickest and most natural way to do this is to create a project using a Wizard. To do this go to the main menu
and select File->New. In the work area there will be a series
of windows for determining general preferences and those relating to the Hardware aspect of the project.
652
Chapter 10
Tutorial
First of all we are asked to identify the model of ESA terminal

that we are using and that we intend to use for our project. In
our case, we will select VT595CE from among the CE panels in
the list and then click on Continue.
In the next page we select the device the ESA panel should
interface with (in our example we will use a Telemecanique
PLC. Using the list of devices (in the form of a tree-diagram),
we search the category of PLC to find the makers of our chosen device. We select the model we are using, one which uses
a compatible protocol (in our case, Unitelway TSX07/37/47/
57 Premium) and then click on Continue to proceed with the
configuration.
Chapter 10
653
Tutorial
The last operation is to give a name to our project and a description allowing us to identify it. The names and the descriptions given in this phase have no functional value in the
project but serve only to make identifying it easier. At this
point we click on Continue and then End to conclude the
project set-up operations.
POLYMATH now creates all the connections we need to interact
with the panel-device (communication ports, addresses etc.).
The projects Hardware settings can, of course, be changed at
any time simply by clicking on Hardware Configuration in
Project Explorer.
Phase 2 Software
configuration
When configuring the Software we can define the global preferences relating to our project. In our example we customize
the project by stipulating two languages, three user levels, a
personalized font (not one of the default ones) and a Timer.
We shall, however, leave the options relating to the translations of messages and systems alarms unchanged. (The programmer can, of course, decide to customize every single
message.)
Setting project languages
We wish to produce a multi-language project, in which it will
be up to the end-user (operator) to decide the language with
which to interact with the panel in runtime (in practice, this
means choosing the language in which the messages, the errors and the texts that appear in the pages will appear). In our
example we shall set two languages: Italian and English. To
carry out this operation, we go to the appropriate page by
clicking on the Project Explorer option Languages in the
VT595CE Configuration Software.
654
Chapter 10
Tutorial
By default POLYMATH inserts English in the project, while by

clicking on Add a new language can be introduced. In our
case Italian is introduced as a second default language (we
can always change the project languages by selecting them
from the pull-down menu).
Using the same page, we set Italian as the display language

at the opening the project in runtime. In any case, the operator can change the current display language by using the
commands that give us access to it.
Inserting a new font
Now let us add two more fonts to display the project texts
with.
For example, we select the fonts Trebuchet MS and Verdana

from the list containing the fonts in the PC where POLYMATH
has been installed.
Chapter 10
655
Tutorial
We must also assign IDs to the fonts we have just added so

that they can easily be identified when we want to use them
in the project: Font_Trebuchet and Font_Verdana.
Settings identifying users
The next step is to define the users of our project. It is necessary to know from the outset who will be interfacing with our
project and what their respective rights will be.
ln our project we will stipulate 2 users: one at level 1 (maximum access rights) and one at level 5 (lower credentials). As
for user names and passwords, we will call them user1 and
user5 respectively (same value for user name and password,
in general it is advisable to insert different strings).
The same window now allows us to access the General mask

to set general values relating to managing users in runtime.
For example, we set the automatic logout after a period of inactivity at 5 minutes (300 seconds) and force the view of the
first page (Page) when the logout is executed. In conclusion
we set a name (e.g. log) for the file to register the users activity.
656
Chapter 10
Tutorial
Setting global keys

We now set the global keys of the application. Their functions
come into effect whenever the button corresponding to them
is pressed (using either the physical or the virtual keyboard)
irrespective of the context.
In our project F1 will be assigned the function displaying the

page-linked Help; in this way, whenever the operator presses
button F1 the Help relating to the page being displayed will
appear.
Setting timers
The last operation of the software configuration is setting timer to be used to manage a trend (see below).
We set a One-shot Timer called Timer to last 1.7 seconds

with an ascending direction.
Phase 3 Configuration
of variables and
Memory areas
Without doubt, data management is the most important aspect in creating a project for the work of the terminal. It is essential to have a clear idea of the structure the data needs to
respect in runtime and how the operator can access them.
Chapter 10
657
Tutorial
With POLYMATH internal variables as well as device and system variables can be managed (see chap. 5, RefreshGroups
page 138). It is also possible to manage memory areas dedicated, for example, to status indication commands.
Naturally, the list of variables can be accessed at any point
during the editing of the project. In our example, we do this
to define some examples of each type of variable.
Defining device variables
If we click twice on the Tags option of the Project Explorer,
we access the list of variables defined in the project.
Now click on Add to insert the new variables.
For the moment we will introduce 4 variables which we will

then edit individually.
We shall now describe in detail how the first variable is edited,
the procedure being identical for the following ones.
We start with the General mask where we digit the name and
the comment of the variable :
Let us call the variable num_pezzi (and add a brief description which may be useful for identifying what the variable is
for in the future), defining its location as Device.
658
Chapter 10
Tutorial
In the Value mask we specify the type of value as Integer.
We will leave the default settings in the Device mask (memory

address = Memory Address) and proceed to enable the option
Update continually, even when no tag is used by a field so
that this variable can be controlled by a Script. The value of
the word containing the variable must also be assigned, specifying memory addresses different for all tags so that there
will not be wrong references in runtime (unless there is a definite intention for them to coincide): we give the first variable
the memory address 0.
Note: The address of the variables can be edited directly through

this mask when individual variable areas being edited or, alternatively, using the mask for managing addresses in the device memory.
In either case, the changes made to a MemoryAddress will influence all the variables referring to it.
Chapter 10
659
Tutorial
The next step is to set the limits (on both the panel and the
device values) for this variable. Let us suppose that this is
always a value between 0 and 1000, then if you try to go outside these limits in runtime, the value will automatically be put
at the nearest limit to the value requested. Our example will
not use conversions and thresholds: we leave the possibility
of assigning these in the way described in the related part of
this manual (see chap. 5, Conversion page 147 and see
chap. 5, Thresholds page 149) to the user.
Thus we have finished configuring the first variable,
num_pezzi; the other 3 variables are configured in exactly
the same way and thus we can edit them to give:
- an integer variable called int_var with an address of word 1
- a real variable called real_var with an address of word 2
- a string variable called str_var with an address starting at
word 3 and having a length of 8 characters (so it also occupies
word 4, 5 and 6) as shown in the figure below :
Defining system variables

We will now define a further two project variables indicating
the current status of the process in runtime; the variables that
allow us to do this are system variables (see Appendix A System Variables page 737).
For example we will define one variable indicating the ID number of the language currently in use in the project
660
Chapter 10
Tutorial
(SYS_CurrentLanguageID) and one indicating the date and

time of the panel (SYS_DateAndTime).
Defining internal variables
We will now also use an internal variable that does not relate
to the device in any way. It is a variable that works on the terminal irrespective of the status of the PLC. This type of variable is defined differently from a device variable, in that it is
not possible to define memory, conversion and threshold values.
We use the General mask to specify the name (like

internal_var) and, of course, we set the type of address as
Internal. In addition, we enable the option allowing the variable to be made retentive, that is, to maintain its value even
after the terminal has been switched off. In the Value mask
we set the type of variable as Integer.
Defining memory areas
Besides individual variables, with POLYMATH it is possible to
define consecutive memory areas (value arrays or indexed
variables) that can be used, for example, to define Exchange
Areas (see chap. 5, Exchange areas page 132).
To insert these memory areas in a project use the same procedure as for normal variables :
Chapter 10
661
Tutorial
After assigning a name to the variable, array_var_4, we use

the Value mask to specify the type (like ArrayOfUnsignedInteger) and the dimensions of the area (equivalent of 4 elements).
We now use the Device mask to set as starting memory address word 7 (namely the first to remain free - as a result,
words 8-9 and 10 will also be occupied) and enable the continuous update option as illustrated below :
In conclusion, we use the same procedure to define another

two memory areas, calling them array_var_6 and
array_var_2 respectively and defining their dimensions as
equal to 6 and 2. We give the variable array_var_6 the addresses from word 11 to 16 inclusive and give the variable
array_var_2 the addresses word 17 and 18.
Setting refresh times
Now that we have defined the list of variables, we can go on
to attribute particular refresh policies to some of them by accessing the list of variables (double-clicking on Variables in
Project Explorer) and opening the Refresh Groups mask.
We add a customized group to the list of groups by clicking on

Add. We will call the new type NewRefresh and set the update time as 2 seconds.
662
Chapter 10
Tutorial
Finally we attribute the group we have just defined to the variable int_var by acting on the tag "Device" window :
For the other variables we will leave the refresh group as predefined "Class_0 : as fast as possible".
Summary of variables and memory area
We have thus defined 9 variables of different types that we

can use as we wish within our project. The next table offers a
summary also of the use of the memory addresses as specified in our work up to this point.
Tabella 1: Organization of Memory area
Address
Memory name
Variable
W0
MemoryAddress
num_pezzi
W1
MemoryAddress_1
int_var
W2
MemoryAddress_2
real_var
W 3-4-5-6
MemoryAddress_3
str_var
Chapter 10
663
Tutorial
Tabella 1: Organization of Memory area
Phase 4 General
configuration
of the VT
Address
Memory name
Variable
W 7-8-9-10
MemoryAddress_4
array_var_4
W 11-12-13-1415-16
MemoryAddress_5
array_var_6
W 17-18
MemoryAddress_6
array_var_2
Having defined the Hardware and Software structure as well

as the data areas of the job (variables), we now also provide
the general work settings for the terminal.
For this we double-click on the name of the terminal in Project

Explorer (in our case this is VT595CE).
Setting the main window
Here, in the VT section, the window is again arranged in
masks. We go to the Main Window mask, where we can set
our general preferences regarding the appearance of the
project in runtime.
664
Chapter 10
Tutorial
In our example we have decided to specify the dimensions of

the grid as 5-5 (to make the editing more precise) and to
leave the default settings for the page display (focus, reduce
button, etc.).
Using the lower part of the mask, we set at 5 the consent level
allowing a user to display system pages (then access is given
when you log on). We then edit the Help-pages font by clicking
on
A different font can be specified for each of the project languages. In our example we set Font_Trebuchet which we previously inserted for both languages and set the font size at 25.
These changes will be valid for all the Help-pages we set.
Chapter 10
665
Tutorial
Configuring the Boot
In this mask we set the start-up options of the project. We indicate the language of the Operating System (English) and
leave the page displayed on start-up as the default option
(Page).
Setting Exchange areas
The last terminal configuration operation for our project is the
definition of the exchange areas. After moving to the appropriate mask, we specify which of the variables (areas) created
are to be dedicate to these checks.
We add a status area (see Appendix C - Status area

page 761) by clicking on Add and in the variables menu we
assign the variable with the dimension of 6 (array_var_6).
The are type we will leave as the type of VT. The size of the
status areas is always 6 words.
Using the same procedure, we now also add a command area

to which we assign the variable array_var_4 for the invoke
command and the variable array_var_2 for the command to
see the results of the operation. Thus in runtime word 7 will
be checked for commands as indicated in the appropriate appendix (see Appendix D - Command area page 765).
666
Chapter 10
Tutorial
Phase 5 Defining the

alarms
At this point in the programming we proceed to define the

alarms to be taken into consideration using runtime. In our
project we will define an alarm assigned to the variable
num_pezzi: first of all, using Project Explorer, we click on
Alarms and then on Add to create a new alarm. By clicking
twice on the alarm we have just created, we can start editing
it :
We set the name Allarme_1 and include a brief description.

The lower part of the mask is used to define the more important properties of the alarm, namely the reference variable
and the type of activation. Our alarm refers to the variable
int_var and is activated (by value) when it assumes the value
200.
We go to the properties mask simply to define the priority,

here maximum (FatalError), the group of alarms (managing
the groups is only useful for cataloguing alarms in the project
when many of them are configured) and a description of the
alarm (the description is displayed on the panel when there is
an error in runtime). As alarm type we will leave the default
setting (ISA).
Chapter 10
667
Tutorial
We now use the lower part to enable the log in the history
buffer (in practical terms, with this option the instances of this
alarm are listed in the history table we will set in due course).
We also enable the association with a page to be displayed
when requested by the user after the alarm has been raised
(for now we will assign the first page).
General alarm settings
A series of general options relating to managing the alarms
can be accessed by clicking twice on Alarms in Project Explorer. While we will leave the masks relating to the resources and
the behavior of the alarm buffer memory unchanged, we will
make changes to the Priorities mask.
In this mask we will indicate the colors to be used to represent

(in the pages showing the alarms with complex controls) the
instances of the alarms that have FatalError priority, like the
one defined in the project.
668
Chapter 10
Tutorial
in the last mask we select the option Message and set the
same priority FatalError that we set for the alarm we defined).
In this section we can establish how the operator is to be advised of the alarm being set off; we have chosen message, hat
is, a little icon will appear on the screen (irrespective of the
page the project is in when the alarm is raised). By clicking on
this alarm icon in runtime the operator is taken to the page
identified in the second field of this mask. Furthermore, we
will leave the default image as the image associated with the
alarm icon and at the bottom we will keep the enablement for
the warning noise.
Phase 6 Defining recipe
types
We will now insert the definition of a type of recipe in our

project: in POLYMATH we define only the structure of the recipe, the instances themselves of recipes must be defined (and
appropriately saved or exported to a file) in runtime by the operator.
Chapter 10
669
Tutorial
We use the General mask to set only the name RecipeType

and a short comment, leaving the default ID set by POLYMATH.
Now we use the Fields mask to insert the variables that really
make up the recipe. In our example we click on Add and add
two fields as shown above. We introduce two fields containing
the variables int_var and str_var obtaining the following
list:
Phase 7 Loading
Images
At this point we can try to load some images in the project that
we can go on to use in our pages to make the functions more
comprehensible or simply to give the project a more pleasing
appearance. For example we introduce two images for the
project languages, namely English and Italian, provided, of
course, that these two images are on our hard disk.
670
Chapter 10
Tutorial
First we load the image of the Italian flag, clicking on the Images option in Project Explorer (right key) and then on Add
New.
The list of images will now show the new image Image; by
clicking twice on this we can edit it.
Chapter 10
671
Tutorial
Now just click on the empty area in the work area to browse
the contents of the Hard Disk and choose the file to insert.
You are now directed to the editing mask of the images where
you can set dimensions and compression characteristics. Color variants of the image can also be defined at this point (see
chap. 5, Operations performable on an image page 235).
For our images we will leave all these properties unchanged.
We use the same procedure to introduce the images of the
flag denoting the English language and the logo to use in our
project ;
The image objects of POLYMATH take the name of the source

file but can still be edited: we have introduced 3 images with
the names ita, eng and logo.
Phase 8 Defining text
and image lists
When defining a project it may be useful to display images or

dynamic texts to the operator in relation to the value of a variable. For this reason, POLYMATH allows you to define object
lists that can then be invoked in the project in association with
a variable (depending on the value of the variable assigned,
one or another item in the list will be shown).
Let us now create a simple list of images using the two images
of the flags introduced in the previous section. The procedure
for creating the list is the usual one: double-click in Project Ex-
672
Chapter 10
Tutorial
plorer on the option ImageList; click on Add and then in

Project Explorer click twice on the list to be able to edit.
In the edit mask we leave the name of the list as per default,
ImageList, and click on Add to introduce images to the list :
In the Images column of the table we select the image to be

introduced from the pull-down menu (choosing it from those
included in the project). We add both the images related to
the languages (ita and eng).
The procedure for creating text lists is exactly the same as for
image lists: after creating one (with the default name of TextList) the following situation obtains :
We now add 4 texts relating to the value of a variable; for example, we insert the following strings The level of pieces is
low, The level of pieces is normal, The level of pieces is
high and The level of pieces is very high.
Each string inserted needs a translation in all the languages of
the project, thus in our case we have to provide a translation
in English. To insert the translation we click on the icon
ad-
Chapter 10
673
Tutorial
jacent to each string, thereby opening the corresponding

translation window :
Having provided the translation for all 4 strings, we have finished editing our list and can use it for constructing our pages.
Phase 9 Setting
Pipelines
Suppose we want to link the values of two variables by defining a mechanism whereby the value of one tag is continuously
copied onto the other. In POLYMATH this can be done by defining a Pipeline.
After double-clicking on the Pipeline option (double-click in

Project Explorer), we click on Add to edit the pipeline created. We shall leave the name (Pipeline) and the default ID (1)
created by the application.
We use the lower part of the mask now to set the specific behavior of the Pipeline: the source variable for the value is
num_pezzi, while that value is to be copied onto
internal_val (destination variable). In the third field we select
674
Chapter 10
Tutorial
the copy mode (CopyonChange, that is, the value is copied every time the value of the source variable changes).
Phase 10 Defining a
Trend Buffer
If we want to constantly monitor the progress of a variable,

we can do this using Trend. This is a graphic object displaying
the data relating to the sampling of the values assumed by a
particular variable. The sample readings are saved in a memory called TrendBuffer.
After double-clicking on the item TrendBuffers (double-click

in Project Explorer), we click on Add to be able to edit the
buffer created. We will leave the name (TrendBuffer) and the
default ID (1) created by the application in the General mask.
In the Buffer mask, however, we set the options for how the
buffer in question will operate. First of all we set as the source
the variable to be monitored (num_pezzi), while we select
the acquisition mode OnTimer and assign to it the Timer
(Timer) we created in Phase 2. We must remember to change
the Timer so that its event, OnTimerFired, has assigned to it
the function AcquireSample for this TrendBuffer (the timer
must also be made to start in runtime to enable the count. A
good solution here is to assign a function or a Script to the
opening of the initial page).
We will leave the general settings in the lower part unchanged
but activate the log onto file option identifying the file
LogTrend.xml as the export file. In addition, we disable the
automatic start up of the Trend at the beginning of the runtime (it must be enabled when necessary using a function or
Script).
We have now defined the buffer of the trend we shall now insert into a page (by introducing a display field referring to this
buffer).
Chapter 10
675
Tutorial
Phase 11 Graphic setting,

drawing a
Frame
At this point of the work the functional structure of the project

has been almost completely set. We now need only define the
graphic presentation of the project in runtime. POLYMATH
puts at our disposal essentially three presentation elements:
classic full-screen pages, pop-up pages (pages that open on
request overlapping full-screen pages) and frames (portions
of a page common to a group of pages).
The interrelated use of these three elements allows complex
and flexible configurations to be used that can meet every operational requirement.
Defining a frame
In our tutorial example we start with the definition of a frame
that we then introduce into all the pages of our project. Basically, this frame will contain the buttons for navigating between the pages, a Quit project button and information
regarding the current time.
We will create our frame using Project Explorer as indicated in

the above figure. By double-clicking on the frame created, the
gridded editing page will open in which we can place the objects we want.
676
Chapter 10
Tutorial
First we reduce our frame so that it becomes a horizontal bar.

This we do by clicking on
in the toolbar to select the frame
and then by going to the red points and dragging the frame as
shown below :
This way the frame assumes the size indicated. We can now
define a background color by opening the Properties Editor.
Within the Background option we select the color blue while
leaving all the other options unchanged :
Chapter 10
677
Tutorial
Our frame will thus appear as in the figure below and will be
ready to accept objects placed within it :
We shall begin by introducing a button for navigating between

pages, to be more precise, for displaying the previous page.
To introduce a touch button, we click on
in the applications
bar and draw the outline inside the frame :
After selecting the new button, we go to Properties Editor and

change certain graphic attributes relating to the button; first
we set the size: the width at 50 pixels, the height at 25, horizontal position at 5 and vertical at 3.
Now we add the text to be seen on the button :
678
Chapter 10
Tutorial
We choose label mode and click on

to edit the translations
of the text: for English we insert Back, for Italian Indietro :
Once the texts have been defined, we edit their size and color.
Continuing to work in Properties Editor, we set as text color
Yellow and click on
in the Font option to edit the character
size :
Chapter 10
679
Tutorial
Using the editing window that now opens we choose the size
of 13 and choose Bold from among the properties :
At this point the only thing left to do is to set the colors of the
button: we select green as the background and border color
when the button is released and blue with a white border when
it is pressed. We also set the border width as 3 pixels.
680
Chapter 10
Tutorial
The last operation to be performed on the button is to define

its function. For this we open the Events Editor and, while
keeping the button selected, assign a function to the event
OnReleased by clicking on
;
This opens the list of predefined functions (see Appendix B Predefined functions page 745) from which we select the
function Show previous page (after clicking on Add Function)
as shown below :
Once we have clicked on Close in the window for assigning

functions we have finished editing the button. Following the
same procedure explained in this example we can edit all the
buttons in our pages. We shall now see how to create other
buttons using the work just done.
Chapter 10
681
Tutorial
Duplicating buttons
So far we have only inserted one button into our frame, one
with the function of invoking the previous page (the order followed is that of the IDs set for the pages). Now we can create
a similar button but one with the opposite function, that is,
show the next page. We need just duplicate the button already
created to avoid edit again from square one; to do this we select the button with the right-hand key :
and Duplicate in the menu that appears: we now have two

completely identical buttons.
The new button is to differ from the first only in three aspects:
the text of the label (Forward and Continue instead of
Back and Reverse), the horizontal position (which can also
be set by dragging the button to the right) and the reference
function (using Events Editor ShowNextPage rather than
ShowPreviousPage can be set). In just a few steps we have
inserted a second button :
682
Chapter 10
Tutorial
Using the same procedure, that is, duplicating and changing

the function in the Events Editor and the translations of the label in the Properties Editor, we insert another 3 buttons: one
for the login (UserLogin function), one for the logout (UserLogout function) and a last one for quitting runtime and set
as indicated below.
After duplicating one of the already defined buttons, we use
the Properties Editor to change the label text (we insert Quit
and Uscita respectively for the two languages) and the color
of the area when the button is released (we insert orange) as
indicated below :
We now move to the Events Editor and change the function

assigned to the button as seen above: we choose the function
ShowPageByName as shown in the figure below :
Chapter 10
683
Tutorial
The lower part of the mask contains a request to specify the

page to be seen. In this phase we can also indicate a page that
does not yet exist in the project but that we will edit later on.
So we now select the option pop-up pages in the first pulldown menu, the second remains empty as no Pop-up pages
exist in our job so far. At this point we click on
to create
one.
The page PopUpPage that was created with this operation
will be edited in the next section when we deal with the popup pages.
To finish editing our Frame, we insert a DateTime field within
it so as to let the operator see the date and time at any point
(assuming the frame will be added to every page of the
project). We click on the
button of the toolbar and draw
the outline of the field in the frame. Once the field has been
inserted, we can begin editing its properties using the Properties Editor.
First of all we change the height of the field setting it at 25

pixels and assign the system variable SYS_DateAndTime (set
684
Chapter 10
Tutorial
in phase 3) to the attribute ID Variable by selecting it from the

pull-down menu.
We can now edit the graphic aspect of the field, like text color:
we select Yellow and attribute to the font a size of 15 pixels in
Bold with the same procedure that we saw for the touch buttons.
Finally we choose the color blue for the AreaColor and for the
BorderColor; for the border we choose as a width dimension 3
pixels and as a style 3D bump.
The complete frame will look like this :
The advantages that derive from using frames are numerous,

in particular:
- this portion of the page only needs to be edited once rather
than having to re-edit every time its elements are to be
present in a new page;
- editing one frame you can make changes to all the pages
containing that frame (for example, if later you want to insert
a new button in the frame, this will be present in all the pages
containing the frame with just one operation).
Chapter 10
685
Tutorial
Phase 12 Creating popup pages
Pop-up pages are pages overlapping with already opened (not

yet closed) full screen pages. They are generally smaller than
the complete page and are invoked by particular events
(Scripts, pressing buttons, events assigned to variables, etc.).
It is a good idea for the pop-up page to include the function
relating to its closure (to avoid leaving Pop-ups open that
might create confusion inside the project).
In our example we have created a Pop-up page (PopUpPage)
in the foregoing section; we associated its appearance with
pressing the Quit button (the one identified by the color orange). Let us suppose that when this key is pressed, a mask
for confirming the Quit operation appears (that is, a Pop-up).
In effect, two items will appear: a label asking in the two languages of the project whether you wish to quit or not as well
as two buttons, one for negating (associated with the function
of closing the current pop-up) and one for confirming the Quit
operation (associated with the predefined function QuitRuntime).
To be able to edit the pop-up created in the previous section,
we scroll the Project Explorer list and find it under the option
Pop-up pages.
Before beginning to edit the graphics of the pop-up, we access

its general settings present in the General mask. The only
change to be made in this mask is to disable the option Show
the title bar thus there will be no blue bar over the pop-up in
runtime. The other options will be left unchanged.
If we return to the Fields mask, we will find a preview of what
the pop-up will look like :
686
Chapter 10
Tutorial
Unlike Frames, Pop-ups can be freely moved around the

screen as well as resized. To move a pop-up select it by clicking on
in the toolbar and drag it to the required area. In
our example we will move the pop-up to the bottom righthand corner of the page as shown below :
To make the editing of the graphics easier, we enlarge the

pop-up preview by clicking on the zoom icons (
or
)in the toolbar.
We are now ready to edit the graphics of the pop-up. Repeating the procedure employed in the previous section for the
button, we open the Properties Editor and change some of the
options there. We enable the outline of the pop-up and set a
size of 5 pixels; for the 3D effect we select Recessed and for
Chapter 10
687
Tutorial
the background color and the frame of the pop-up we select

green :
Our pop-up is now ready to accept objects placed in it. As already mentioned, we will start by inserting a label by clicking
on
in the toolbar and drawing its outline inside the pop-up.
Using the Properties Editor we now assign the multilanguage

text of the label (Are you sure you want to quit? and Confirm exit from project?), the font (30, yellow) and a color for
the background and border of the label (both blue) as well as
the border dimension of 5 pixels and the Bump 3D effect).
Now the label looks like this :
688
Chapter 10
Tutorial
The only things missing now are the buttons confirming or

canceling the Quit command. We create these as set out in detail for the last parameter, remembering to assign the close
current pop-up function to the Cancel key and the exit from
runtime function to the Confirm key. In our example we create
a blue key for cancelling (with a label saying Cancel and Annulla) and a red one for the confirmation. The resulting popup will be as follows (with the label saying OK and Conferma) :
Defining a Help-page for the Pop-up

In phase 2 we configured the project to manage the global
keys, specifically, we stipulated that when the F1 key was
pressed in any context of the project the Help relating to the
page being displayed at that point would be shown.
We will therefore define a text to be displayed when the operator presses F1 with the current pop-up open. The Help-pages
are edited while the page they refer to is being created: just
move to the Help-pages mask to start editing.
Chapter 10
689
Tutorial
In this phase the dimensions and position of the Help-page

can be defined: we shall leave the default values but change
the text the operator will see. We click on
to start editing
the text :
We insert the texts of advisory messages to be displayed in

the page, providing, of course, translations in both the
projects languages. After clicking on OK, our Help-page is
complete and with that our page pop-up, too.
Phase 13 Drawing Full
Screen pages
At this point in the project, the only thing left to do is define

the number of pages and the way data can be accessed from
them. In our example we first define the default page created
in POLYMATH that we defined as the Start page of the project
690
Chapter 10
Tutorial
(see chap. 10, Configuring the Boot page 665) and then we
go on to create pages that use complex controls.
Editing the Start page
When a new project is created, POLYMATH defines a default
page in it. This is initially empty but can, naturally, be edited
by the programmer who can also add an unlimited number of
pages to the project. The ways of navigating within these pages are defined by the programmer using the many made available by the application (buttons with predefined functions,
Scripts, user checks etc.).
To edit the default page, we double-click on it in the Project
Explorer :
At this point the editing masks for the page appear in the work
area. We move to the Fields mask that shows a preview of how
the page will appear in runtime. Now just drag the object into
the page required (the positions can be modified with greater
precision by operating the Properties Editor for each individual
object). Naturally, the first time the page preview is accessed
it will appear completely empty :
Chapter 10
691
Tutorial
You can now decide whether to display or remove the grid inside the page by clicking on the
icon in the toolbar.
Introducing a frame
We begin editing the page by introducing the frame we created in Phase 11: we select the frame using Project Explorer and
drag it into the page as indicated in the figure below :
We now position the frame in the lower part of the page :
As we can see, all the buttons and graphic properties specified

in the edit phase of the frame have been imported.
Introducing an image
Now we can introduce a second element into of our first page:
we apply one of the images inserted in Phase 7, that is, the
image saved in the project as logo. We can do this in the
692
Chapter 10
Tutorial
same way that we inserted the frame, in other words by dragging (the quickest method) or we can use another procedure
as set out below. In the toolbar we click on the image icon
and trace the outline of the area that will take our image on
the page :
We have now defined where the image is to be placed, so we

can define which image to introduce. While keeping the area
just defined selected, we move to the Properties Editor. Next
to the Images option there is a pull-down menu containing all
the images introduced into the project: we choose the image
logo :
We can also change other properties of the image area: for

example, we will set the border color as white so as not to see
the edges of the image and have a more pleasing effect.
Chapter 10
693
Tutorial
Inserting a symbol field

Now let us imagine we want to insert a symbol field (relating
to a list of images) which will indicate in this page the language currently selected by the operator. We click on the
icon in the toolbar and draw the area that will take the field :
Once the perimeter of the area has been defined, we move to

the Properties Editor in the usual way, indicating first of all the
variable the field refers to (that is, the one whose value will
be checked and in relation to which the image to be displayed
will be chosen). We select the system variable relating to the
ID of the current language (SYS_CurrentLanguageID, defined
in Phase 3) as illustrated below :
We also assign as an image list the one created in the course

of Phase 8 (ImageList) and attribute the values relating to
the images: we click on the
key next to the Value option.
694
Chapter 10
Tutorial
In the window that opens we assign the value 1 for the image
eng and 2 for the image ita. The IDs of the project languages are shown as these latter are created (Phase 2); take care
that they correspond when assigned to items in an image list
(or text list when necessary).
Finally we also change some graphic details like the color of
the area (blue) and the border (white).
At the side of this symbol field we also put a button permitting

us to change the display language of the project (by assigning
the function ChangeNextLanguage). We dealt with how to edit
a button in Phase 11, so now we follow the same steps to create the button for changing languages.
Chapter 10
695
Tutorial
Introducing value indicators

We now give the page an object for indicating value for our
variable num_pezzi. As illustrated elsewhere in this manual,
there is a set different objects for displaying/editing values. In
our project we will insert a knob-potentiometer that allows us
also to set the value of the variable to suit our requirements.
We click on the
icon relating to the knob-potentiometer in
the toolbar and draw the destination area in the page. POLYMATH will draw the object in the page as can be seen from the
following figure :
While keeping the potentiometer selected, we move to the

Properties Editor and modify some attributes. First of all, we
assign the variable num_pezzi as reference variable (the one
whose value will be displayed/edited); then we assign the
number of values to be displayed on the bar (5) and the number of notches to display between the values (5).
In addition we define the intervals of the scale and the related

values by clicking on the
icon adjacent to the Color Intervals option. In the window that now appears, we click on Add
to add new intervals and create 6 intervals with gaps of 200
per interval as in the figure below.
696
Chapter 10
Tutorial
We then move to the Colors mask and set the color green for
the low level, orange for the middle level and red for the highest level. Finally we click on Close to confirm the changes
made.
We must now perform an important operation, namely the

setting of restrictions on the use of this potentiometer. Still
positioned in the Properties Editor, we go to the Password Level option and enter the value 5 (for the user set in Phase 2).
This setting means that the value can be edited by means of

the potentiometer only by users who have logged in and
whose user level has a value lower than or equal to 5 (thus,
level 1 users can also edit). When the project starts, for ex-
Chapter 10
697
Tutorial
ample, the system gives the user level 10 until the log-in has
been performed. This means that if a user who has not logged
in (or with level greater than 5) tries to access the potentiometer (that is, tries to change the value of num_pezzi) the login window will automatically be displayed to make it possible
to perform the operation.
We need now only define the graphic details (as we have just
seen in the case of other objects) relating to the color of the
area, of the border and of the indicator (needle) of the value.
For example, in our project we set the color blue for the border
and the internal area, 5 for the border size with 3D Etched as
the style. The last step is to edit the indicator so that it will be
displayed in yellow. The preview of how the potentiometer will
appear is as below :
Setting a dynamic text

Suppose we want to relate a text to the value of the variable
monitored by the potentiometer. To help us do this, POLYMATH allows us to insert dynamic texts in the project pages:
the text displayed is chosen from a text list in runtime and it
depends on the current value of reference variable.
To add a dynamic text to the page, we click on the
icon in
the toolbar and draw the outline of the field in the page :
698
Chapter 10
Tutorial
Selecting the field just created, we move to the Properties Editor and specify the check variable (num_pezzi, the same one
that the potentiometer is monitoring) and the appropriate text
list (TextList) :
We now move to the Value option and click on

to start editing the values: we must specify a reference value for each
option in the text list. The corresponding string will be displayed whenever the value of num_pezzi reaches the exact
value specified in this window :
Chapter 10
699
Tutorial
We also have to specify the graphic properties of the label relating to the dynamic text using the same methods as already
seen for all the other objects we have added up to now (using
the Properties Editor).
Phase 14 Using complex
controls
POLYMATH allows you to insert complex controls for managing

elements like alarms, recipes, users and trends.
All these elements are edited in the same way, thus in this illustrative project we shall insert only one complex control: a
recipe editor.
First of all we create a new page (click with right key on Pages in Project Explorer, then on Add) and drag the frame created in Phase 11 into it.
In this way all the tools defined in the frame are again made
available to us in this page :
700
Chapter 10
Tutorial
Starting from this empty page we can begin to insert our

check window: to insert a recipe editor, we click on
and
draw the outline of the check window on the page :
POLYMATH will draw the recipe editor viewer with a standard

layout. By selecting it we open the Properties Editor and set
certain general graphic attributes: for example, we select a
color, blue, for the area and border, the width of the latter being set at 5 and the type as Bump :
Chapter 10
701
Tutorial
Internal editing of complex controls

After introducing the recipe editor and defining its general
graphic properties, we can start editing the internal components of the check window.
To perform this operation, we just double-click on the check
window that has just been added to the page. The work area
will show the Fields mask that is used to change the buttons
and the fields and their characteristics (see below) :
As we can see, the elements making up this control area are:

touch buttons, labels indicating the recipe type and a grid in
which the instances of recipes are inserted in runtime. In the
left section of the mask there is a list of buttons and labels that
can be inserted into the viewer: all those already present are
default elements so no change is made.
By selecting each internal object (button or label) in the Properties Editor we can change their respective properties, such
as graphic attributes or access procedures. For example, we
702
Chapter 10
Tutorial
could enable the download button only for level 5 users or

those with a lower level (higher priority) :
While the check buttons are being edited, the only difference
from standard buttons is that the events cannot be changed.
With POLYMATH each already has assigned to it a predefined
function).
The next section will describe how to edit the basic checking
element, the table grid.
Editing the grid
Remaining in the edit mask contained within the control area,
select the grid and open the Properties Editor
We can now change properties like the height of the columns

(we will set this at 25), the display of the vertical and horizontal scroll bars (we will leave both at TRUE) and the columns to
Chapter 10
703
Tutorial
be displayed in the table. We click on the

editing window opens :
icon and a new
The left-hand menu contains the list of columns to be seen in

the table in runtime. In the case of the recipe editor, this list
contains only two non-removable items (in general, the lists
for other controls can be customized). Furthermore, if we select each column in this list, we can use the right-hand section
of the mask to edit the values of column width and font properties for the table headings (titles). In our example, we set
for both columns a width of 104 pixels and heading font size
of 16 points. Finally we click on Close to confirm the changes
made.
Remember that the colors of the fields selected in the table in
runtime can be changed in carrying out the general editing of
the recipes (see chap. 5, Fields page 171).
In conclusion, using the last option in the Properties Editor
(ShowRecipeType), we select the type of recipe the check refers to (RecipeType).
Introducing other complex controls
Using the same procedure employed in introducing the recipe
editor, we can introduce other complex controls in new pages
(or even more than one in the same page). For example, in
our project, we create a new page in which we insert an active
alarms display table. Applying the same procedures as in the
previous subsections we obtain the following result :
704
Chapter 10
Tutorial
This we obtained by inserting the complex control, resizing it

and eliminating certain default buttons. Furthermore, we have
configured the control graphically so as to have a uniform setting within the project as a whole. The user can now practice
inserting also instances of other complex controls (recipe list,
alarm buffer and user table) all of which are edited in exactly
the same way as we have just seen.
Phase 15 Defining the
Trend graph
After inserting the complex controls we need into our project,

we can add a page containing a trend, a chart displaying the
behavior of a variable. Suppose that in our project we want to
constantly monitor the situation of the variable num_pezzi
graphically. In Phase 10 we defined a Trend buffer for acquiring and memorizing value samples acquired by the variable.
First of all we create a new page as in the previous phases and
drag the navigation frame inside it.
Now we can really start inserting the graph: in the toolbar we
click on
and draw the space where our trend should appear
in the page; when the mouse-key is released POLYMATH will
draw the basic structure for us :
Chapter 10
705
Tutorial
While keeping the graph we have just inserted selected, we

move to the Properties Editor to edit the graphic properties of
the trend area (employing the usual methods). To maintain a
graphic unity with the rest of the project so far edited, we set
blue as the color for the area and the border, which again is 5
pixels wide and in Bump style.
Internal editing takes place as with the other complex controls: just double-click on the area of the trend to be able to
edit :
706
Chapter 10
Tutorial
In this case, too, it will be possible to choose from the lefthand list the buttons and fields to be displayed on the Trend
simply by clicking on them (if the button chosen has already
been inserted, it will be removed).
For example, we insert the Zoom and GoTo buttons that allow
us to select the position of the graph. For each of the buttons
inserted we can edit their respective graphic properties, trying
always to maintain a homogeneous style within the project.
Editing the Trend chart

We can now go on to edit the basic element of the trend viewer, the chart containing the graph. We select the chart and
move to its Properties Editor. Using this window we can set all
the characteristics relating to graphic representation, like colors and scale values, lines and subdivisions. As area color we
choose gray and select a white, 3 pixel wide Bump border.
Chapter 10
707
Tutorial
We now change the representational properties of the horizontal value scale, choosing tenths of a second; we choose
dark blue as the color and, finally, a value interval of 1 :
We leave all the other values unchanged except for the colors
of the dividing lines that we set as white :
708
Chapter 10
Tutorial
The final option requires great care. In the Pens field we click
on the
button and a new configuration window appears :
This new window contains the operating methods of the Trend

pens, that is, the different ways the graphs and trend buffers
can be drawn. The left-hand section of the mask is used to define any number of pens; in our project we shall edit simply
the one created by default.
We can freely modify some of these properties: as type of
scale we assign the limits of the variable (already defined in
Phase 3 for the variable of the buffer, num_pezzi). We also
set the line-style as dash-dot, the marker as a little circle and
its color to be dark blue :
At the bottom of the page we see an example of a preview of

how the graph will appear. Finally we click on Close to confirm our changes and thereby conclude the editing of the trend
viewer.
Chapter 10
709
Tutorial
Phase 16 Compilation
and Download
We have now finished editing a simple project that uses all the
basic functions offered by POLYMATH. At the end of this tutorial, the reader will be able to be more familiar with the application and ready to create projects with the sure knowledge
of how to take full advantage of the numerous functions available.
Once the edit phase is over, before seeing the results of our
work, we must compile the relevant files and download them
onto the panel.
To start the compilation, in the toolbar click on the
icon.
The compilation starts straight away and the messages relating to its status will appear in the Log View under the Compilation mask :
As the instructions supplied in each phase have been correctly

followed, no error nor warning message will appear (provided
that we have also remembered to assign a Help-page for each
page created).
With no error signaled in the compilation phase, we are ready
to download onto the panel: we click on
and POLYMATH
proceeds by asking us for information regarding the connection between the PC and the terminal.
710
Chapter 10
Tutorial
In our example we have connected the terminal using the

standard COM1 serial port, so we do not need to edit what is
in the mask: VT model and connection mode. We click on
Connect after checking that the connection cable has been
properly attached to the terminal and PC.
In this phase POLYMATH compares the versions of the project
element on the panel and those to be downloaded. The next
window shows us a summary of this comparison :
The parts needing updating are highlighted in pink. In addition, the support and the destination path of the files in the
terminal can be changed. In our case we will leave everything
unchanged and click on Update only oldest to only update the
project. If you also want to download the firmware for the first
time, you are advised to click on Update all.
Chapter 10
711
Tutorial
A window reporting the download will then appear, which

shows the status of the file transfer. Once this phase is over,
the download is ended and the project we have just finished
editing will start on the panel automatically.
712
Chapter 10
Tutorial
Chapter 11
713
Available functions for Remote

connection from the PC
11.

Remote
Desktop
ESA puts at the user's disposal an application that can be bought separately (ESA order code: "PCREMOTEACCESS") or that
can be installed with the POLYMATH 1.60 version.
The application which we will call "Remote Desktop" allows to
have on the PC an identical vision of the terminal display where the project is found.
Installation and
registration
To use the "Remote Desktop" function, the software called

"ESAremote.exe" must be installed on the PC.
To install the application, follow the simple instructions which
the guided installation proposes.
At the end of installation, a license code for carrying out the
registration will be requested.
Registration is not obligatory, but if it is not carried out, product registration will be requested every time the application
is used and connection to the terminal is carried out.
714
Chapter 11
Use of Remote
Desktop
To use "Remote Desktop", do as follows:

From the "Explore Project" menu, double-click the product (in
this case IT105T) :
the following image will appear :
Chapter 11
715

Enable the "Activate Remote Access" function and assign a
"User Name" (in our example we have inserted "USER1" in the
"IT Panel Remote Access" window of the "General" mask) :
The first time the project is transferred with the "Remote Desktop" function enabled, the user will be requested to re-start
the terminal :
Connect a standard Ethernet cable (or the ESA

CVNET11002 cable) between the terminal and the PC
Launch the "ESA REMOTE.exe" application. The following image will appear :
716
Chapter 11
Clicking on the "Options" key, the language with which

the "Remote Desktop" software mask is displayed (English / Italian) can be chosen :
Carry out the registration on-line (if not already carried

out) choosing the "Registration" option from the "?" menu.
Set the '"PC IP address" clicking on the "Detect IP" key.
Chapter 11
717

POLYMATH 2.0 has a new "Remote Desktop" containing a new
function for storing up to 5 different IP addresses for the PC,
Panel and User Name, so you do not need to insert all the data
manually.
Click the drop-down menu to select the IP address of the PC :
Click the drop-down menu to select the IP address of the Panel:
718
Chapter 11
From the IT control panel, clicK the Network icon :
The following image will appear, from this image you can
obtain the IT IP address (in our example the IP address is
192.168.100.1) :
To establish the connection between PC and IT, the IP address

of the terminal must be compatible with the IP address of the
PC.
Chapter 11
719

Insert the same "User Name" which we assigned previously (USER1).

Click the drop-down menu to select one of the other
possible "User Names" :
The "PASSWORD" field can be left empty. Otherwise, to

attribute a password, it must be assigned from the terminal :
720
Chapter 11
1 - Click "Control panel" :
2 - Click the "Password" icon :
3 - Set the password (for example 1234), then press "OK" :
Chapter 11
721

At this point, the "Password" field (on the PC) can be filled out inserting the same one set on the terminal
(1234).
Assign the "Refresh Time" (it establishes in how much
time the image that appears on the PC video will be
updated. Normally 0.5 sec. is a good solution).
Click "Connect". The image displayed on the terminal
will appear on the PC :
Every operation carried out on the terminal is displayed on the

PC and vice-versa.
Enable and
disable FTP
FTP Server
Another important function that ESA puts at the user's disposal (starting with the POLYMATH 1.60 version), is the "FTP
Server".
The "FTP" acronym means "Files Transfer Protocol". It gives
the user the possibility to enable and disable the "FTP Server"
service of the panel from any other device (PC,XS,IT) connected to the network.
This function is very useful when it is necessary to write, cancel or modify data on the terminal easily from a remote access.
The remote access disks are the following :
My Device\Hard Disk\FTP (default folder)

My Device\Hard Disk2 (if a "USB pen" is used as well)
My Device\Storage Card (if a "Secure Digital" is used as
well)
722
Chapter 11
FTP Server features
From the ESA terminal, click on "Control panel" :
Click on the "FTP" icon. The following image will appear :
Selecting the "Enable" option, the "FTP" folder sharing service

in the "Hard Disk" directory is enabled
Chapter 11
723

Selecting the "Upload" option, the "writing / modify" mode of

the shared folders is enabled :
The 3 folders that can be used simultaneously are shown in

the following image :
In this way, besides the folder reserved by default (My Device\Hard Disk\FTP), a further memory space than can be used
remotely can also be accessed.
At the end of the configurations just described, click "OK" to
make them effective.
724
Chapter 11
Passthrough
Another important function that ESA puts at the user's disposal (starting with the POLYMATH 2.10 version), is the Passthrough.
Passthrough refers to the possibility of downloading or uploading the program of a PLC connected to one of our operator
panel serial ports in the IT range. This function can be obtained by having the user's PC staying directly connected to the
operator panel using the ETHERNET port, in practice it is possible to be connected to the PLC using the same PLC programming SW.
Note: The Passthrough software is compatible with platforms: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7.
A field has been inserted inside Polymath (double click on "Panel type" inside "Explore Project ") to enable this function
when user is downloading the project :
Based on panel type used in project, user can use the "Passthrough" function by enabling one of the connection ports
available in the "Enable Passthrough" sub mask :
Chapter 11
725

Note : When user chooses item SP1, only the SP1 port is enabled for
Passthrough, when user chooses item SP2, only the SP2 port is enabled for Passthrough. The SP2 field is editable only when panel has
two serial ports.
In order to be used, the "Passthrough" function requires a software that ESA makes available to users in the Polymath setup
DVD (see chap. 2, Installing POLYMATH page 9), in the Polymath Suite menu, under the "Install ESA Passthrough" item,
the software is installed in the same directory as Polymath; after it is installed, the software allows establishing a connection
between the PLC development tool and the PLC connected to
the IT panel.
To be able to do this, virtual serial ports must be created.
The ESA Passthrough software allows the user to choose which port to use in order to communicate and to download or
upload the PLC program.
Note: It is possible to use Passthrough only with OMRON and PANASONIC devices
726
Chapter 11
After the ESA Passthrough software is installed, a configuration window opens below by clicking on the new icon "ESA
Passthrough" which is on the PC Desktop :
Inside the File menu the following options are available :

"Open": With the "Open" item user can load a previously saved configuration file.
"Save": With the "Save" item user can save configuration of the selected device on grid (Address and Port)
"Save as": saves configuration as a ".pht" file format
and customised path.
Chapter 11
727

"Close": With the "Close" key user exits application; if

configuration has not been saved the user will be asked
if he wants to save it.
Inside the Option menu, user can choose between the available languages :
Inside the "?" menu, user can see the software version installed on PC :
728
Chapter 11
After having Connected the ETH cable and having inserted the
correct parameters, application is connected to the IT panel
by using the "Connect" key
During Connection, a dialog box window with relative data
connection (address, IP, errors, ...) opens, using the "Disconnect" key the connection can also be interrupted :
In the ESA Passthrough window it is also possible to modify

the COM virtual port and the SP1 or SP2 Panel port.
Chapter 11
729

Dopo aver configurato tutti i parametri premendo il tasto Avvio si aprir una dialog-box, contemporaneamente sul pannello verr disattivata la modalit Runtime ed apparir una
finestra a pieno schermo contenente tutti i dati della connessione Passthrough; a questo punto l'utente non potr pi interagire in nessun modo con il pannello :
User has to click on the "Stop" key to interrupt the Passthrough mode :
730
Chapter 11
After pressing the "Stop" key user interrupts the "Passthrough" mode and the window can be closed :
Chapter 12
731
Panels network
12.
Panels network
In order to create a panel network, first create a number n of

single products corresponding to the panels to be connected
between them. Remember to make available the variables on
the network then create a network project that incorporates
each single project. Download must be carried out only from
the network project until the projects are linked between
them. If not, they will remain single and independent.
A detailed description of the procedure in order to create a
panels network follows.
Example
creation of
panels
network
Example of network layout between 2 server panels (those

that make the variables available to various clients of the
network) and 2 client panels.
Create a new project for the first server panel, connecting the
desired device and develop it as per a normal project taking
care to check the box "allow the tag value to be visible on the
network".
732
Chapter 12
Panels network
Name: name of the variable visible on the network

Comment: a text can be inserted that comments the variable
Network identifier: non changeable progressive number that
identifies the variable
When it has been created, save the project and using the
same method, create the one for the second server.
Now create the client project connecting the Tcp/IP http
device that is found in the device list below: "Others - Esa
Electronic" and develop it as a normal project. In the definition
of the variables below "Address -Type" select the Network.
When creation is terminated, save the project and create in

the same way, the one for the second client.
Chapter 12
733
Panels network
Create now a new project.

Select as project type: "Panels network".
Click on
the three points at the end of the white box to add,
by means of the normal window of Windows, the first project.
Following click on Add and insert the other three projects
developed previously.
Complete the guided procedure as a normal project.

Double click on the name of the first panel (in this case
"Client105") and by means of the section "Network" configure
the network parameters. The network parameters configured
in this section will over write those already configured in the
panel. Therefore, they will be those to be used on the system.
During bench test phase, use IP static addresses.t
The proxy supported by the network projects is HTTP type.
Note: If the information is not recognised, contact the system

administrator.
734
Chapter 12
Panels network
Make sure that in the section "share tag" the check "Enable
share tag device" is enabled
Shared tags password: a password can be determined to
protect the shared tags
Shared tags gate: the gate for the shared tags can be
determined
At this point, double click on the first client tag and using the
section link associate the client tag with that of the server.
Node type the type of node belonging to the server can be

selected
Node: the server from which the tag will be chosen can be
selected
Tag name: the tag to be associated can be selected.
When the above phases are terminated, save and compile the
project after which proceed to download.
Download the
network
project
Start the compilation of the project by clicking on the icon

of the Tool bar or from File->Compile on the main menu (see
chap. capitolo 8, Compiling, Downloading and Runtime
page 503).
Chapter 12
735
Panels network
Start transfer by clicking on the icon

of the Tool bar or from
the File->Download on the main menu. The network panel/
panels window will display towards which download will be
carried out.
At the end of compilation, POLYMATH will display the window
relative to the hardware configuration of the machineterminal connection; select therefore, the type of connection
between Ethernet -TCP/IP or USB.
Ethernet - TCP/IP connection
In the field device address and Gate insert the IP address
and the panel gate whose name is indicated in the box above.
Insert the password if it has been configured (see chap.
capitolo 8, Compiling, Downloading and Runtime page 503).
Click on forward and if the parameters have been configured
correctly, a download window will be displayed. Proceed as for
a single project(see chap. capitolo 8, Compiling,
Downloading and Runtime page 503). When the first
download is terminated, POLYMATH will return to the
connection choice conditions (if in the project choice window
there are two or more selected projects) . Insert the IP panel
address whose name is indicated in the box above and
download. Repeat operation until the last project
USB connection
If a USB connection is selected, connect the USB gate of the
PC to that of the panel whose name is indicated in the box
above. Insert the password if it has been configured (see
chap. capitolo 8, Compiling, Downloading and Runtime
page 503).
Click on forward and if the parameters and the connections
have been configured correctly, a download window will be
displayed. Proceed as for a single project (see chap. capitolo
8, Compiling, Downloading and Runtime page 503). When
the first download is terminated, POLYMATH will return to the
connection choice conditions (if in the project choice window
there are two or more selected projects). Disconnect the panel
where download has been completed and connect the second
panel whose name is indicated in the box above. Switch off
and on again the panel so that POLYMATH recognises the
second panel and download. Repeat operation until the last
project
736
Chapter 12
Panels network
Appendix A - System Variables
A.
737
In this section we analyse the meaning of one particular type

of variable, the system variable inside the terminal, which in
RUNTIME is a read-only variable.
In general, these represent the operating status of the
terminal and the project currently being executed.
System variables can be created in the project the same way
as other variables and be managed and used in the same way
(see chap. 5, General, pag. 139). The name of the default
system variables begins with the prefix SYS_ followed by a
string identifying its function.
To represent the system variables in the project, POLYMATH
makes a system library available containing predefined pages
for displaying this type of variable (see chap. 7, POLYMATH
Libraries, pag. 479).
Table 1: Meaning of System Variables
Variable
Description
Type
Name of terminal; for TCP/IP

network terminals this always
coincides with the network name of
the terminal (e.g.: \\TermCE)
String
SYS_Machine
Name
SYS_IPAddress
IP address of terminal
String
SYS_OSName
Operating system (e.g.: CE4.2.)
String
SYS_Screen_Hor_
Dim
Horizontal dimension of screen

(pixels)
Int
SYS_Screen_Vert
_Dim
Vertical dimension of screen

(pixels)
Int
String
SYS_Project
Version
Version of project; the string

(never an empty string) has the
following structure: Vvv.rr ddmm-yyyy where: vv: version
(from 01) rr: release (from 00)
dd-mm-yyyy: release date
SYS_Author
Name of project author
String
SYS_Author_Org
Name of organization to which the

project author belongs
String
738

Variable
Description
Type
SYS_Project_
Name
Name of the project
String
SYS_AlarmPath
File path for alarm history
String
SYS_RecipePath
File path for the recipes
String
SYS_TrendPath
File path for trends
String
SYS_UsrLog
Log file path and name for user

access
String
SYS_PageNum
Number of non POP UP project

pages
Int
SYS_UserNum
Number of users configured
Int
SYS_TimerNun
Number of timers
Int
SYS_Pipelines
Num
Number of pipelines in project
Int
SYS_PWDDefault
Default protection level (that is,

with no user logged on)
Int
SYS_Font
Name of font (face_name) used as

system font
String
Number of languages configured
Int
With X being a value between 1 and

8 (inclusive); name of the Xth
language configured
Int
SYS_LanguageX
SYS_CurrentPage
Name of current non pop-up page
String
SYS_Page
Name of focus page (including

popup)
String
SYS_ShowFocus
TRUE if focus display is enabled,

otherwise FALSE
Boolea
n
SYS_Script
Name of Script currently being

executed (empty if none)
String
SYS_Language
Num
739

Variable
Description
Type
Long
Int
SYS_DateAnd
Time
Date and time of system (format

t_time Windows); VT settings using
POLYMATH also make it possible to
define the refresh frequency for
this variable (see chap. 5,
Configuring the Boot, pag. 131)
SYS_AlarmNotOff
Number of active alarms not

terminated in the system
Int
SYS_AlarmNot
Ack
Number of active alarms not

acquired in the system
Int
SYS_History
Warning
TRUE if alarm history has reached

the limit set in POLYMATH (see
chap. 5, Behaviour, pag. 187)
Boolea
n
SYS_HistoryFull
TRUE if alarm history has reached

the maximum limit set in
POLYMATH (see chap. 5, Memory
resources, pag. 186)
Boolea
n
SYS_BufferFull
TRUE if active alarm buffer has

reached the maximum limit set in
POLYMATH (see chap. 5, Memory
resources, pag. 186)
Boolea
n
SYS_AlarmNum
Total number of non-acknowledged

active alarms in the system
Int
Total number of recipes currently

saved in the VT memory
irrespective of their type
Int
SYS_RecipeNum
Int
SYS_RecipeXNum
With X being from 1 to the number

of recipe types in the project;
indicates the number of recipes of
type X currently saved in the VT
memory. There is one of these
TAGs for each type defined in the
project
SYS_CurrentUser
Name of present user
String
SYS_CurrentLevel
Current level of protection

(password)
Int
Name of current language
String
SYS_Current
Language
740

Variable
Description
Type
SYS_Current
LanguageID
ID of current language
Int
Boolea
n
SYS_TimerXYZ
Con XYZ being the name of the

timer. Becomes TRUE when the
timer XYZ is set off. There is a
variable of this type for every Timer
configured in the system
Int
SYS_ContTimer
XYZ
Con XYZ being the name of the

timer. Indicates the current value
of the XYZ. There is a variable of
this type for every Timer
configured in the system
SYS_LastError
Severity
Level of gravity of last error (0..2)
Int
SYS_LastError
Module
Software module that generated

last error (1..35>)
Int
SYS_LastError
Message
Numerical ID of last error message
Int
SYS_LastError
Text
Multilanguage string identifying

last error message
String
SYS_ReportPage
Report page number
Int
SYS_ReportPages
Total number of report pages
Int
Name of last current report
String
SYS_ReportPath
Directory of report destination
String
SYS_DM_Name
Name of the Device Manager to

which the TAGs are connected
String
True if DM is active
Boolea
na
SYS_DM_Error
Last error verified by the Device

Manager
String
SYS_DM_DBName
Name of the DM configuration file

(DEF/EXT)
String
SYS_DM_Groups
Num
Number of groups determined in

the project
Long
SYS_ReportName
SYS_DM_Active
741

Variable
Description
Type
SYS_DM_Items
Num
Number of items determined in the

project
Long
SYS_RCS_DB
Name
Name of the configuration system's

configuration file
String
SYS_RCS_Status
Operating status of the first

communication card
Int
SYS_RCS_FW
Name
Name of the first card's firmware

file
String
SYS_RCS_FW
Version
Version FW of the first

communication card
String
SYS_RCS_Hw
Version
Version HW of the first

communication card
String
SYS_RCS_BT
Version
Version BT of the first

communication card
String
SYS_RCS2_Status
Operating status of the second

communication card
Int
SYS_RCS2_Fw
Name
Name of the second card's

firmware file
String
SYS_RCS2_FW
Version
Version FW of the second

communication card
String
SYS_RCS2_HW
Version
Version HW of the second

communication card
String
SYS_RCS2_BT
Version
Version BT of the second

communication card
String
SYS_NATE_
Status
Operating status of the native

ethernet gate
Int
SYS_NATE_FW
Name
Name of the native ethernet gate's

firmware file
String
SYS_NATE_FW
Version
Version FW of the native ethernet

gate
String
SYS_NATE_HW
Version
Version HW of the native ethernet

gate
String
SYS_NATE_BT
Version
Version BT of the native ethernet

gate
String
742

Variable
Description
Type
SYS_COM1_
DriverName
Driver name on the first gate
String
SYS_COM1_
DriverStatus
Driver status on the first gate
String
SYS_COM1_
DriverPresent
TRUE if communication with the

field on the first gate is active
Boolea
na
SYS_COM1_
DriverVersion
Driver version on the first gate
String
SYS_COM1_
DriverAddress
Terminal address on the first gate
String
SYS_COM2_
DriverName
Driver name on the second gate
String
SYS_COM2_
DriverStatus
Driver status on the second gate
String
SYS_COM2_
DriverPresent
TRUE if communication with the

field on the second gate is active
Boolea
na
SYS_COM2_
DriverVersion
Driver version on the second gate
String
SYS_COM2_
DriverAddress
Terminal address on the second

gate
String
SYS_ETH_Driver
Name
Driver name on the ethernet gate

(gate1 / logic1)
String
SYS_ETH_Driver
Status
Driver status on the ethernet gate

(gate1 / logic1)
String
SYS_ETH_Driver
Present
True if communication with the

field on the ethernet gate is active
(gate1 / Logic1)
Boolea
na
SYS_ETH_Driver
Version
Driver version on the ethernet gate

(gate1 / logic1)
String
SYS_ETH_Driver
Address
Terminal address on the ethernet

gate (gate1 / logic1)
String
SYS_ETH2_Driver
Name

(gate1 / logic 2)
String
SYS_ETH2_Driver
Status

(gate1 / logic2)
String
743

Variable
Description
Type
SYS_ETH2_Driver
Present

(gate1 / Logic2
Boolea
na
SYS_ETH2_Driver
Version

(gate1 / logic2)
String
SYS_ETH2_Driver
Address

String
SYS_ETH3_Driver
Name

(gate2 / logic 1)
String
SYS_ETH3_Driver
Status

(gate2 / logic1)
String
SYS_ETH3_Driver
Present

(gate2 / Logic1
Boolea
na
SYS_ETH3_Driver
Version

(gate2 / logic1)
String
SYS_ETH3_Driver
Address

String
SYS_ETH4_Driver
Name

(gate2 / logic 2)
String
SYS_ETH4_Driver
Status

(gate2/ logic2)
String
SYS_ETH4_Driver
Present

(gate2 / Logic2
Boolea
na
SYS_ETH4_Driver
Version

(gate2 / logic2)
String
SYS_ETH4_Driver
Address

String
744
Appendix B - Predefined functions
B.
745
This section is dedicated to the meanings of the predefined

functions in POLYMATH that will prove useful during the development of a project. In general, they can be assigned to the
events of the various POLYMATH objects (see chap. 6, Events
Editor page 288) and can be selected from the relevant pulldown menu. For certain types of function it is also necessary
to specify the variables or the objects that that function should
effect and indicate the values with which it should operate.
A typical example of the use of predefined functions in POLYMATH is when they are assigned to touch buttons and touch
areas when changing values of value fields or when opening
and closing pages and pop-ups.
Functions relating to alarms
Table 1: Functions relating to alarms
Function
Description
ClearAlarmHistory
Cancels the buffer containing the

alarm history; may be useful to insert
a button with this function near an
alarm history table (see chap. 6,
Alarm History View page 434)
ExportAlarmHistory
Exports all alarms in the history to a

file. The name of the destination file
and its format (XML or CSV) need to be
specified.
ExportActiveAlarms
Exports all active alarms in RUNTIME

to a file. The name of the destination
file and its format (XML or CSV) need
to be specified.
746
Functions relating to users and password

Table 2: Functions relating to users and password
Function
Description
UserLogin
Makes it possible to invoke the user

log-in operation (see chap. 5, Password configuration page 213). Makes
the window for inserting the user name
and password appear in RUNTIME.
UserLogout
Makes it possible to invoke the log-out

operation. Makes a message of confirmation appear in RUNTIME. If confirmed, this operation takes the
session-user to default status (can also
be sent to a certain page each time the
log-out operation is executed, see
page 213).
ChangeUserPassword
Changes the password of the user currently logged-in; has no effect if no user is logged on when pressed.
ExportUserLog
Allows controlling Password protected

objects accesses (see chap. 5, User
log Export page 218)
Functions relating to recipes

To have an overview of the way the operations performed by
the following functions work, the reader is advised to consult
the section of the manual dealing with the transfer of recipes
between the terminal and the device (see chap. 6, Operations
for transferring Recipes page 443).
Table 3: Functions relating to recipes
Function
Description
LoadRecipe
Loads a recipe of a particular type.

POLYMATH requires that the type of
recipe (see chap. 5, Creating and
changing a Recipe type page 210) to
which this command refers be specified. The user is offered a choice between the list of available recipes in
runtime.
747

Function
Description
DownloadRecipe
Buffer
Allows downloading recipes buffer

from terminal to PLC (or device);
POLYMATH requires the type of recipe
(see chap. 5, Creating and changing a
Recipe type page 210) to which this
command refers to be specified and
whether the transfer should occur after
synchronization or not. By pressing
this key in runtime the buffer is downloaded to the terminal.
DownloadRecipe
Downloads one or more recipes to the

terminal. POLYMATH requires the type
of recipe (see chap. 5, Creating and
which this command refers to be specified and whether the transfer should
occur after synchronization or not. By
pressing in runtime the key associated
with this function, the list of the recipes of the type defined is provided and
the operator can choose which recipe
to download.
SaveRecipeBuffer
Saves the recipe buffer; POLYMATH requires the type of recipe (see chap. 5,
page 210) to which this command refers to be specified.
ClearRecipeBuffer
Cancels the buffer containing the recipes; may be useful to insert a button
with this function near an alarm history table (see chap. 5, Creating and
changing a Recipe type page 210).
DeleteRecipe
Cancels one or more recipes; POLYMATH requires the type of recipe (see
chap. 5, Creating and changing a Recipe type page 210) to which this command refers to be specified. By
pressing in runtime the key associated
with this function, the list of the recipes of the type defined is provided and
the operator can choose which recipe
to download.
UploadBufferRecipe
Allows loading recipes buffer from PLC

(or device) to terminal.
748

Function
Description
ExportRecipe
Exports a recipe to a CSV or XML file on

the terminal; POLYMATH requires the
type of recipe (see chap. 5, Creating
and changing a Recipe type
page 210) to which this command refers to be specified. By pressing in
runtime the key associated with this
function, the list of the recipes of the
type defined is provided and the operator can choose which recipe to export
and (once this is selected) the name
and path of the destination file.
ImportRecipes
Imports the recipes contained in a CSV

or XML file on the terminal
ExportRecipeType
Makes it possible to export to a CSV or

XML file all the recipes of a certain
type; POLYMATH requires the type of
recipe (see chap. 5, Creating and
which this command refers to be specified. The operator can indicate the
name and path of the destination file in
runtime.
ExportRecipeAllTypes
Makes it possible to export to a CSV or

XML file all the recipes whatever their
type. The operator can indicate the
name and path of the destination file in
runtime.
StopRecipeTransfer
Ends recipe transfer; POLYMATH requires the type of recipe (see chap. 5,
page 210) to which this command refers to be specified
StopAllRecipe
Transfers
Interrupts all current recipe transfers.
749
Functions relating to pages

Table 4: Functions relating to pages
Function
Description
ShowNextPage
Shows next page (follows order of

page ID numbers). If this command is
on a Pop-up page, the next Pop-up
page is shown
ShowPreviousPage
Shows previous page (follows order of

page ID numbers). If this command is
on a Pop-up page, the previous Pop-up
page is shown.
ShowPageName
Displays page defined. the name of the

page to be shown needs to be specified
in POLYMATH.
ShowPageNumber
Displays page defined. the number of

the page to be shown needs to be
specified in POLYMATH.
ShowPreviousOpened
Page
Shows the previously viewed page (it

goes back to the previously opened page based on opening order and not
number).
CloseCurrentPopup
Page
Closes only the current pop-up page

(with the command); must be assigned to an element or event of a popup page.
ClosePopupPage
Name
Closes the pop-up page defined; the

name of the page to be closed must be
defined.
ClosePopupPage
Number
Closes the pop-up page defined; the

number of the page to be closed must
be defined.
CloseAllPopupPage
Closes all the pop-up pages currently

open in RUNTIME.
ShowHelp
Shows POLYMATH-defined Help relating to the page (full or pop-up) currently being displayed (see chap. 5,
Help pages page 173 and see chap.
5, Help pages page 173)
750
Table 4: Functions relating to pages

Function
Description
ShowFocus
Shows the focus of the application

(this function makes it possible to
change the general settings relating to
the focus in RUNTIME, see chap. 5,
Main window page 129)
HideFocus
Hides the focus of the application (this

function makes it possible to change
the general settings relating to the focus in RUNTIME, see chap. 5, Main
window page 129)
Functions relating to the project

Table 5: Functions relating to the project
Function
Description
ChangeNextLanguage
Changes the project language currently being used to the next one in the list
defined in POLYMATH (see chap. 5,
Languages page 166); all the elements subject to translation are displayed in the new language.
ChangeLanguage
Changes the project language currently being used to the defined one; all
the elements subject to translation are
displayed in the new language.
ExitRuntime
In RUNTIME this function exits from

the project completely, returning the
operator to the environment of the
panels operating system.
Minimize
Reduces the project to an icon; the

corresponding icon can be found in the
applications bar.
LightUp
It increases brightness of led display

terminals (IT104, IT105T, IT107W)
LightDown
It decreases brightness of led display

terminals (IT104, IT105T, IT107W)
LightSet
It sets brightness of led display terminals (IT104, IT105T, IT107W)
751
Table 5: Functions relating to the project

Function
Description
RunApplication
It launches an application that has been installed on the device (PC, XS)
Flush Persistent Data
Used to force the writing of the actual

persistent-type internal Tag values
ShowCalculator
It shows calculator
ShutDown
Allows to turn off PC directly from Runtime
DownloadPanasonic
PlcProgram
Allows transferring a "Panasonic"

project to PLC using the terminal
ChangeModbusSlave
Address
Used to change the address of a SLAVE Modbus
RunExcel
Used to launch the "Excel" application. The document to be opened can

be indicated with the application
(name and pathway)
RunInternetExplorer
Used to launch the "Internet Explorer"

application
RunMediaPlayer
Used to launch the "Media Player"

application. The document to be
opened can be indicated with the application (name and pathway)
RunPDF
Used to launch the "Acrobat Reader"

application. The document to be
opened can be indicated with the application (name and pathway)
RunWord
Used to launch the "Word" application. The document to be opened can

be indicated with the application
(name and pathway)
752
Note: The "Run" functions allow to launch applications such as "Excel" , "Internet Explorer" , "Media Player" , "Acrobat Reader"
and "Word" . These functions are only available on ESA terminals with "Windows CE Professional Plus" license (for example in
code IT110T1112 the "Professional Plus" license can be identified
by "1" in position "7" of the code).
Note: The "Run Application" function, that can be used only with PC
and XS, allows launching an external application; it is possible to
directly insert path to be executed in order to open a file (1) in the
configuration mask, otherwise it is possible to look for the executable file (".exe") of the application to be launched using Windows
explorer (2).
Note: The "ShutDown" function, which may only be used with PC

and XS, allows to turn off the PC / XS directly from Runtime, without
accessing Windows, the function therefore stops Runtime and then
turns off the PC / XS. The "ShutDown" function may be used for the
following operative systems: Windows 2000, Windows Xp, Windows 7 32 bit, Windows 7 64 bit. The function is also available inside Script commands
Graphic examples of what was previously described:

(1) :
753
(2) :
Functions relating to trends

Table 6: Functions relating to Trends
Function
Description
TrendAcquireSample
Performs a trend sample reading; the

trend buffer the command works on
must be given as an input parameter
(see chap. 5, In runtime the system
supplies the support for the acquisition
and accumulation of numerical values
and for their graphic presentation in
the form of a trend curve. page 221
754
Table 6: Functions relating to Trends

Function
Description
TrendExport
Exports the trend indicated to a file;

the relevant Trend Buffer and the
name and type of destination file need
to be defined,
TrendEnable
Enables acquisition of the trend indicator; the trend buffer the command relates to must be defined as an input
parameter (see chap. 5, In runtime
the system supplies the support for the
acquisition and accumulation of numerical values and for their graphic
presentation in the form of a trend
curve. page 221)
TrendDisable
Disables acquisition of the trend indicated; the trend buffer that the command relates to must be defined as an
input parameter (see chap. 5, In runtime the system supplies the support
for the acquisition and accumulation of
numerical values and for their graphic
curve. page 221)
TrendReset
Clears the buffer of the trend indicated; the trend buffer that the command
relates to must be defined as an input
parameter (see chap. 5, In runtime
the system supplies the support for the
acquisition and accumulation of numerical values and for their graphic
curve. page 221)
Functions relating to direct commands

Table 7: Functions relating to direct commands
Function
Description
SetBit
Forces the value of a bit of a variable

to a defined value; in POLYMATH the
variable and the position of the bit to
be forced need to be specified.
755
Table 7: Functions relating to direct commands

Function
Description
ResetBit
Allows the value of a bit to be reset;

the variable to be reset and the position of the bit to be reset need to be
defined.
ToggleBit
Inverts the value of a bit of a variable

to a defined value; in POLYMATH the
variable and the position of the bit to
be inverted need to be specified.
Set
Forces the value of a variable to a defined value; in POLYMATH the variable

and to be forced and the corresponding
value need to be specified.
Add
Used to increase a variable by one value; must indicate the variable to which
the command and the increase value
should be applied.
Subtract
Used to decrease a variable by one value; must indicate the variable to which
the command and the decrease value
should be applied.
And
This executes a logical AND-operation

on the binary representation of the
values; must specify the variable on
which to perform the operation and the
value with which to execute the AND.
The result of the operation will substitute the original value of the variable.
Or
This executes a logical OR-operation

value with which to execute the OR.
Xor
This executes a logical XOR-operation

value with which to execute the XOR.
756
Functions relating to pipelines

Table 8: Functions relating to pipelines
Function
Description
StartPipeline
Starts the pipeline defined according

to the settings set out in the editor; in
POLYMATH the name of the Pipeline to
be started must be specified.
StopPipeline
Stops the pipeline defined from working; in POLYMATH the name of the
Pipeline to be stopped must be specified.
WritePipeline
When this function is invoked the writing of a pipeline defined independently

of its settings (the writing occurs even
if the pipeline has been stopped) takes
place.
Functions relating to timers

Table 9: Functions relating to timers
Function
Description
StartTimer
Starts the count of the selected Timers; need to specify the name of the
timer to which the command refers
(see chap. 5, Timers page 274).
StopTimer
Starts the count of the selected Timers; need to specify the name of the
timer to which the command refers
(see chap. 5, Timers page 274).
SuspendTimer
Momentarily suspends the count of the

selected Timers; the count of the selected Timers; need to specify the
name of the timer to which the command refers (see chap. 5, Timers
page 274).
SetTimerValue
Set the value of the selected Timers;

the count of the selected Timers; need
to specify the name of the timer to
which the command refers (see chap.
5, Timers page 274).
757
Functions relating to printing

Table 10: Functions relating to printing
Function
Description
PrinterSetup
This command brings up the print preferences window: to choose printer,

format, etc.) in runtime.
HardCopy
This function makes it possible to print

the contents of the current page (see
chap. 5, Points relating to print formats: XML and Hardcopy page 246);
need to specify if the print preference
window, the print mode (1=page hardcopy, 2=full screen hardcopy) and the
page orientation (horizontal or vertical) should be shown.
ReportPrint
Prints one of the Reports defined in the

project; need to specify if the print
preference window and the name of
the Report to be printed should be
shown.
ReportPrintSave
This function, apart from executing the

print, saves the contents in an PDF file;
need to specify whether to show the
print preference window, the name of
the Report to be printed and the name
of the PDF file in which the contents of
the Report will be saved (if the file already exists, the contents will be overwritten).
ReportSave
This function saves the Report contents into an PDF file; specify the name
of the Report to be printed and the
name of the PDF file in which the contents of the Report will be saved (if the
file already exists, the contents will be
overwritten).
758
Functions relating to Data Log

Table 11: Functions relating to Data Log
Function
Description
DataLogAcquire
Sample
Reads Data Log sample; the LogBuffer

that the control must act upon is required upon input (see chap. 5, DataLog
page 228
DataLogExport
Exports the indicated Data Log to file;

requires that relative LogBuffer, name
and destination file be specified.
DataLogEnable
Enables acquisition of indicated Data

Log; the Log Buffer that the control
must act upon is required upon
input(see chap. 5, DataLog
page 228)
DataLogDisable
Disables acquisition of indicated Data

Log; the LogBuffer that the control
must act upon is required upon input
(see chap. 5, DataLog page 228)
DataLogReset
Resets indicated Data Log buffer; the

Log Buffer that the control must act
upon is required upon input (see chap.
5, DataLog page 228)
Functions relating to Remote Notification

Table 12: Functions relating to Remote Notification
Function
Description
SendMsg
Sends notification messages to a previously created user list via email, SMS
or Proxy (see chap. 5, Remote Notifications page 246)
759
Functions relating to Chronotermostat

Table 13: Functions relating to Chronotermostat
Function
Description
SetManual
Temperature
Enables manual mode following tag

value set in weekly tag Chrono-thermostat (see chap. 6, Chronothermostat page 445)
760
Appendix C - Status area
C.
761
The terminal can be set to write information regarding its status and functioning onto defined memory areas. This information can be used by the device while it is carrying out its work.
Unlike in the case of command areas, here the panel supplies
information to the device. There are four types of status information that the terminal can write to these memory areas:
status of VT: informs the device of the display and operating status of the terminal.
status of keyboard
status of recipes (new style)
status of recipes (old style - VTWIN-compatible mode)
The memory area reserved for the status area will depend on
the type of information to be supplied by the terminal: the VT
status requires 6 Words, the Keyboard status 2 Words and the
Recipes status areas are 2 Words and 1 Word respectively.
In POLYMATH, the status areas can be defined in the course
of the general configuration of the panel (see chap. 5, Exchange areas a pag. 132).
VT Status area
The status area relating to the panel is composed of 6 words,

each of which assumes a meaning in line with what is set out
in the table below.
Tabella 1: Structure of VT status area
Word
Description
VT_STATUS: contains bit-coded status

information (see chap. C, VT_STATUS
values a pag. 762)
SEQUENCE_ID: contains the numeric

ID of the active sequence (including
pop-ups) in focus. If no sequence is
active the value is 0
PAGE_ID: contains the numeric ID of

the page (including pop-ups) in focus
(can never be 0 when the Runtime is
active)
762
Tabella 1: Structure of VT status area

Word
Description
CONTEXT_VALUE: the value depends

on the page/control in focus (see chap.
C, CONTEXT_VALUE values a
pag. 763)
MAIN_SEQUENCE_ID: contains the

numeric ID of the active non pop-up
(or base) sequence. If no sequence is
active the value is 0
MAIN_PAGE_ID: contains the numeric

ID of the base page currently being
displayed (can never be 0 when the
Runtime is active).
VT_STATUS values
Tabella 2: Meaning of VT_STATUS bit values
Bit
Description
WATCHDOG: in the course of normal

working the VT sets the bit at 1. If from
time to time the device sets it at 0, you
can check the Runtime is active (in
which case the VT will set it at 1 with a
refresh period corresponding to the
TAG-AREA)
EDITING_MODE: set at 1 when any active base page field is in editing mode
ALARM_PRESENT: set at 1 when at

least one alarm is active (whether recognised or not)
ALARM_PENDING: set at 1 when at

least one alarm has not been acknowledged
COMMAND_NACK: set at 1 when a

command from the device has not
been accepted by the VT
ALARM_BUFFER_WLEVEL: set at 1 if
the alarm history has reached its
threshold (percentage determined by
the maximum capacity available)
763
Tabella 2: Meaning of VT_STATUS bit values

Bit
Description
ALARM_BUFFER_FULL: set at 1 if the

alarm buffer is full
N.U.: not used
CONTEXT_VALUE values
Tabella 3: Meaning of CONTEXT_VALUE bit values
Bit
Description
Default value
Focus is checking sequence directory

or project pages
Displayed (and is focus) service/driver

status page
Focus is a HELP page message
Focus is an alarm check
Focus is a recipe list check
Focus is a check of alarm history list
Keyboard
status area
The status area relating to the keyboard is composed of 2

Words, making a total of 32 bits. Each bit corresponds to an F
key on the keyboard where bit 0 is assigned to F1, bit 1 to F2
and so on for all the successive keys. The bits are set at 1
when the key is held down, 0 when released. The value of the
bit simply reflects the status held-released (irrespective of
any script or function assigned to the key) and if the keyboard
is disconnected the value is at 0.
Status area of
recipes - new
style (noncompatible
mode)
The status area for the recipes in non-compatible mode (see

chap. 5, Modes of compatibility a pag. 209) is composed of
3 Words, each of which having a specific meaning:
Word 0: status word containing the bits indicating the

status of the transfer
Word 1: contains the ID of the recipe to be transferred
Word 2: contains the checksum of the recipe (optional, used when the UseAreaChecksum flag is enabled)
764
The meanings of the bits of Word 0 are listed in the following

table:
Recipe status word values
Tabella 4: Meaning of recipe status word values
Status area of
recipes - old
style
(compatible
mode)
Bit
Description
high bit (1) if transfer is underway
high bit (1) if transfer from panel to device

has been requested
high bit (1) if transfer from panel to device

has been completed
high bit (1) if transfer from device to panel

has been requested
high bit (1) if transfer from device to panel

has been completed
14
high bit (1) if there is an error in the transfer

from panel to device
15

from device to panel
The status area for recipes in compatible mode (see chap. 5,

Modes of compatibility a pag. 209) is composed of Word
whose bits take on the following meanings :
Recipe status word values
Tabella 5: Meaning of recipe status word values s
Bit
Description
13
14
high bit (1) if the transfer is underway
15
high bit (1) if there has been a transfer request
Appendix D - Command area
D.
765
It is often necessary for the VTs in a plant to interact not only

with the operators (by means of the appropriate peripheral
devices like touch-screens and keyboards) but also with field
devices, so that commands can be received and status information transmitted. This information exchange is carried out
using special memory areas in the devices called Exchange areas.
These Exchange areas are, therefore, structures containing
various types of information (whose meaning and format is
set by the VT) which are regularly exchanged with the device.
An exchange area is a tag-area (see chap. 5, Value a
pag. 140) of one or more words residing in a field device.
Command response areas (variables) can also be used by the
VT to respond to a command sent by the device using the
Command area.
To help set command areas POLYMATH has a dedicated section that can be reached using Project Explorer (see chap. 5,
Exchange areas a pag. 132).
In this appendix we list the Command Areas that can be used
by the device to change the operating status of the VT (that
is, send commands).
The Command tag function and the Response tag have the
same layout and are generally made up of four words:
Tabella 1: Command Tag Structure and Response Tag
Word
Description
COMMAND_ID: contains the code of

the command requested/executed
PARAMETER_1: first parameter
PARAMETER_2: second parameter
PARAMETER_3: third parameter
The panel will execute the requested operation relative to the

value of the Word corresponding to the COMMAND_ID and
where necessary use the parameters indicated in the remaining 3 Words. The COMMAND_ID of the function, command area, is set at 0 by the VT when it is able to process a command
(free area).
766
To send a command the device must:

check that the COMMAND_ID is at 0
compile the parameters
set COMMAND_ID of the response tag at 0
set the command in the COMMAND_ID.
The VT executes the command and when it has finished puts
any parameters into the response area and then puts the
command code executed into the COMMAND_ID of the response tag. In addition, it frees the command tag by putting
0 into its COMMAND_ID.
If the command cannot be executed or there are errors in any
parameters, in the response tag the VT will put the value
0xFFFF (all 16 bits at 1) into the COMMAND_ID and puts the
non executed command code into PARAMETER_1. It frees,
however, the command tag by putting 0 into the
COMMAND_ID.
A command response tag should be assigned to each device
equipped with a command area.
The VT polls the command tags residing in the different devices, but always runs one command at a time, interrupting the
polling while the command itself is run.
The table below shows the codes relating to the various commands that can be used (COMMAND_ID) and the respective
parameters required for the execution.
Tabella 2: Command codes and parameters
ID
Description
Parameters
Forces sequence (non POPUP); if page ID is 0 it starts

from the first page. Not on
Touch Screen panels
PARAMETER_1:sequence ID
PARAMETER_2:page ID
PARAMETER_3:
Forces page (non POP-UP),

if a sequence is active, it is
disabled
PARAMETER_1:page ID
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
Forces the cursor onto the

current (non POP-UP) page
in the field whose index tab
is specified
PARAMETER_1:index tab
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
Sets the language indicated

in PARAMETER_1
PARAMETER_1:language ID
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
767

ID
Description
Parameters
14
Asks for the current time

(writes parameters onto the
response tag, see next table)
PARAMETER_1:
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
15
Asks for the current date

(writes parameters onto the
response tag, see next table)
PARAMETER_1:
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
16
Sets time specified in parameters; parameters contain time in BCD with the
format HHmmss00
PARAMETER_1: HHmm
PARAMETER_2: ss00
PARAMETER_3:
17
Sets date specified in parameters; parameters contain date in BCD with the
format DDMMYYYY
PARAMETER_1: DDMM
PARAMETER_2: YYYY
PARAMETER_3:
18
Reads sample (block) of

trend buffer specified by the
parameter
PARAMETER_1: trend ID
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
Clears (empties) alarm history
PARAMETER_1:
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
PARAMETER_1: syncro_cmd
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
20
Recipe synchronization:
syncro_cmd is bit-structured:
bit 15: confirms transfer
from VT to PLC
bit 14: confirms end of
transfer from VT to PLC
bit 13: transfer time-out
elapsed
PARAMETER_1: name (2
char)
char)
PARAMETER_3: type_id
21
Recipe transfer request

from VT to PLC. The first
two parameters contain the
name of the recipe (4 alphanumeric ASCII characters),
parameter 3 is the identifier
of the type of recipe. The
command can only be used
for compatible recipes (see
chap. 5, Modes of compatibility a pag. 209)
19
768

ID
Description
Parameters
char)
char)
22
Recipe sent from PLC to VT

without overwriting. The
first two parameters contain
the name of the recipe (4 alphanumeric ASCII characters), parameter 3 is the
identifier of the type of recipe. The command can only
be used for compatible recipes (see chap. 5, Modes of
compatibility a pag. 209)
char)
char)
23
Recipe sent from PLC to VT

with overwriting. The first
two parameters contain the
name of the recipe (4 alphanumeric ASCII characters),
parameter 3 is the identifier
of the type of recipe. The
command can only be used
for compatible recipes (see
chap. 5, Modes of compatibility a pag. 209)
26
Reads and writes the pipeline specified
PARAMETER_1: pipeline_id
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
27
Empties the trend buffer

specified
PARAMETER_1: trend_id
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
28
Commands single sample of

trend buffer specified
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
29
Stops sampling trend buffer

specified
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
Starts trend buffer specified
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
Requests printing of alarm

history
PARAMETER_1:
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
30
36
769

ID
Description
Parameters
37
Requests (HARDCOPY)
printing of the screen; if text
mode flag is at 1 printing
will be in text mode, otherwise in graphic mode
PARAMETER_1: text mode

flag
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
Forces printer Form Feed
PARAMETER_1:
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
39
Resets numbering of print

pages
PARAMETER_1:
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
43
Global alarm acknowledgement
PARAMETER_1:
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
46
Requests disabling (if flag is

at zero) or enabling (if flag
is at 1) of the touch screen:
if disabled, il terminal does
not respond to the touch
PARAMETER_1: flag
PARAMETER_2:
PARAMETER_3:
50
Requests transfer of recipe

from VT to PLC. Parameter
1 contains the ID of the recipe to be transferred while
parameter 2 has the identifier of the recipe type
PARAMETER_1: recipe_id
PARAMETER_3:
51
Sending recipe from PLC to

VT with overwriting. Parameter 1 contains the ID of the
recipe to be transferred
while parameter 2 has the
identifier of the recipe type
PARAMETER_1: recipe_id
PARAMETER_3:
52
Start the automatic execution of a pipeline
PARAMETER_1 : pipeline id
PARAMETER_2 :
PARAMETER_3 :
53
Stopt the automatic execution of a pipeline
PARAMETER_1 : pipeline id
PARAMETER_2 :
PARAMETER_3 :
54
Increase display light (one

discrete step)
PARAMETER_1 :
PARAMETER_2 :
PARAMETER_3 :
38
770

ID
Description
Parameters
55
Decrease display light (one

discrete step)
PARAMETER_1 :
PARAMETER_2 :
PARAMETER_3 :
Set the display light to a

specific level
PARAMETER_1 : (percentage of maximum light

0..100%)
PARAMETER_2 :
PARAMETER_3 :
Read a single samples set
PARAMETER_1 : buffer id
PARAMETER_2 :
PARAMETER_3 :
58
Clear the specified datalog

buffer content
PARAMETER_2 :
PARAMETER_3 :
59
Start the automatic acquisition of a datalog buffer
PARAMETER_2 :
PARAMETER_3 :
60
Stop the automatic acquisition of a datalog buffer
PARAMETER_2 :
PARAMETER_3 :
56
57
Note: Commands number 54, 55 and 56 are used only for terminals
with backlight LED.
Commands number 14 and 15 require data being written onto

the response tag as indicated in the next table:
Tabella 3: Response Tag codes and parameters

ID
Description
Parameters
14
Current time: the parameters contain time in BCD

with the format HHmmss00
PARAMETER_1: HHmm
PARAMETER_2: ss00
PARAMETER_3:
15
Current date: the parameters contain date in BCD

with the format DDMMYYYY
PARAMETER_1: DDMM
PARAMETER_2: YYYY
PARAMETER_3:
Command area
for New Style
(non
compatible)
recipes
771
In the case of non compatible recipes (see chap. 5, Modes of

compatibility a pag. 209) a 2-Word command area is used in
which the first Word indicates the command that the terminal
must execute while the second Word indicates the ID of the
recipe that has to be transferred.
The meanings of the commands of Word 0 are listed in the table below:
Tabella 4: Meanings of Word 0 bits of the Command area for non-compatible
recipes
Command area
for Old style
(compatible)
recipes
Bit
Description
If the bit is high (1) it indicates confirmation

for transfer from panel to device
If the bit is high (1) it indicates confirmation

for transfer from device to panel
If the bit is high (1) indicates request for nonsynchronized transfer from panel to device
If the bit is high (1) indicates request for synchronized transfer from panel to device
In the case of recipes configured as compatible with the old

style it is not necessary to define a dedicated Command area,
rather the Command area defined for the project will be used
with particular reference to commands 20,21,22 and 23 already described in the first part of this chapter.
772
Appendix E - VTxxxW Panels Management
E.
773
Appendix E - VTxxxW Panels

Management
In this manual reference has been made to programming the

terminals of the VTxxxCE range and the IT range. POLYMATH
however offers the possibility also to create and manage
projects relative to the products in the VTxxxW range. It is
possible to create new projects, again or open projects directly realised with ESA VTWIN application and with .vts extension.
Create new projects for VTxxxW products
The creation procedure of a new project for VTxxxW in POLYMATH is identical to that already described for the other terminals (see chapter , "
" on page
).
The only difference is in the terminal selection phase, where a
panel from the "VT" family must be selected.
Open projects created in VTWIN

POLYMATH allows to open and edit files created with ESA
VTWIN software directly. To open a project, the procedure is
the same used for any POLYMATH project (see, "
" chap-
774
ter on page
); in the file selection window, look through
the files with. vts extension.
Editing differences for different families of panels

By editing a project for a terminal in the VTxxxW family, it is
possible to make use of all POLYMATH utilities already described in this manual: copy/paste, library, zoom, graphic functionalities, etc...
The structure of the software (anchorable windows, tools bar
and menu) and the functioning mode are those already illustrated during this manual (see chapter, "
" on page
).
The main difference between editing of CE panels and those of
the Windows family is in the contents of the "Esplora Progetto"
(Project Explore). Only the functions supported by the operator panel selected in the project creation phase will be present. Moreover, the windows and the options available that
will be shown, vary in relation to the terminal model contained
in the project. The compilation and download windows are
structured following the structure of the relative windows in
VTWIN.
The next paragraph analyses the components of the Project
Explore in the editing phase of a VTxxxW project.
775
Note: when editing a project for VTxxxW terminals with POLYMATH, a more modern and simpler interface is offered, which allows to
make use of useful tools in the editing phase. However, new functionalities at Runtime level are not introduced.
Esplora
Progetto
Project Explore
The "Esplora Progetto" (Project Explore) contains all of the data relative to the project being edited. Its functioning has
already been specified in the relative section of this manual
(see chapter , "
" on page
).
In general, the editing windows of each element of the "Esplora Progetto" (Project Explore) will have the same options contained in the VTWIN application windows.
776
Appendix F - Update Operating

System
F.
777

System
In this chapter is reported operations sequence to follow with

Polymath to update the Operating System.
Before start the procedure be sure the terminal is turned off
and connect with ethernet cable to the PC.
Be sure subnet mask configurated on PC as follow
255.255.255.0 and IP address is within 192.168.100.2 and
192.168.100.255
Use the
icon to change path where is placed the new OS
image to download to the terminal.
778

System
Turn on the panel
The image downloading is in progress.
Waiting the end of the image download.

System
779
Waiting for the panel reboot.
780

System

Manual Esa Polymath

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Esa Polymath

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Esa Polymath

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is Polymath and what does it do?

What is Polymath and what does it do?

What are the minimum and recommended system requirements for Polymath?

What are the minimum and recommended system requirements for Polymath?

User

ESAPOLYMATH - User manual - rev. 2.2

Compilation of the network project ...........................................109

ESAPOLYMATH - User manual - rev. 2.2

ESAPOLYMATH - User manual - rev. 2.2

ESAPOLYMATH - User manual - rev. 2.2

Use of Remote Desktop ..............................................................714

ESAPOLYMATH - User manual - rev. 2.2

ESAPOLYMATH - User manual - rev. 2.2

The architecture of Polymath is extremely flexible as it allows

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

Note: For a better knowledge of the functions offered by a particular

The main Polymath functions include :

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

Data and Trend storage : Polymath allows to monitor

in the network to be automatically used within different

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

sign certain pages just once (see chap. 5, Indirect

Additional Polymath functions include :

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

Horizontal or vertical terminal direction

Remote project download

To make it easier to consult the manual and make the topics

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

Note: POLYMATH is a programming utility for ESA panels ESA that

Below are set out the minimum requirements necessary for

Windows XP with Service Pack 3

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

Below are set out the recommended requirements for being

Windows XP with Service Pack 3

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

Select your language of choice. This window appears offering

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

Select "Install Polymath". This window appears. Select your

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

Read and accept the license terms and select "Next :

Read and accept the license terms and select "Next :

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

Select one of the options and click "Next":

Select "Next in order not to modify the default folder of the

Note: as POLYMATH is a software in continuous development, with

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

Introduce the following information regarding the user :

Note: When Polymath is installed in Demo mode without license, a

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

Select "End, the POLYMATH installation procedure has ended.

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

Before we can confidently operate the numerous features

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

The functions offered by the toolbar can all be accessed via

The main menu is the tool that permits POLYMATHs main

It is located in the top part of the program window and is a

Table 1: Functions in the File menu

ESAPOLYMATH - User Manual - rev. 2.2

File -> New